CONTENTS

PAGE

Memoir and Bibliography: Joseph Garnett Wood, 1900-1959... 1

H. WomersLry: Some Acarina from Australia and New Guinea Paraphagic

upon Millipedes and Cockroaches and on Beetles of the EtOy

Passalidae. Part 4. The Family Diarthrophallidae .. _.... ll

H. Womers.ey: On the Family Diarthrophallidae (Acarina-Mesostigmata-

Monogynaspida) with Particular Reference to the genus Passalobia

Lombardini .. _..... we actuelle ooh at tg gett 27

M. J. TyLer: On the Diet and Feeding Habits of Hemidactylus frenatus

(Duméril and Bibron) (Reptilia-Geckonidae) at Rangoon, Burma ..... 45

N. H. Lupsroox: Subsurface Stratigraphy of the Maralinga Area, South

PNR 012: £1 PO 51

Mummg, I. A.: Determination of the Crustal Thickness of the Earth in the

General Region of Adelaide, South Australia... ee a ve 61

L. M. Ancet: Larval Trematodes from Australian Fresh-water Malis

Part XV. Cercaria velesunionis n. sp. 05 0 ot 63

D. E. Symon: The Species of Oxalis Established in South Australia... 71

H. Womenstry: Description of the Female of Trichonyssus womersleyi

Domrow (Acarina-Macronyssidae) (et 79

Warren T. AtyEo Anp D. A. Crosstey: Labidostommidae from Australia

(Acarina-Prostigmata) with the Description of a New Species __..... 83

E. H. Istnc: Bassia uniflora (FvM.) Ghee ginanse * and Allies in

South Australia 9 ete ecient MS coon 87

G. M. Curerenpse: Contributions to the Flora of Central Australia, No. 2 99

H. M. Cooper: Archaeological Stone Implements along the Lower River

Wakefield, South Australia 920 2. 105

D. Krnc: The Occurrence and Comparative Mineralogy of South Aus-

tralian Magnesian Crocidolites (Rhoducites) .

N. H. Lupsroox: Outline of the Biostratigraphy of Andatnnak Opalfield 129

N. H. Lupproox: Mesozoic Non-marine Mollusca (Pelecypage, Unionidae )

from the North of South Australia .. aon, jogger 139

H. H. Frytayson: Re-examination of M tesembryomys haves Gould, 1843

(Muridae) _..... ae oe +. ee ae ae. 149

R. V. Sourucott: Notes on the Genus Caeculisoma (Acarina-Erythraeidae) 163

Ihisteof Tsectures; 95921960) 0 179

Balance Sheet __..... ors re . .. 180

Awards of the Sir Totenbew Verco Medal and List of Fellows, 1960... 18]

Index i, cot iis «ett gg ee 186

JOSEPH GARNETT WOOD, D.SC., F.A.A.

Summary

JOSEPIL GARNETT WOOD, D.Sc., FAA,

Professor of Botany, University of Adelaide

1900-1959

Joseph Gurnett Wvuod's most tangible memorials are the Botany School of

the University of Adelaide with its graduates of the last thirty years, tagether

with a body of research work in plant physiology and ecology. More diffused

is bis share in the building up of science in Australia.

The salient fealures of his life are these. He was born ind bred in Seuth

Australia, After a distinguished undergraduute course in the University of

Adelaide and a two years’ post-graduate period at Cambridge University, he

returned to Adelaide in 1927 as Lecturer in Botany. This was the beginning

if his thirty-two years. in charge of the Adelaide University Botany Depuriment,

so that in its present form it is largely his creation,

The measure uf Wood's stature among his scientific colleagues was firstly his

uppuintment in 1948 to the Interim Council working to establish the Australian.

Naftonal C/ntwersity, and subsequently to its Council (1952-59); secondly, hiis

connection with the Commonwealth Sclentifie and {ndustrial Research Orgoniza-

tion as Member of the Advisory Council (1950-56, 1959) und Chairman of the

South Australian State Committee (1953-56, 1959); thirdly, and above all, his

election as a Fellow of the Australian Academy of Science in 1954 and to its

Cuuncil in 1956-58. These three organizations were founded in Wood's scientific

lifetime, the G.S.LRB. (as it was first called) at the dawn of his undergraduate

days and the other two institutions in his actively participating years; he found

it extremely exciting to share in their work,

His association with our Society, the Royal Society of South Australia, has

heen a long and profitable one, many of his ecological papers were published

in our Transactions and he was a member of the Council for len years, and

President in 1942; he was our representative on the Fauna and Flora Board, and

the Society has honoured him with the award of its Verco Medal (1944),

Some of the details of the preceding summary will now be filled in, Joseph

Garnett Wood was born in Mitcham, September 2nd, 1900. His father was

John Wood, there were two other children, a brother and a ssister who survive

Joseph, His childhood in South Australia certainly influenced his later work,

particularly that in local ecology. Tle attended the Unley High School from

1915-1916 and matriculated from there with a Government Bursary tenable ut

the University, He first took an Honuurs B.Sc. Degree (1922) in Chemistry under

Professor Eh. H. Rennie, studying also Assaying and Metallurgy, and had come

top in first year Botany (John Ragot Scholarship and edit) when halfway

through this chemical, physical and mathemutical course. He then turned from

Chemistry, in which he had been an honours student and a demonstrator, Fo

Botany, where he became a demonstrator in 1923, simultaneously studying the

sevond and third year botany courses and then lecturing to the senior students

in plant physiology and also to certuin elementary students. In addition, he

carried out research om photosynthesis (John L. Yuung post-graduate Scholar-

ship) and water relations in plants.

At that time (1925), the University’s Koonamore Vegetation Reserve in the

avid saltbush region south of Lake Frome was newly established and Wood cal-

labovated in the work, He evidently found Professor T, G, B. Osborn’s Botany

Department a satisfying and stimulating place, and plant biochemistry and

Traus, Ray. Soe. §. Aust, (1961), Vol. 84.

JOSEPH GARNETT

WOOD, ise. PAA.

2 MbMONt AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

physiology ofered him «a more challenging Geld than did pure chemistry; of

course, he always retained the stamp of his extensive geounding im chemistry.

Osborn welcomed such a mun in his Department, and probably exercised “it

critical Influence in Wood's choice of a botanic! coreer,

After two or three years in the Botany Department, lie was awarded un

ISS) Exhibition Scholarship as a result of work on the transpiration of urid plants.

wid went as a Research student to Gonville and Caius College, Cambridge Uni-

versity. $ Tere he came under the influence of Dr, F. FL Blackman and (, F,

Briggs in Plant Physiology, and Professor Sir Gowland Hopkins and the Hon

Mrs. Onslow in Plant Biochemistry; he also served as Junior Demunstrator in

Botany to first year students at Cambridge. Ife was nuw highly trained in

plant chernistry and physiology, but he still retained a strong interust in. pluut

evology, in which he had collaborated varlicr with Professor Osher. After

making the most of his two years abroad with some travel on the Continent

during vacations and visits to six research institutions in Great Britain, upon

which he reported ta the Empire Marketing Board and to ©,S.L.R. in Anstralia.

he returned to Adelaide late in 1927 to take wp a leetureship in Botuyy. In

1928, when Osborn transferred tu tle Chair in Sydney, Wood became Lecturer

in-Charge of the Adelaide Department and had nearly all the teaching on

his hands.

He had fine qualities as a teacher and in his early years taught over the

whole range of his subject. Latterly he lectured tu his students in plant phiysin-

logy, directed most of the research students and thenigh he had delegated the

rontine teaching in ecology, he was an examiner for a majority of the theses

in plant ecology written in Australia for higher degrees; he also administered

his Department very smoothly, To his research students, he was always very

stimulating: part of the story of their collaboration with him appyurs in the

appended list of publications, but this is by na means a reenrd of all his best

students, some of whom were attracted from overseas, His influence will live

through his students.

He saw his positions very clearly as intermediate between the sehuol life

und He professional life of his students. and he interested himself energetieally

in the school cureiculuin tor science as well as in the spheres which claimed

his best students after graduation, turning them to the vanguard af Australian

botusieal reseurch and teaching whenever he vould. Few persuns come te

know the quality of young graduates so well as their teachers, and Wood had

U fine appreciation of the potentialities of lis students und the way in which

they vould be developed and strengthened by opportunities und responsibilities.

{Te took a long view of their careers and was always ready to help thear with

lis influence at the critical turning points of their lives in steering them to a

pst where the greatest mutual benefit might eome to them and their country.

He had a very strong belief that Australia’s science could be developed best

by her own University graduates, with opportunities for them of experience

abroad, This part of his activities probably gave a great deal of satisfaction

tia Wood in hiw later yeays. IL enabled him to realise many of his ambitions

in, an impersommal way and was certainly one of hig strongest reasons for par-

ticipation in the work of so many importent but time-consuming. high-level

committees, to the detyiment of his personal research work (see appendin).

Also, he developed undoubled genius for committee work with his halanced,

agile wondertully disciplined mind, his capacions and retentive memory, his

very equible temperament tagether with a genuine understanding and sympathy

fur epposing points uf view, He apparently really loved such large-scale plan-

ning avd had « remarkable Ficility for seeing the core of any problem free of

JOSERTT GARNETT Woon a

its trirarnings; of a sanguine outlook and an abiding sense of proportiun, lw

always had the major goals in mind, and was not ruffled by the inevitable sis

curetage of details, a philosophy not achieved by many.

His hent for the ecological approach in hotany, combined with the physio-

loginal and biechemical one, becomes crystal clear when one vealises the utxt

wl his mind with its natural aim for fundamentals. its skill and effcieney in

euntrolling volumes of detail and rising ubove them. He was probably ihe

most iAvential Australian ecolagist of his time.

Wood was promoted to the ling-vacuut Chair of Botany in 1935, alter

same seven years as Lecturer-in-Charge, owas an example oF an Adolaide

graduate rising from the ranks in his own university; he had veeeived the D.se.

(Adelaide) iu 1933, Such appointments have wlways been rare in Adelaide, as

they are i a majority of other universities, and they usually cause comment

when they art made; this attitude no doubt acted as a spur to Wood, and those

rachy years were produative of muck personal oor collaborative reseacel) with

varions colleagues who stimulated his thinking; his own students were, of course,

drawn intu these projects to their considerable advantage and manv have since

made their inark.

Now that we have a view of his whole carcer, it can be seen that the Jocal

appnintment was amply justified; it produved some fine rescareh work in Joel

ecology which was a tradition that could only develop Jocally and jn a gradual

way with the considerable personal continuity which we have been so fortunate

as to have in the Adelaide Botany School, beginning with the youthful and

vigurous Professor T. G. B. Osborn from Manchuster in 1912-27. [lis student

Wood next directed the destinies of the Department tor 32 years with gradnil

developments of pelicy rather than major clanges.

In these chiys, when suomuch store ts sef on a wide experience in inure

than one university, what can we lean from this carcer which continued Fram

personal cholee in one department fur thirty-two years? One comment is that

Australia needs this kind al continuity in her formative period, and the deep

uncderstinding of national necds that develops from it; Wood has undoubtedly

served this Ideal very well, and in later years it took with hin the place of

the more closely personal ambitions of youth, A pertinent criticism of steady

careers ot this kind is that the individual does nat have breadth of outlook. The

valutble cautacts mute by scientific literature, however, cannot be tuo greatly

emphasised, und from his earliest years Wood worked to build wp the highest

stuncdurd in young Australian scientific journuls; he was on the Editorial Board

of the Australian Journal ef Experimental Biology and Medical Science fram

1932-1959, this very suceesstul journal was founded in Adelaide (1924) and

lulee sponsored by the University; he laboured most strennously for the Ausy-

tralian Journal af Seieutifie Research (as it was first called) published by

C.S.L1.0. in various subjects, from its beginnings in 1947 until his death. He

contributed frequently to the first journal until 1947, after that senelfuy lis

plant physiology papers ta the new C,S..1,R,0. journals, Te was ulso on the

Lditorial Board of a Dutch journal, Plent and Soil,

Wood was not narrow in outlook; he went abroad four times, first to Cam-

hrithye University as a PhD. student; second to travel in the long vacation and

study the tropical vegetation in the Malay Archipelago, much to the enrichment

of his ecology lectures; third, on study leave in 1938 for eleven months to Leiden

wid Cambridge; fourth, again on study leave in 1953 fur five months to Tfolland

and the United Kingdom especially to sce work dealing with the mineral nutri-

tian of plants, he alsa represented his University an this necusion at the Seventh

Congress of Universities of the Commonwealth,

4 MEMOIA AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

In his own University liiy ability and long experience were invaluable, he

hell some very responsible positions and was senior professor for his last twa

years. As Chairman of the Qwo most impertunt research committees and

member of three others, he had great influence on research both within the

University and in its momentous and exacting dealings with the national com-

missions set up since 1950 to enquire into the present and future needs of Uni-

versities, viz, the Murray Committee and subsequently the Australian Univer-

sities Commission, it was he who prepared the case for a greatly increased grant

ty research,

The main developments in the Butany Department during Wood's 32 years

were as follows. The Stuff at first vonsisted of one lecturer (himself), a secretary-

technician and a very few piece-work demonstrators recruited from among post-

radiate students and even undergraduates. This finally increased to a protessor

anc eight full-time graduates plus technical assistants. Student numbers had

riven aecordingly and included an increased percentage of agricultural students

ng this new Faculty developed, also a few forestry students. First year courses

in biology were gradually planned and developed largely by Wood, and care-

fully integrated with the introduction of biology more generally into the second-

ary sebuols, a step also chietly initiated by hiny, these biology courses now meet

the needs of large numbers of students; he thought of bielogical understanding

in terms ef human happiness. The teacliing ot mycology and plant pathology

lad been delegated to the Waite Institute before Wood's time, and m 1952 the

teaching in genetics was assumed by a new Department in that subject, the

first such University Department in Australia being in Adeluide.

Other outstanding developments in this period were the steady building up

wf the courses and research in plant physidlogy; the continaation of the emphasis

on plant ecology, especially of Suuth Australia, relating it ta some serivus soil

deficiencies typified by heath country of the Nincty Mile Plain; continued obser-

vations at Koonamore Vegetation Reserve; much specialist work on the taxonomy

and ceology of marine algae: the successful completion of the second edition

of J, M, Black’s Flora of South Australia posthumously; the foundation of a

State Herbarium of South Australia in connection with the Botanic Garden, the

nucleus being the University collections on long-term Joan and the Schomburek

cullection originally at the Botanic Garden,

There was also expansion of space. In 1939, just before the outbreak of

World War LL, the Benham Building was erected, largely designed by Wood and

shred equally by the Departments of Botany and Zoology. In his last years

Wood was again working hard at various alternative plans for urgent further

expansion of space for his Department,

Ibis own research work, in brief, was firstly in Australian plant ecology.

partieularly of South Australia, with investigations into the physiology and

reveneration of arid plants; secondly, in detailed studies of the paths ol plant

metabulism, particularly those leading from nitrogen to protein, and of the rela-

tionship to them of some vital plant processes,

He published one honk, The Vegetation of South Australia (1937), naw out

of print, and over fifty papers; his work is surveved in the analytical bibliography

appended to the present account. Death interrupted his work on the Coornny

and its waters,

In 1930 he married Joan Hazel, und she shared his arduous taréer with

devation and loyalty, thrce daughters were born to them; all survive him, iis

family life was characterized by happiness, hard work and simplicity, but not

austerity; visiting colleagues and staf were delichttully entertained iu the family

JOSEPIT GARNETT WOOD 5

eirele at his home, The Woods had extracted tremendous pleasure in the last

few years from making a lovely hillside garden at their new home, rapidly and

with characteristic industry. Another of their pleasures was painting and the

world of art, especially Australian art. Wood's rcerecation came largely from

various aspects of his work, whether it was in his garden, an We ah trip in

the country, travel abroad or in the choice of his friends, though his circle of

friends was by no ineans narrow; he enjoyed good company and conyersution

and understood very well how to be gay,

Tu celebrate his Silver Jubilee in the Chair of Botany in the middle of 1959,

there were two happy parties which naw are particularly precious memories;

one at his home, for the Botany Department Statf, the other at the University

for him as a gesture from. many past und present students and staff, when the

history of his Department was revived and he was presented with a silver salver.

His teacher, Professor Osborn, now retired and again a member of the Adelaide

Department, was present on beth occasions,

Wood had generally good health and powers of endurance, but the problem

that was overtaking him in his last weeks was how to conduct life to suit his

energetic mind, quick actions and eode of obligations, with a heart disease. He

had a way of accepting graciously what fate meted out to him, but his friends

saw vividly some very irksome and laborious years. ahead of him at the very

least. His much regretted sudden death on December 8, 1959, at the age of

59, undoubtedly spared him great unhappiness; his life has heen a very full one,

te the great benefit of his University, his country and the science of hotany. But

J-.G. Wood was more than a distinguished botanist, he was modest, kindly,

tolerant and wise; it is a rare privilege to have been his student and colleague and

to have seen his character grow lo a rich maturity,

His life was gentle; and the elements

So mis’d in him that Natare might stand wp

And say to all the world, “This was a man!”

C.M.E.

AWARDS, SOCIETIES AND OFFICES

1920. John Bagot Scholarship and. Medal in Botany,

1923, shit L. Young Scholarship. for Post-graduate Research, on Phutusynthesiv

in plants.

1925. Scholarship of the Exhibition of 1851, for researth in Plant Physiolopy.

1922, Degree of B.Sc., Adelaide. (Honours Chemistry.)

1928. Degtee of M.Sc. Adeélyide, (Subject; Transpiration of arid Australian

plants.

1932. Degree of Ph,D., Cambridge. (Subject; Llwtosynthenty. )

1933 Deyree of D.Se., Adelaide, (Subject: Arid Plants.)

1923-59. Fellow, Rovil Society of South Australia.

1946-39, Fellow, Royal Australian Chemical Institute,

Follow of Aust-N.Z. Assoe. Advance. Sei. and Member of Qualification and

Mueller Medal Committees.

1952-59, Fellow, Royal Socicty of Arts, London.

Medival Sciences Cluh, South Australia.

Agricultural Suiences Chib, Australia.

Field Naturahsts’ Society of South Australia.

L944. Verco Medal, Royal Suviety of South Australia.

1952. Clarke Memorial Medal, Roya) Society of New South Wales.

Universiry or AprLame.

1932-59. Kditerial Board, Australian Journal of Experimental Biology and Medical

, Science.

ja4e48 f Dean, Faculty of Sefence,

1949-59. Waite Conmittee (recommends all academic appointments at Waite Re-

search Institnte),

G MEMOTR AND BIBLTOGRAPIY

1956-59. Chairman, Research Executive Committee and Chairman, Board of Research

Studies.

Member, Public Examinations Boaril.

1958-39, Member, Equipment Committee,

1958-59. Vice-Chairman, Education Committee,

GENERAL.

1939. President, Suction M. Aust.-N,Z, Assoc. Advance, Sci,

1939-39, Member, Board of Commonwealth Forestry School, Canberra.

teil Member, Council, Royal Society of South Australia.

1942 [ President, Royal Saciety of South Australia.

1942-59. Member of Buard. Girton Girls” Schyol.

1947-57] Editorial Board, Australian Journals of Svientifie Research, CS.1RBR.0,

(Foundation Member, )

1957-59 Chairman, Board of Standards. Australian Journals... . (CSIRO, and

Australian Academy of Science)

1950-59. Editorial Board, Plant aud Soil (Holland).

1948-51] Member, Interim Council, Australian National University.

1952-59/ Member, Council, Australian National University,

1950-59. Member, Noxious Weeds Committee, South Australia,

1950-59. Member, Nuffield Fellowship Selection Committee (Australia),

1950-56) Member, Advisory Cowicil, C.$.1.R.0., Australia.

1959

aoe re Chairman, South Australian State Committee, C.S.1.R,0.

1952-59. Member, Arid Zone Biology Panel, U.N.E-S.C.O,

1953-59, Member, Board of Governors, Botanic Garden, South Australia.

1954-59| Fellow, Australian Academy of Science.

1956-58/ Member, Council, Australinn Academy of Science.

1958-59. First President, Australian Sucicty of Plant Physiologists,

1940-59, Member, Faana and Flora Board of South Australia (representing Royal

Society, Sonth Australia ).

Delegute to:

L949. 7th Pocifie Science Congress, New Zealan! (vepresenting Australia),

1952. British Commonwealth Scientitic Conferenée (representing Australian

National Research Conneil).

1953. Seventh Congress of Universities of the Comoumwealth (representing Univer-

sity uf Adelaide).

Obituary notices have appeared in the following publications:

Nature, 185: 4709. January 1960.

Aust. J, Science, 22: 10. April T960,

Australian Academy of Science Year Book, 1960,

ANALYSIS OF PUBLICATIONS!

Some 57 pnublieutions are grouped under ten headings; there are 26 items in ecolagy

and 31 in plant physiology, but these two classes merge.

A. PLawr Econogy (26 contributions in five groups).

(1) The Ualophytie Habit

Three carly papers of a very apt student in collaboration with his professor.

1925 (a) (Appendix to paper by T, G, B. Osborn.) Analyses of soil samples from Pearson

Islands. Trans, Roy, Soc. 8. Aust., 47. pp. 111-14.

(hb) (With T..G. B, Osborn.) Zonution of vegetation in the Port Wakefield District.

idem, pp. 244-254.

(ec) (With T, G. B. Osborn.) Some bhalephytic and non-halophytic plant cormoni-

ties in arid South Australin. ident 47, pp. 388-99.

(2) Physialagy of Xerophytism in Australian Plants

Bight independent carly papors, 1923-39, the prelude te Wood’s increasingly fundamental

approach to plant tolerances.

\'Lhe records of the Botany Department, University of Adelaide, were freely avnilable to

the swriter in the compilation of this. paper.

JOSEPTL GARNETT WOOD ra

1923. ‘Lrauspiration ef some arid plants... . with notes on anatomy, Trans, Ro, Soe.

S. Aust., 47, pp. 259-278.

1924, Helations between distribution, stricture amd transpiration vf arid Santh Australian

plants. ihid., 48, pp, 226-235,

1925. Selective absorption of chlorine juns; and absorption of water by Jeaves in genus

Atriplex. Aust. J. Exp. Bicl., 2, pp, 45-36.

1924 The rélution between water content and amount of photusynthesis, Aust. J. Fixp.

Biol,, 6, pp. 127-131,

1932, Cunuliydvate motabolism of plants with tomentose, succulent leaves, Aust. J. Exp.

Binl., 10, pp. 89-95.

1933, Carbohydrate changes. in the leaves of sclerophyll plants. Aust. J. Exp. Biol, 11.

pp. 139-150,

1934. “Stomatal freqnencies, transpiration and osmotic pressure. J. Real, 23, pp. 69-87.

1939. ‘The plant in relation to water, Rep. Aust-N.Z. Assue. Advance, Sei., 24, pp. 281-290.

(Presidential Address, Setion M.)-

(3) Koonaimere Wegetition Reserce ( the: Avid Flora Besearch Station of the

University of Adelaide)

“ Pour major joint papers (1931-1936) und enc minor (1947), the reports of extensive

field work ut Koananiare with some long-term observations. The Jatter aro still beiny

continaedd.

1991. (With 'T.G. B. Osborn and T. B. Paltridge.) ‘The antecalogy oF Stipa nitida, Prac.

Linn, Soc, N.S.W., 56 (4), pp. 299-324, ;

1032. (With 'T. G. B. Osborn and T, B. Paltridge.) Growth and reaction io grazing of

the perennial saltbush, Atriplex uesicarium, Proc. Linn. Sac. N.S.W.; 57 (3-7), pp.

377-402,

1985, (With 'T, G. B. Osborn and T. B. Paltridge.) The climate ond veyetition of tie

Kamuome Vegetation Reserve to 1931. Prow Linn. Suc. NUW., 60 (5-6), pp.

302-427,

1936, Tieeneration of the vegetation on the Kecmamure Vegetation Reserve. 1926-1936.

Trans, Ray. Soe. §. Aust., 68, pp. 86-111.

1947. (With Ko Woodroffe and H. GC. ‘Truaible.) Sonth Anstratia, 25-29, in The use

and jisuse of shrubs and trees as fodder. Tiperial Agricultural Bureanx, Joint

Publication Now 10, Aberystwyth. Great Britam,

(4) Deseriptice ond Analytical Bovlogy

Two carly independent papers and one book (1937) which is still the best available

ireabnent of the Rubee together with four contributions of Wood's final decade to large

collaborative works about Australie,

1929. Floristics and evology of the mullee. Trans. Roy. Soe. $, Aust., 58, pp, 359-378.

1930, Analysis af the vegetation of Kanvaroo Island and the adjacent peninsulas. ibid,

A4, pp. 105-139,

1937, ‘The vegetation of South Australia, 1-164. Adelaide: Govt, Printer. (A ITandbouk

ef the Flora and Fauna of South Australia series.) Out of print,

194. | Veyetation of Australian. Chiupter Vi in The Australian Enciranment. Ed. 1. Mel-

p bowne: CS,L8.0. '

1950) Idem. Ed, 2. Withont revision, Melbourne: C.5.1.1.0,

760, (With R. J. Williuus.) Idem. Ed. 3. Much revised. Melbourne; C.S.L7U0.

1958. ‘Lhe yeyctitionw of South Austtalia. Chapter 9 in Introducing South Auytratia, Td.

R. J. Best tor Aust.-N.Z, Assoc. Adyane. Sei, Adelaide: Govt. Printer.

1059 ‘The phytogeography of Australia (io relation to radiation of Evealtyplus, Acacia, ete. ).

Ch, XVHE i Biogeography and Eeology in Australia. Ed. Al RKeast aul others.

Den Haag, W. Junk, (Monovraphise Binlogieae. Vol. 8.)

(5) Aeclogical Caneepts

Three philosophieal studies demonstrating the author's. pre-cecupation with fimelsmentals,

based om personal experience.

19387, (With L. G. M. Bias Beckiny of Leiden.) Netes on convergenes and ilentity ia

relution to enyiromuent, Blumea., 2, pp. 32)-336,

1939. Ecolovieal concepts and nomenclature. Trans. Roy. Soe. $. Aust., 63 (2), pp. 215-225,

i947. (With B. T,. Crocker.) Historical infences. on development af South Anstralian

vebelaGan commonities and their bearimy ou concepts and clissifieation in ceology,

ibid. TE C1). pp. §1-136.

§ MEMOIR AND BIBLIOGRAPHY

B. Poant Paysrovocy ann Biocurmistry (31 papers in 5 groups).

(6) Studias on the Nitrogen Metabolism of Plants

Nine papers (1933-48) chiefly in collahoration with his colleague Petrie of the Waite

Institute until the death of the latter, then in collaboration with four of Woud’s students, The

1938 papers were published outside Australia in the Annals uf Botany, the remainder all in

Austrilia.

1933, Nitrogen metabolism of leaves of Atrivlex tunimularium. Aust. J. Exp. Biol., 11,

pp. 237-252,

1938. (All with A. H. &. Petrie.):

I. Reader between content of proteins, amino-acids and water. Ann. But. N.S., 2,

pp. 33-60,

UU, Inter-relations. among soluble nitrogen compounds, water and respiration ritte.

tleyn., pp. 729-750.

II. Effect of water content on relation between proteins and amino-acids, idem,

pp. 587-398.

193%, (With G. L. Amos.) Ellects of variation in nitrogen supply and water content

on carbohydrates in leaves of grass plants. Aust, J. Exp. Biol., 17, pp. 285-420.

(No. TV in this serices was a paper by Walkley and Petrie, 1941, Ann. Bot.

N.S.5, pp. 661-673, )

1942. V.. (With A. H. Kk. Petric.) Relation of carbohydrate content to protein synthesis

in leaves. Aust. J. Exp. Binl,, 20, yp, 249-256,

VI. Inter-relations among respiration vate, carbahydrates and soluble nitrogen com-

pounds in leaves. jdem., pp. 257-262,

1948. Vil. (With M, K. Hone, M. EB. Mattner and C. P. Symons.) ‘Toxicity of same oximes

and oximino-acids tu Azvtobacter, Aust. J. Sei. Res, B. 1, pp, 38-49.

VIl. {With M. R. Ione.) Utilization of o-vximing-ciboxvlic acids by out plants:

idem., typ. 163-175-

(7) The Metabolism of Leaces

Eight papers (1941-43), chiely on starying leaves with hiy student and colleague, Miss

Cruickshank and some other students, All these were published in Aust. J. Axp. Biol,

(Adelaide),

1941, Relations between respiration rate and metabolism of carbohydritte, protein, andl

oruanic acids in leaves. Ateyt. if Exp. Biol., 19, pp, 315-321,

1943. (a) (By the Tate A. H. K. Petrie and J. L Arthur, conpiled by J. G. Wood.) Physiv-

lovical entozeny in the tobacco plant. ‘The effect of varying, water supply on

drifts in dry weight, leaf area and various conyponents of leaves. idem, pp.

191-200.

Metabolism of Starving Leaves.

1943. (b) LI. (With D. H. Cruickshank and R- 1. Kuchel.) 1. The vature of respira-

tion ralte/lime curves in air and in nitrogen and their relation to carbohydrates.

II, Changes in amounts of total and chloroplast proteins, chlorophyll, ascorbic

acid and soluble nitrogen compounds, IH, Changes in malic and citric acid

contents and their inter-relation with soluble nitrogen compounds, Ausé. J,

Exp. Bial., 21, pp. 37-53.

dad. TV. (With F. V. Mercer and ©. Pecdlow.) Respiration rate and metabolism of Jeaves

during iy-nitrogen transfers. ibied., 22, pp. 3743.

V, (With D. IL, Cruickshank.) Changes in amounts of some amino-acids dirmg

starvation of grass leaves and their bearing on the nature of the relationship

between protems anc aminn-acids, dem. pp. 111-123.

1945. VL (With D. H.. Cruickshank.) Nitrogen balance sheet and changes in organic

acid content during starvation of out leaves. ibid, 23, pp. 243-247.

(8) Studies on the Sulpliur Metubolisne of Plants

Four papers (1939-41) with his student and colleague, Miss Barrien (New Paytol.) and

Hanson (Aust. J. Exp, Biol.). '

1939. (All with B. 8, Barrien.) Studies an sulphur metabolism of plants, 1. The effects

of different external concentrations of sulphate. ammonia and cystine on the

ed of sulphur-contaiming, compounds in Jeayes. New Phital., 38, pp.

125-149,

IL. The effect of nitrogen supply on the amounts of protem sulphur, sulphate sulphur

and on the ratio of pretemn vitragen to protemn sulphur in Jeaves at different

stages during the life cycle. idem., pp, 257-264.

IE, On changes in winounts of protein gedghire ancl sulphate sulphur during starvation,

idem.,. pp. 265-272.

JOSEPH GARNETT WOOD 9

1941, (With E. A. Ilanson and B. S, Barrien.) Relations between protein-nitrogen, protein-

sulphur and chlorophyll in leaves. Aust. J. Exp. Biol., 19, pp. 231-234.

(9) Studies on Some Metallic Micro-nutrient Elements in Plants,

viz. Copper, Zine, Molybdenum and Sodium

Six papers with advanced students (1946-57). Three of these papers with his student

Miss Sibly (1950, 51, 52) were on zine and the enzyme carbonic anhydrase. Any of these

elements except sodium may be deficient in various Sonth Australian soils. All these papers

were published in Australia except the letter to Nature on sodium.

1946. (With H. B. S. Womersley.) Development and metabolism of copper-deficient oat

plants. Aust. J. Exp. Biol., 24, pp. 79-94.

1950. With, eat Sibly.) The distribution of zinc in oat plants, Aust. J. Sri. Nes., B. 3,

pp. 14-27,

1951. (With P. M, Sibly.) The nature of carbonic anhydrase from plant sources. ibid.,

B. 4, pp. 500-510.

1952. (With P. M. Sibly.) Carbonic anhydrase activity in relation to zine content. ibid.,

B. 5, pp. 244-235.

1954. (With D. Spencer.) The role of molybdenum in nitrate reduction in higher plants.

Aust. J. Biol, Sei., 7, pp. 495-34,

1957. (With P. F. Brownell.) Sodium as an essential micronutrient clement for Atriplex

vesicuria Hew. Nature, 179, pp. 635-636.

(10) Reviews

Three independent papers (1942-53), dealing with plant aspects of sulphur and nitrogen,

in important international publications, and one more limited review (1949).

1942. Metabolism of sulphur in plants. Chronica Botanica, T, pp. 1-4.

1945. Nitrogenous constituents of plants. Ann, Rep. Biochem.,, 14, pp. 665-684.

1949, Some aspects of nitrogenous metabolisin of plants. Paper presented to British Com-

monwealth Specialist Conference in Agriculture—Australia, 1949, (Plant and animal

nutrition in relation to soil and climatic factors.) Melbourne: Cyclostyle.

1953. Nitrogen metabolism of higher plants, Ann. Rev. Plant Physiology, 4, pp. 1-22.

(11) Miscellaneous

1929. Physiological derangements in vines subsequent to injury by cold. Aust. J. Exp. Biol.,

6, pp. 103-106.

SOME ACARINA FROM AUSTRALIA AND NEW GUINEA PARAPHAGIC

UPON MILLIPEDES AND COCKROACHES AND ON BEETLES OF THE

FAMILY PASSALIDAE.

BY H. WOMERSLEY

Summary

The genotype of the genus Brachytremella Tragardh 1946 from New Guinea, B. spinosa, is

redescribed from freshly discovered specimens, and two new species belonging to this genus of the

Diarthrophallidae are described from Passalid beetles from Australia. Two other species of the

family requiring two new genera, Lombardiniella and Brachytremelloicles, are also described from

Australia from similar hosts. This is the first record of the family of Diarthrophallidae from

Australia.

SOME ACARINA FROM AUSTRALIA AND NEW GUINEA PARAPHAGIC

UPON MILLIPEDES AND COCKROACHES AND ON BEETLES OF THE

FAMILY PASSALIDAE,

hy H. Womunrsiey*

[Read 12 May 1960]

SUMMARY

The genotype of the genus Brachytremella Vriiwardh 1946 from New

Cuinca, B. spinogse, is redeserthed fron freshly discovered specimens, and two

new species belonging to this genus af the Diyrthrophallidae are deseribed

fram Passalid beetles from Australia. ‘lwo other species of the family requiring

two new genera, Lombardiniella and Brachytremellyides, are also described

from Australia from similar hosts, This is the first record of the family of

Diarthrophallidae front Australia,

Pt. 4.—The family Diarthrophallidae

( Mesostigmata-Monogynaspida ).

The family Diarthrophallidae and genus Diarfhrophallus were erected by

Tragirdh 1946 for Uroseius quercus Pearse ct al., 1936, Tt comprises some small

and little known, rather Hattish and poorly selerutised miles Found under the

elytra of Passalid bectles.

Triigardh recognised three genera Diarfhrophallus ¢, noy.. Brachytremella

g. noy. and Passalobia Lombardini 1926 as belonging to the family. None of

these have hitherto been found in Australia. The genotype of Brachytremella,

B, spinosa Trig, 1946 has only been known trom a single female described from

New Guinew,

This species has now been rediscavered in New Guinea and is here re-

described fram both sexes and the nymph, Two other species of Brachytremella,

B, tréuirdhi sp. noy., and B. bornemisszai sp, noy, are deseribed from Australia,

while two new genera are erected for two other species of the family, Lombar-

diniella lombardinit g. et sp. nov, and Brachyltremelloides striata g. et sp. nov.,

both from Anstralia.

Concurrently with this publication a further study of the Diarthrophallidae

as a whole will be presented in which all known genera and species will be

considered, with special reference to the genus and species of Passalohia de-

scribed by Lombardini.

Genus BRAGHYTREMELLA Triivirdh, 1946.

Triivardh, 1, 1946. Diarthrophallina, a new grevp of Mesostigmuta, found ou Passalid

beetles. Ent. Medd., 24 (@), p. 84,

This genus was diagnosed as follows:

“Body flat, oval, with six pairs of long plumose bristles of the same type

as in Diarthrophallus. Tvritosternum with praesternal hairs. Tegs and gnatho-

soma of the same type as in Diarthrophallus, Epigynial shield not separated

from the ventral shield by a suture.

Type B. spinosa nov. spec.”

* South Australian Museum.

Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust. (1961), Vol. 84.

WOMERSLEY

“ARULF JO ATqrpueit “sy

MOKA [TIYUOA UE apeur “gp SANOLA [RI]UOA Ur aypeulas Sy

“SEIT, vsowmds pyauaniyawug—) Ty

AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA DIARTHROPHALLIDAE 13

Brachytremella spinosa Trig. 1948,

Test Fiv. 1, A-C, 2, A-TT,

Yriwirdh, 4, 1946. Diarthrophalliva, a new grep of Mesostiginate, found on Prassalicl

heetles. Mri. Medd. 24 (6), ye 3b4.

This specius was described by Tragardh trom a single female found On a

specimen of Protomocerus sp, (Passalidae) from New Guinea, from the collection

nf the Zoolugicul Museum of Copenhagen and was made the type of a new

genus Brachytremella.

Inquiries of my friend, Dr, 8. L. Tuxen, of the Copenhagen Museum, haye,

unfortunately, failed to trace the specimen, nor has it heen tound amongst the

Travardh material in the Stockholm Museum, Lt must, therefore, be presumed

to be Ist,

The genus was separated from Piarthrophallus Tragardh 1946 by Triigardh,

on the fact that posteriorly the genital opening was not marked off by a semi-

circular suture, and the genital shield was coalesced with the ventrol shielcl,

Although some workers in correspondence have been inclined to disregand this

diftevence, { am convinced, after having examined specimens of D, querevs us

well ag several species of Brachytremella and allied genera, including Lorbar-

dini's species of Passulabia, that the separation from Diarthrophallus is valid,

fn 1954 L was able to collect Passalids in New Guinca and from them

obtained a male, a female and two nymphs of what seem undoubtedly to be

Trigardl’s B, spinosa, As his description was inadequate and he only gave

a sketch fignre of the intercoxal part of the ventral surface, the species is now

redescribed from the female, and descriptions and figures of the male and

tritunymph are given.

Redescrintion of female, A lightly chitinised flattish species. Idiosoma 5264

long, 351, wide. Shape broadly oval.

Dorsum.—Tiy, 2A; dorsal shield entire, but not completely covering dorsum,

surrounded by a riarrow strip of cuticle, it is 470¢ long by 336» wide, as stated

In Tragirdh it bears a paiy of distinct pores on a level with the middle af

coxae ILI and a number of very minute setae (pores), it is furnished with 5

palis of Jong shortly ciliated and apically knobbed setae of which three pairs

are lateral on the shicld, the other two pairs are posterior and on the cuiticle,

the setae from anterior backwards are approximately 3124, 3124, 340, 360. umd

264, long.

Venler—As figured, Fig. 1A; tritosternym (Fig. 2E) with a fairly elongate

base flanked by « pair of setae and with paired filamentous laciniae; sternal,

metasternal and ventral shields cowlesced and extending broadly behind cuxae

TV and reaching to within a short distance, 30., of the anal shield, from the

middle of coxae IV it fuses with the endopodal shields to surround the posterior

herder ef acetabula IV, the whole shield ig 4034 long and 144), wide across

the almost straight antevior margin, anterior to the middle of coxae H the shield

natrows to 1254 and then expands to LS2” between coxae IT and TH, belween

coxac LL and TV it begins to contract to 125, between coxae 1V and posterior

of eoxae TV it ts 2504 wide and then becomes evenly rounded, the shield is

furnished with 5 paizs of setae of which the anterior pair are close tu the

anterior margin and much longer than the others, the fifth pair are of interme-

diate length and lie. close to the posterior margin; the genital orifice is large

and tongne-shaped and lics in the middle of the sternal shield between coxac

i] and fl, it encloses the similarly shaped genital shield which is 168. long

by 135p, the genital shield is completely fnsed posteriorly with the ventral

WOMERSLEY

‘qdurcuojy Jo Mata

‘a[RMey JO UMUISysOILQ “y ta

‘MOI Wolf BULOsOYeUS ‘g

[enuad “Fy fapkur fo ovreaaya “sg fapwulaz jo 7 Bey “yy ;

Gay JO seLOYO “Gq faauqy wo W1Nj9A} puR vUDsoywuA *

[eUay F Wye “dd 1 I at

‘OTEWoF JO uMsiop ‘y “Bray, vsowds vjowaghyourg—z “S14

[ tun

~*~

| 0

AUSTRALIAN AND NEW CUIM‘A DIARTHROPITALLIDAE 15

shield but appears te be flexible on lateral pivots of the more sclerotised margin

of the orifice at 125, from the front; the anal shield is roughly rectangular with

the anterior margin straight and slightly excavate medially, and approximately

60p, wide, it carries a pair of long ciliated gapitate setae 384, og stigma he-

tween coxae LL and 1V with an anteriorly curved peritreme 43, long.

Onathosoma—Hypostome as figured (Fig. 2B), with three pairs of setae al

which the maxillary pair are fairly long, as are also the anterior pair which are

situated on the margins of the base of the long ciliated outwardly curved styl;

the labial covnicles ure abuut 4 times as long as broad at the base, slender salivary

styli are present, dorsally the gnathosoma (Fig, 2C’) is eoyered by a distinct

conival apically quadrifureute tectum as Sigured, with slightly outwardly carved

apical urms between whieli arises a pair of Jonger and more slender ciliated

laciniae; palpi 5-segmented as showa, dorsally the femur carries a very long

slender shortly ciliated seta; chelicerac as figured (Fig, 1C), movable digit

with sroull toath at abort one-fourth from apex, fixed digit with twa small

subapieal teeth, a small tooth midway and apically with hyaline excrescence.

Legs. All 6-seumented, | (Hig. 2F) the shortest and tapering, without ambu-

lacva on tarsi but tarsi apically bifid with a long apical seta, with one long

shortly ciliated seta on femur and peny, length 192.4, 1-1V longer and very much

stouter, 1 307, long, femur with one lone and one rather shorter ciliatecl seta,

ILL 312, Jong with two long ciliated setae on femur and owe on genu, LY with

twa medium length ciliated setae ou femur and gonu with one much longer;

tarsi U-TV with large pad-like ambnlacra without claws; coxae of leg 1 well

defined, fragmented, with the seta on the larger fragment.

Male Allotype Somewhat larger and more chitinised than the female.

Idiasoma 608; long, 5602 wide. Shape broadly oval.

Dorsum.—Dorsal shicld entire ax in fernale, 361, long by 49), wide, fur-

nished with 5 pairs of Jong ciliated capitate setac arranged as in female, aliterior

pair of setae 4324 Jong, second pair 490,, next 432,, next 524 and posterior 450).

Venter (Fig. 1B).—Tritosternuin as in female; sternal, metasternal and

ventral shields coalesced together with Uhe endopodal shields of coxae I-IV,

the whole shicld is 456) long, its anterior margin almost straight and 230, wide,

the sides contract hetween coxae IT tu a width of 187), and then widen between

coxa TIT to 283, after which they contract to 1334 between coxae 1Y and

posterior oF acctabula TV reach a width of 288; the posterior margin is

evenly rouniled and reaches to 434 from the anterior of the anal shield, the

shield is furnished with 4 puirs of setae of which the anterior and the posterinr

are the longest; the venitalia le in an elongate oval cavity containing the pus-

teriorly directed genital shield (bi-articuluted penis uf Tragardh), it is 134p

long and 88, wide with a posterior head about 40). Tong; the anal shield is as

figured, 90 wide and carries a pair of long ciliated capitate setae 384. Peri-

treme 77w long and strongly curved forward, with the stigma between etic

(lL and TY.

Cnathosoma with palpi, chelicerae as in female iat somewhat larges.

Legs.—Generally and proportionally as in the female.

?Tritonymph (Fig. 2H).—Of the sume general facies as in the female, Length

of idiosoma 465, width 339),

Porswm—Dorsal shicld as in female, 436, long by 307, wide, furnished

wilh three pairs of long ciliated capitate setae situated Interally, two other pairs

of such setae posteriorly of the shield, the anterior pair of setac arc 360, long,

the second pair 432, the next 480z, next 480, and posterior 4392p.

IR TT, WOMERSLEY

Venter—With the yentral shield as figured, 3364 long and 139, wide,

antcriorly it is in a line with the anterior margin of coxae Land evenly rounded,

it gradually expands to between eoxae Ll and II] at the maximum width and

then gradually tapers te the posterior inargin of coxae IV where it is uyuin

rounded, only the fourth pair of setae are actually on the shield, there is a pair

vf pores in a line with coxae M1; endapodal shiclds Lf, I and IV, especially

IL, well developed; anal shield as in the female, 67, wide; peritreme 53, long.

Gnathosoma with palpi and chelicerac as in female.

Legs,—As in female, 1 206. long, Il 3124, LT 336n. 1V 365p.

Remarks —Despite the brief description given by Traigirdh of the genotype,

B. spinosus, the female and nymph described above can without question

be referred to his species. The male, however, is considerably larger

but otherwise agrees in the number and arrangement of the dorsal selae and

alsu it the ventral shield, as well as other morphological characters. Except

fou the size difference it agrees yencrically with the female.

Brachytremella triigardhi sp, nov,

Test Vips, 3A-P, 4A-F'.

Types.—Holotype female, two titopymphs and one deutonymph in the collec-

fiom of the South Australian Museum.

Localities.—The holotype fernale and one titonysnph from Afastochilus sp.

Mt Lamington, Queensland, Dec. 1948 (coll, H.W.), and one tritonymph and

the deutonymph Irom a Passalid, 8 miles east of Wondecla, Oneensland, 30/10/43

(coll, R. V, Southeott).

Deseription—Female. (Big. 3A-E), A flattish lightly selerotised species.

Length of idiasoma 560,, width 3744. Shape oval,

Dorsum (Fig. 3B),—Dorsal shield entire, 4902 long by 340, wide, not com-

pletely covering dorswin, separated marginally by a fairly wide band of cuticle;

tumished with six pairs af long slender setae which are shortly ciliated and

eld ina small but distinct knob, all except the second pair from the anterior

are to 270 long, the second pair are only about half this length, 144, the anterior

tour pairs of setae are on the margin of the dorsal shield, the posterior two pairs

on the posterior margin of the body, ou the shield are a number of pores

(Fis, 3B).

Venter.—As in Fig. 3A; tritosternum as shown, with conical base Hanked hy

“ pwir of setae, and with paired lacinive; sternal, mcetasternal and ventral shields

coalesced and extending past coxae 1V, the combined shield is 394, long, the

anterlir margin is almost straight, between cuxae Ll the shield uarrows ta 115.

wid then widens to 192, between coxae U1, contracts slightly between coxae [V

ad then expands behind coxae TV to 206y, the posterior margin is rather flat-

tened, the shield carries 5 pairs of setae of which the first pair are fairly long, the

others shorter, the genital opening is large and tongue-shaped in which the

genital shield fits, it is 17% lone by 134u at the widest part, posteriorly the

genital shield is coalesced with the ventral shield, the front portion of the shield,

however, is probably capable uf being lifted up in w line between the secnnil

and third sternal setae where a sleong chitinisation of the anteriGr margin af the

orifice ends; the anal shield is transversely diamond shaped, und furnished with

only two long 312, setae similar to the dorsal setae, the shield is 724 wide; the

endopodal shields ure well chitinised on coxae IIf and IV and not fused with

the sternal; the stigma lies between coxae If] and [V and has only a short peri-

treme of 25, length; metapodal shields absent.

AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA DIARTITROPHALLIDAE

A, female in ventral

d tectum from

Mt. Lamington, Q.

a from below; D, gnathosoma an

eg 1; F, tritenymph in ventral view.

rdhi sp. noy.,, from

athosoma

female; C, gn

E, 1

above

tremella tré;

B, dorsum of

Fig, 3.—Brachy

view;

[8 H. WOMERSLEY

Vig. 4.—Brachytremella triigdrdhi sp. nov, from. Wondecla, O. A, tritonymph in

ventral view; B, fritonymph dorsum; ©, tectum of tritonymph: D, mandibles of

tritonymph: EF, deutonymph in ventral; F, deutonymph dorsum,

AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA DIARTHROPHALLIDAE 19

(snathosoma.—As in Fig. 3C and D; hypostome with only three pairs of setae

vf which. the maxillary pair are fairly long, and the anterior pyir ure ulso long

and situated marginally on the base of the long ciliated paired styli; the labial

cornicles are fairly long, about 3 times as long as wide at base, slender salivary

styli reach almost to the tip of the cornicles, dorsally the gnathusemi is covered

by a distinct conical apically quadrifureate tectum which ends in a pair of

slightly outwardly curved arms from between which arises a pair of longer

and more slender filaments: the palpi are 5-segmented as figured, dorsally the

fernur earries a very loug ciliated tapering seta: the mandibles carry a pair af

small chelate chelicerae, fhe movable digit having a minute tooth subapically.

and the fixed digit with subapical exerescenee.

Lees.—All short, T (Fig. 38) the shortest and rather tapering, to 216p long,

femur and genu with one fine ciliated seta each, tarsus bifid apically and with

a Jong apical seta; legs T1-TV stouter, tarsi without claws but with large arahu-

Jaeral pad, femur of H with one long ciliated seta, femur of TTL with two ane

gel with one long seta, femur.and gewo of TV similar to U1: the coxae of leg 1

wre demarcated and fragmented as shown with the posterior seta situated on the

larger of the separated portions.

Male —Unknown.

Tritonymph. (Fig. 3P),—Of the sume forny and texture as the female; length

of idinsoma 5264, width 397.

Dorsum (Fig, 4B)—Shield entire, 4052 long by 336« wide, with six pairs

of long setae as in the female, of which the second anterior pair is only 120;

long, the others to 240n, the shield is supplied with many fine pores, bat only

takes in the second and fourth pairs of dorsal setae, the first and third pairs

being on the surrounding cuticle as are the posterior Ewo pah's..

Venter (Figs, SF, 4A),—With only a single ventral shield as figured, with

kmgitucinal striate markings, this shield is 317, long by 125 wide between

cone UT, it is round und narrow apically, and tapers to a rounded end on a

Jevel with the posterior edge of aeetabula TV, the first sternal setae ore Fairly

long and off the shield, setae Ll, Uw and 1V are on the shield marginally, but

sclie V are off, endopodal shivlds of coxae M-LV free and well sclerotised, those

of TT elongate, wide anteriorly, tapering to a point and curved posteriorly; the

anal shield is ditmond-shaped, 62 long, with one pair of long ciliated apically

knobbod setae to 312u long: the peritreme and stigma are as in the female.

CGnathasama (Fig. AC, D).-As in the female,

Levs—As in the female, 11924 long, Wand TIT 264n, TV 288p.

Deutonymph (Fig. 46, F).—Length of idiosoma 432p, width 269),

Darsum.—Shield as in fomale aud tritomymph but 360, long by 254u; dorsal

star as in tritonyinph with setae U1 L034 long. rest 225p long.

Venter.—As fieured. ventral shield us in tritonymph 288) long by 77u wide

but more slender and extending rather further back from coxae LV; endopodal

shields of coxac If distinct, Peritreme small, 19). long,

Gnathosead as in female and tritonynph.

Legs. —As in other stages, 1 1754 long, 1 2060, I and TV 220).

Remarks.—This species differs from all other known species in the second pair

of dorsal setae being only about half the length of the rest. In D. quereus, which

also has only six pairs of long dorsal setae, they are all of about equal leneth in

both adult and tvitonymphal stages, and all louger than the anal setae, whereas

in B, triigdrehi the anal setae are longer than the darsal setae,

20 H. WOMERSLEY

Brachytremella bornemisszai sp. nov.

Text Fig, 5A-C.

Types.—Two tritonymphs, one holotype and one paratype, in the South Aus.

tralian Museum collection.

Localities and Hosts—The holotype from the Passalid Aulucocyclus

edentulus MeL. from Wilson’s Downfall, New South Wales, 8/10/56 (coll. G. F,

Bornemissza), the paratype from the same host, Ilinchinbrook 1s., N. Queens-

land, 8/9/56 (coll. G.F.B.).

f \

/ \

c an

Fig. 5.—Brachytremella bornemisszai sp. nov, Nymph—A, ventral view; B, dorsum;

C, tectum.

Description.—Tritonymph. A flattish, lightly chitinised, oval specics, Idio-

soma 334 long, 225. wide.

Dorsum (Fig. 5B),—Shield entire, not completely covering body as figured,

furnished with only two pairs of long slender ciliated capitate setae, one pair

of which are marginal on the shoulders, the other on the posterior margin, there

are also two other pairs of such setae off the shield, one pair on the body edge

and midway between the two pairs on the shield, the other pair are on the

cuticle posterior of the dorsal shield, these setae are to 240, long.

Venter (Fig. 5A).—Ventral shicld as figured, 2164 long by 106. wide,

widest in a line between coxae LL and III, the anterior margin is only lightly

convex and 48 wide, the sides almost immediately narrow to 38, then expand

to the maximum width between coxae II and TIT and then converge to the

AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA DIARTHROPHALLIDAE

‘T fayewaz jo apqrpuvut “Gq

QL ayeut “g¢ tavalA [equaA UL

TUNUP OUT, apuwuay “eq

Thar ‘Vv

‘Ryas [tsTop

“Adu “ds ja ‘3B MU PADY UO] DYAUIPLIgUIT—g *

foyriuay jo umsiop ‘9 fata [eajdaa

22 H. WOMERSLEY

rounded end slightly beyond posterior margin of acetabula [V, only the fourth

pair of setae are actually on the shield and these are well inside the margin, of

the other four pairs of setae, I are longer than the others; the endopadal shields

of coxae II-lVY are well developed especially those of IL which are more curved

and moon-shaped than in other species; the anal shield is transversely diamond-

Fig. 7.—Lombardiniella lombardinii_y. ct sp. nov. A, nymph in ventral view; B,

guathosoma of female from below; C, gnathosuma and tectum of female from above:

D, tarsus of leg IT from below; F, Jeg I; F, stigma and peritreme,

shaped, 48, wide with one pair of long ciliated capitate setae to 180p; the

stigma lies between coxae III and IV with hardly a distinct peritreme.

Gnathosoma as figured and as described for B. spinosa; tectum (Fig. 5C),

however, apparently with only two apical filamentous branches as figured,

AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA DIARTHROPHATLIDAE 23

Legs as in other species, T 173p long, with fragmented coxue, [, TT and

TV 210. long and stouter than 4.

Kemarks.—This species differs from B. spinosa Veig. and B, trdgdrdhi sp. n. in

the number and arrangement of the long dorsal setae. In the absence of the

female, however, it is only tentatively referred here tu the genus Bruchytremellu.

Cen, LoMBARDINIELLA NOV.

Allied to Bruchytremella but with the metapodal shields separated fram the

sterno-ventral shield and extending posteriad of coxac IV as a triangle; tectum

an tlongate cone with one pair of long apical laciniac.

Type Lembardiniella lombardinii sp. nov,

Lombardiniella lomhardinii sp, nov.

Figs, 6A-1?, 7A-B.

Types, Holotype female, allotype male, § paratype females, one paratype

male and 6 paralype nymphs in the Sauth Austriulian Museum,

Localities—The paratype male from under the elytra of a Passzlid bectle

Aulacocyclus edentulus Mel. from x rotting encalypt log, Tampton, Queens-

land, 8rd Oct. 1936 (coll. G. F. Bornemissza), all the others from the same

host and habitat from Wilson’s Downfall, New South Wales, Sth Oct. 1956

(coll, GiFAB.),

Description—Female (Fig. 6A). A lightly selerotised oval species. Length of

idiosoma to 404 (average of 8 spretnens 48lp); width to 360, (average 3542p},

Porsum (Fig. 6C).—Dorsal shield entixe, not completely covering dorsum

but surrounded by a fairly wide strip of striated cuticle, dorsally with only 3 pairs

of long, ciliated and apically knohbed setae fo 210 long (Mig. 6F). of these

setive two pairs are situated on the posterior margin of the shield, the other pair

is on the cuticle and on the posterior margin of the dorsum,

Venter (Fig. 64)—Tritusteruum (Tig, 619) with not very long conical base,

funked on each side by 4 short seta. and apically with a pair of shortly ciliated

lacintae; sternal, metusternal, and ventral shields coalesced to form a siugle shield

rewching posteriorly almost to anterior margin of anal shield, antero-meslially

the shield surrounds with an oval chitinous rim thé large longue-shaped eenital

shield, close ta the rim it carries three palis of small setae, the sternal TH and

IM and the metasternal setae; anterior af the genital shield is a pair of longer

setae, sternal setae L, and posterior on the shield beyond coxae IV is another

longer puir of setae probably the genital pair in other groups, the whole shicld

is wide and the margins confluent with the inner edves of the coxae as figured,

the length of the whole shield is 370» by 2062 wide with a slight constriction

between coxae LV to 197; the genital shield 211, long by 149u wide, is withuut

solace and is not hinged to the ventral shicld although there is a faint sub-

culicular transverse line between the third and fourth pair of sternal setac which

may indicate 2 weakness allowing the genital shield to lift up and open [rom

the anterior, the anal shield is small, transversely lozenge-shaped and is furnished

with only two setae which are similar to and as long as the dorsil setae, large

metapodal shields extend backwards from coxae TV as fairly large (rianwles,

anteriorly as wide as the coxae and tapering to a rounded bhint apex at abuat

halfway from the coxae to the apex of the ventral shield; peritremal shields small

with the stigma (Fig. 7F) between coxae If and TV and the peritreme shart,

295, and curved,

Gnathosoma as figured (Fig. 7B), with apparently four pairs of short hypo-

stomal setae, hypostome with a pair of long curved, shortly ciliated styli; cormicles

moderately long; in the dorsal view (Fig: 7C) the maxillary part has two pairs

ad H. WOMERSLEY

wE setae near the base of the palpi of which the inner pair are long, the outer

short. between the bases of the palpi is an elongate cone-shaped bifurcate tectum

earrying apically a pair of equally long laciniae, the base of the tectum is de

mareuted by a transverse line; palpi as figured 5-segmented, the ferour dorsally

has a strung straight ciliated seta and there also are some fairly long setae on

the tibia and tarsus; the chehicerae (Fig. 6) are small, apparently edeutate, end

the movable finger has a subapical excrescence,

Legs.—All relatively short, | (Fig. 7E) thinner than ILIV and antennaeform,

with the tarsus apically bifid with some long tactile setae, femur and genit

dorsally with a long straight outstanding ciliated seta, coxae with twa small

setae and fragmented, legs U-1V moderately thick all tarsi with pad-like am-

byluceum (Fig. 7D) but no claws, femur of II with one long seta, of IT and 1V

witht fwo such setae; Jength of 1 206, 1! 269p, IIT 298y, TV 298, all legs directed

Forwurds.

Mule (Fig. 6B)—With the facies of the female, length of idiosoma 475p and

440u, width 350, and 312 (allotype and paratype respectively ).

Dorsum as it the Fernale, shicld 408), hy 8024, setae 220p.

Venter ( Fig. 68).—Generally as in the female but the genital organ consists

of a two-segmented shield as figured lying in a longitudinal groove in the sturno-

ventral shield; the shield is 134, long by 58. wide; the stigma and peritreme are

similar to the female, but the peritremal shield is peculiar in that posteriorly it

rns inwards between coxae IIL and 1V (see Fig. 7) and is more distinct: the

sterno-ventral shield is 3435p long by 182, wide (173, between coxae TV).

Nymph (Fig. 7A).—General facies as in female, Length of idiosoma to 432.

(aver. of 6 specimens 407p.), width to 293, (aver, 275p.).

Dorsum.—Similar to. that of female, dorsal shicld 336, by 240..

Vener—With a single clongate sternal shield, 260. lung by 130, wide as

figured, extending posteriorly to half-way between coxae VV and the anterior

margin of anal shield, the first sternal setae are lateral and anterior of the apex

of the shield, setae If are also off the shield, but closely adjacent to the margin,

setac IE-V are distinctly on the shield, while just off the shicld and between

setue I and IL is a pair of pores and there is another pair of pores between

setae LV situated neur to the setac, Anal shield as in formal Peritreme 19; long.

Cneihosoma as in female.

Legs as in female, I 192 Jong. UE 240., UT 260;,, TV 260.

Genus BuacHytREMELLOIDES nov.

Body form elongate. Dorsum without long setae. Genital shield in furnale

coalesced posteriorly with ventral which expands immediately behind coxar LV,

then tapers posteriad to a short straight posterior margin confluent with the

anterior margin of the anal shield, In male genital shield relatively short. Legs 11

similar to TIL and LV in both sexes. Tectum bifurcate. Coxae I coalesced to

form a single transverse shield.

Type B. striata sp. nov.

Brachytremelloides striata g. ct sp. noy.

Text Sig. SA-H.

Types.—ltoletype female, allotype male, 10 fernale and § male paratypes in

the South Australian Museum,

Localities. Holotype female, allotype male, 4 paratype females and 1 paratype

male from a Passalid, Aulucocyclus edentulus MeL. from a eucalypt low at

Wilson's Downfall, near Tenterfield, New South Wales. 8/10/56 (coll. G.F\B.),

Other specimens: 4 females and 2 males from Hinchinbrouk Is., Nth, Queens-

AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA DIARTHROPHALLIDAE 25

land, 9/9/56 (G.F.B.); 4 males and 1 female from a Puassalid, 8 miles east of

Wondecla, Queensland, 20/10/45 (R. V. Southeott); one female from A,

edentulus McL. from Bell, Blue Mountains, New South Wales, 27/11/56

(G.F.B.); and one male from A. edentulus McL., Ilampton, Queensland, 2/10/56

(C.V.B,).

Fig, 8.—Brachytremeloides striata g. et sp. nov. A, female in ventral view; B, male in

ventral view; C, dorsum; D, gnathosoma from below: E, gnathosoma and tectum

from above; F, mandible; G, leg I; H, stigma.

Description —Female (Fig. 8A, C-H). An clongate oval species. Idiosoma

432u long, 206» wide. Fairly well sclerotised,

Dorsum (Fig, 8C)—Shield entire, almost completely covering dorsum

except posteriorly as figured, smooth and without any long setae, 413« long

by 201p wide.

265 HW. WOMERSLEY

Venter (Fig. SA),—As fignred; sternal, metasternal and ventral shields

coalesecd, the combined shield rounded auteriorly between coxae IL, widening

ta L0G. between coxae II then contracting between coxae TV to 72, then can-

touting acetabula TV to a width of 144, utter which the sides converge to a

width of 53p. in a fattened apex almost touching the anterior margin of the

separate anal shield, the intercoxal portion of the shield is provided with 5

pairs of setae of which the anterior and longest pair are between coxac II, the

socnmel and third pairs are short and on a level with coxae IU, the fourth pair

between coxac LL and 1V, and the fifth on a level with the posterior margin

of avetabula IV, the yentral portion of the shield is longitudinally striate medially

with about seven lines on each side of the mid-line; anal shield transversely

tripevoidal 53, wide by 2d. deep, and furnished with two long, nude: and

slender, forwardly curved setae to 120, these arise anteriorly vf the anal open-

ing: the genital orifice is long, oval and lies between the posterior edu of

coxue I and the posterior edge of coxae IV, the genital shield ts 86, long and

62,, wide and contours the inner edge of the orifice, posteriorly it is coalesced

with the ventral shield and not clearly hinged. below its surface can be seen

a Y-shaped apudemal strneture: the stigma lies between coxuc IMT and 1V and

is on wa small triangular peritremal shielel but no distinct peritreme is present,

Cnathosoma as figured; hypostome (Fig. 8D) with three pairs of setae of

which only the anterior pair on the base of the paired outwardly curved hypo-

stomal styli are long, labial cornicles short; palpi 3-segmented with the long

dorsal setae on femur and geni nudes tectum (Fig, SE) a long cone but apically

with only a single pair of short laciniae; chelicerae cdentate (Fig. SF), fixed

digit with w thick hyaline apparently (ringed excrescence

Leus.—l short 10x and tapering (Fig. SC), tarsus apically bifid, without

ambulucrum, coxae ill-defined, net fragmented and coalesced to form a transverse

shield U6n across, IETY longer and much stouter, U 204,~, UM 216n, TV 22ip,

tarsi with pad-like ambulacra but no claws, long dorsal seta present only on

fernar of Land this seta nnde.

Male —Of the same shape und general facies as in the female. J.ength of

idiasoma 12.2 width 206;.

Dorsum—As in the fernule. Length of shield 384y, width 206.. No long

sclae,

Venter (Fig. 8B).—The sterno-metasterno-ventral shield as in female, length

345y by 824 wide between coxac IL, narrowing to 72» between ecoxsae IV then

conlonting acctabula to a width of L68p, afterwards the sides conyerge to almost

lonely anteyior margin of anal shield with a posterior width of 48. Anal shield

us m female, width 43,, depth 28, sctue simple to Lbtpy lous. Petitreme and

stigma as in fernale.

Gnathosema with palpi, chelicerae and tectum as in femule.

Legs.—As in female, I 113. long, the coxie ill-defined, not fragmented,

conlesced to form a transverse shield 96; aeross, JT stout age somewhat stouter

than TT and 1V, 230 long, IL and IV stout but less so than Tl. IL 230 lung,

IV 240,,

REFERENCES

Caaus, J. H., ated Gonmossr, F. EL, 1955, A revision of the Suborder Mesosiigmate (Arayina )

Thasedt on New Interpretations of Comparative Morphological Data. Special Bull Ne. 11.

Chicawa Acad. Sei.

Prose, A. S., ev au, 1936. The Ecology of Passedlus carndtis Fubt), a lartle whieh ees ty

rotting logs. Ecol. Monog., 6, pp, 455-490,

Treacarbe, L, 1846. Diarthrophallina, « new yroup of Mesostigmutt [ono on Passalid

beetles, Ent, Medel, 24 (6), pp. 369-394,

ON THE FAMILY DIARTHROPHLLIDAE

(ACAHNAMESOSTIGMATAMONOGYNASPIDA) WITH PARTICULAR

REFERENCE TO THE GENUS PASSALOBIA LOMBARDINI 1926.

BY H. WOMERSLEY

Summary

The family Diarthrophallidae Tragardh 1946 is discussed and all known genera and species

belonging to it considered. Two subfamilies, the Diarthrophallinae comprising the genera

Diarthrophallus Trag., Brachytremella Trag., Lombardiniella Worn. 1960 and Brachytremelloidcs

Wom. 1960, and the Passalobiinae containing the genera Passulolia Lomb. 1926 and Passalana g.

nov. are erected. The gentus Passalobia Lomb. is redefined and the species P. duodecimpilosa

Lomb. is removed therefrom as a synonym of Diurtl~rophullus sirnilis

Trag. 1946. A new genus Passalana is erected for Passalobia peritrematica Lomb. 1951. The

subfamilies, genera and all known species are keyed.

ON THE FAMILY DIARTHROPHALLIDAE (ACARINA-MESOSTIGMATA-

MONOGYNASPIDA) WITH PARTICULAR REFERENCE TO THE GENUS

PASSALOBiIA LOMBARDINI 1926,

H. WomenrsLey®

[Read 12 May 1960]

SUMMARY

The family Dierthrophallidae Trigirdh 1946 is discussed and all known

genera and species belouging to il considered]. ‘lwo subfamilies, the Diarthro-

phallinse comprismg the genera Diarthraphallus Vrig., Brachytremella Trac,

Lombardiniella Wom, 1960 and Brachytremelloides Wom. 1960, and the FPassa-

lobiinae containing the genera Pussulobia Lomb. 1026 ond Pussalana g@. nov. are

erected, The genus Passqlobia Lomb, is redefined and the spevies P. duodecim-

pilosa Loowb, is reuiwved therefrom as a Synonym of Diarthrophullus similis

Trig. 1946. A new genus Passalana is erected for Passalobic poritrematica

Lomb, 1931,

The subfamilies, genera and all known specios are keyed.

The family Diarthrophallidae was erected in 1946 by Triigardh in his very

important paper, “Diarthrophallina, a new group of Mesostig¢mata, found on

Passalid beetles”, published in the Ent. Medd., 24 (6), pp, 369-394, 1936,

Tt was founded upon a study of the curious mite found under the elytra of

Passalus cornutus, in North Carolina and described by Pearse et al. as Uroseins

quercus n. sp. in Ecol, Monog. 6, pp. 478-479, figs. 31-34,

For the species Trigardh erected the genus Diarthrophallus. The family he

placed in a new cohort, the Diarthrophallina, within his subdivision, the

Eugynaspida of the meses Ara in which the epigynial shield (sterno-gynial

of Camin and Gorirossi, 1955) is developed or if absent then secondarily so. He

stressed the relationship of his cohort to the Uropadina and defined the cohort

and familv as follows:

“Body flat, shield-shaped. Legs very short; legs 1 without ambulacres,

legs U-IV with large ambulacres but no claws. Tritostermum flanked by

two pracsternal hairs. Mandibles short, chelate. Palpi without bi- or

trifureate brisue on the base of the terminal joint. Peritreme very short,

Female cpizynial shield large, tongue-shaped, without hairs, not articulated

at the base. Metasternal shields fused with the other sternal shields and

the ventral shicld forming a rim round the genital aperture. Male genital

armature consisting of a large, biarticulated penis fitted into a groove and

directed backwards.

Typical genus Diarthrophallus nov. gen,”

In 1955, Drs. Camin and Gorirossi reduced the Diarthrophallina to the rank

of a superfamily, the Diarthrophalloidea, and together with the Trachytoidea and

Uropodoidea placed it in the cohort Uropodina.

They diagnosed the superfamily thus:

“Epigynial shield elongate, tongte lie fused or hinged to ventral

shield, Mctasternal shields fused with sternal shield. Sterna! shicld inde-

pendent or fused with ventral to form perigenital ring; enlarged jugulars in

some. Base of tritosternum moderate to broad, wnconcealed; Hanked by a

* South Australian Museum,

Yrans, Rey. Soc. §. Aust. (1961), Vol. 84,

25 H, WOMERSLEY

pair of ‘praesternal’ setac. Stigmata between coxse TIL and TV, One or

fet “sth shields without marginal shields. No camerostome or ‘fovealae

pedales’.

Besides the genotype of Diarthrophallus, Tragdrdh (loc. cit.) desevibed a

second species of the genus, D. simtliy from Mexico, and erected a new genus,

Brochytremella tor a uew species B. sptnasa from New Guinea. He also in the

ene paper referred to his family the little known genus Passalobia Lombardini,

26.

Through the vreat kindness of the authorities of the Stackholm Museum and

the assistance of Dr, K, H. Forssland of the Swedish Morest Research Station,

Stockholm, I have been able to examine the material of D, quercus which was

sent ta Triigardh by Dr. Pearse for study. In addition, | have received from

Dr. D. E. Johuston of the Inst, of Acaralogy, Uniy, of Maryland, U.S.A., a nnmber

Gf slides labelled and identified by him as D, quercus. Actually not all of these

ate this species but ay will be shown later some are to he assigned to D, duocle-

vinepilosa (Lomb.), which is the same as 1). similis ‘Trig. L have also a single

toale aud nymph of D, grereus which L collected from a Passalid in a rotting Joy

at a stay mill in Annapolis, Maryland, U.S.A,, in June 1947,

Inquiries of my friend. Dr. §, L. Tuxen, us to the present existence of the

utrique female of Brachytremella spinesa ‘lrig, from New Guinea have failed to

Jowate it. It seems therefore to be now lost. TWowever, on Passalids which |

collected at Bulolo, New Guinea, in 1954. [ was fortunate to find a single speci-

men Of each sex and two nymphs which avree with Tragdrdh’s description. The

species is therefore redescribed in this paper.

The third genus which Tragardh referred te the Diarthrophallidae is the

little known Passalobia Lomb., 1929. ‘This genus was erected for P. quacyi-

catcdate from 2 Passalid from Brizil,

Later Lombardini described three other species as belonging to his genns,

namely, P, duodecimpilosa 1938, P. major 1938, and P. peritrematica 1951.

lfitherto, na one but Lombardini has seen material of this genus or even

re-examined his material, Tt is therefore a very great privilege that I have heen

permitted by Dr. Lombardini to examine what is extant of his Passalobia spp.

and with bis permission to remount them, Unfortunately, the war resulted jn

the loss of much of his collection and the whole lot still existing and sent to me

comprises | slide of P. quadrivaudata. ¢ 1 ditto larva, 2 slides of major, nvmplis,

1 slide of duadecimpilosa, ¢, and 1 slide of peritrematica, nvmph, OF these

species duodecimpilusa is considered to be a synonym of and to have prinrity

over similis Trag, and not to be a true Passalobia but probably a Diarthrophalins,

For the very curious P. peritrematica, a new venus Passalanea is created, 1 have

therefore been able to study all the described species of Diarthrophallidae while

in 4 concurrent paper to this [ have described two new species of Brachytremella

from Australia, as well as creeted the genera Lombardiniella and Brachytremel-

loides for two other new species also from Australia.

Family DIARTHROPHALLIDAE Triigérdh,

‘Tivardh, 1, 1946. Diarthrophallina, a new group of Mesostigmata. found on Passalld berdlos

Ent. Medd. 24 (6). pp. 36934.

New Diagnosis Body form flat, broadly oval to elongate, sometimes con-

stricted medially. Dorswm with a single shield, venerally surrounded by a

nanow band of cuticle, with or without a number of long ciliated capitate

setuc. All logs short, I thin and antennaeform without ambulacra. tarsus apically

hifiircute, U-IV much stauter with large ambulacra but no claws; coxac 1

THE GENUS PASSALOBIA LOMBARDINI BS)

coalesced medially to form a single transverse praesternal shield ar well difteren-

tiated and fragmented, Tritasternum at base flanked by a pair of sctac. Sternal,

mefasternal and ventral shields coalesced, forming a perigenital oval ring be-

tween the coxac: sterno-gynial shield in female tongne-shaped fitting the genital

orifice and fused posteriorly with the ventral shield, in the male fused anteriorly

with the sternal shield and the sterno-gynial shield directed posteriad. Anal

shield small, with one pair of long adanal setae. Metapodal shields present or

absont. Iypostame with 3 pairs of setae, Tectum bi- er quadrifurcate or

ie'met-shaped with apical spike. Chelicerae with exerescence on fixed digit

Stigma between coxae If and LV, rarely between IT and III, peritreme short or

whsent and directed anteriorly, or long, free and directed hackwards.

Typical genus Diarthrophallus Trag,

Subfamily Diastrmorcartmar Tragardh. 1946

Tectum bi- oY trifurcale, Body broadly aval to elongate oval, not medially

constricted, dorsally with long ciliated capitate sctac or entirely without sctac.

Typical genns Diarthrophallus Tras,

Genus DiantuRopnaLius Traég,

Trigievdh, 1, 1946, Bat. Medd, 24 (6), p, 371. Type Uroseius quercus Pearse et al,, 1936,

Body broadly oval, with Jong dorsal ciliated capilate setae. Perigenital ring

in Female closed behind by 4 well-defined semicircular suture. Tectum a rather

ekmgate cone, apically quadrifurcate with the outer styli simple and strongly

bent outwards, the inner styli directed straight forwards closely adjacent and

basally with long ciliations, Leg II in male similar to female. ... .

Genotype Diarthrophalius quercus (Pearse et al.).

This genus so far contains only two species and seems to be confined to

North America. Besides the type Tragardh, 1946, described a second species

1) similis trom a single nymph found on a specimen of the Passalid Pracnlus

gory! from Mexico, in the Hope Museum, Oxford, As is shown later, similis is

a synonym of Lombardinis Pussalobia duodecimpilosa 1938 which trivial name

has prior:ty.

Diarthrophallus quercus (Pearse ef al,).

Text firs, LA-F, 2.A-B.

Urvseins quereus Pearse et al., 1936. Ecol. Monoz., 6p. 478, figs, 31-34,

Dierthronhatlus, quercus Trigitdh, 1946, Mut, Medd., 24 (G6), pp. 371-380, figs. 1-2, 4-3,

Female, Fig. LA—A broadly oyal, brownish species. Length of idiosoma

626n, width 409p,

Dorsurm—Almost entirely covered hy dorsal shield, only a narrow hand of

atticle surrounding shield, length of shield 465y, width 398,, with 6 pairs of

long. ciliated capitate setae to 440. long, second and fourth pairs of setae mar-

ginal on shield, first, third, fifth and sixth pairs on the cuticle, shield with 2 pair

of rapt line with coxue TIT and a number of fine pores or setae (not shown in

Tie. 1B),

Venter, Fig, 1A.-As figured; tritosternum with a moderately long conical

base flanked by a pair of ‘setae; sternal, endopodal, metasternal and ventral

shields coalesced to form a single shield 394, long, 1202 wide anteriorly, ex-

panding to 2160 between coxae TT and coxae Ill, then contracting to 130,

between coxae 1V ta expand again to 149, before rounding off a short distance

from anal shield; in the intercoxal portion is the large aval perigenital ring in

which lies the close-fitting oval tongue-shaped sternogynial shield, the margin

of the orifice is thickened to 134, from the anterior and across at this point is

H. WOMERSLEY

7 ’ a wh OF —_ ¥ | . a a7 a , OF he Ls s

MATA [VSIOP “Gq “AMAIA [BIQUGA UL o[eiaz “WY *("jy 4a asiRAag) snolanb snyjoydosyjint

dT 8ry

TIE GENUS PASSALOBIA LOMBARDINI 31

a faint sub-cuticnlar transverse line, the orifice is posteriorly closed by a semi-

circular suture, the anterior pair of sternal setae are long, 48, the second to

fourth pairs 14, and the fifth pair in linc with posterior margin of coxac 1V

24u; anal shield transversely diamond-shaped, 58. wide hy 20, with a pair of

long ciliated capitate setae to 440u; there are no metapodal shields; on each

side of the ventral portion of the sterno-ventral shield are 2 vr 3 small shieldlets;

stigma between coxae Hf and 1V with a short curved forwardly directed peri-

treme 48, long.

tnathosoma, Fig. 1C.—As figured, with 3 pairs of hypostomal setae of which

the auterior pair is the longest, with a pair of strong outwardly curved hypo-

stomal styli and a pair of long salivary styli; dorsally with a long conical tectnm,

Fig. 2.—Diarthrophallus quercus (Pearse ct al.). Nymph. A. venter; B, dorsum.

Fig. 1D, with 4 apical branches, the outer ones bent rather sharply outwards

and nude, the inner ones about the same length, closely adjacent and directed

straight forwards with long ciliations basally. Palpi 5-segmented (I'ig. 1C),

femur with straight long-ciliated seta dorsally. Chelicerac (Fig. 1E), fixed digit

without teeth but with a subapical excrescence, movable digit with a small

median inner tooth,

Legs. —All 6-segmented and shorter than body, I slender and tapering to

216n, tarsus without ambulacra but apically bifid with a long seta, with a long

straight and ciliated scta on femur and on genu, I-IV much stouter and the

tarsi furnished with large ambulacra but without claws, IT 3124 long with two

long ciliated setae on femnr and one on genu, ILL 3364 with similar setae on

femur and genu, TV 360» and. similar.

Male, Fig, LE\—OFf the same size and facics as in the female.

Dorsum as iv the female.

de H. WOMERSLEY

Venter, Fig. 1, as in the female but the coalesced sternal, endopodal, meta-

sternal and ventral shield somewhat narrower, length 374), anterior width 120p,

expanding between coxae If and between coxae LI to 178n, contracting to 101.

between coxac TV and then widening to 120» before rounding off, the setae ure

as in the female, between the coxae is the oval perigenital ring which is not as

large ws in the female, 110, long by 72». wide, within it lies the elongate hack-

wardly directed aud two-segmented sternogynial shield, 82» long by 62u wide,

with the apical segment 24, long, coalesced anteriorly with the sternal shield;

the stigma is between coxae UE and IV with peritreme 58p long,

Gnathosoma and Legs as in female; lee [ 226. long, If 3262, HT 360, 1V

384.

Tritonymph, Pig, 24-B—OF the same general shape as in the female, Length

of idiosorma 433,, width 304.

Dorsum, Fig. 2B.—Dorsal shield with 2 pairs of long, 40Qu, ciliated capitate

setne and surrounding cuticle with 4 pairs of such arranged as in the femule.

_ Venter, Fig. 2A.—With a single shicld 283, long by 82, wide between coxue

IT and Ul, rounded anteriorly and tapering fromm coxae LIL to just past the

posterior of acctabula 1V, between coxue IV it is 53 wide, of the 3 pairs of

stomal setae ouly 1V and V are on the shield, sternal setae I are longer than

the others; eudopadal shields of voxae T are free and well demuaroated, rather

moon-shaped as shown; stigma between coxae LIL and TV with peritreme 29,

Jong: anal shield as in female, 53. wide by 19, long, with adanal pair of long

ciliated setae to 3386p.

Gnathosama as in female.

Legs as in female, I 206« long, 11 288p, TIL 298, 1V 312).

Remarks. —The ahove descriptions and fyures are from preparations sent by

Dr, D, E, Johnston of specimens from Oakland Co., Michigan, U.S.A. 14/4/57.

The female was from shde T-241-1. the male from slide 1241-3 and the nymph

lremm slide 1241-4,

Diarthrophallus duodecimpilosus (Lomb., 1938) new cols,

Fig, 3A-G.

@ nthe sass et Lomb. Las. Meni. Soc. ent, itu. XVIT, fase. 1, p. 46. Fins, V

ait ‘h.

Madthtophallus sinitis Trig. WAG. Ent. Medd., 24 (6), pp, 380-384. Migs. & and 7.

Lombardini deseribed this species from i single specimen tuken from wader

the elytra ot a Pussalid from Brazil, Me ascribed it to his genus Passalobia

ad tevarded it us u male, Actually his figures show clearly that it is a nymph

and this is confirmed from an examination of the specimen itself which Prof.

Lumbardini has very kindly loaned to me and permitted me to remunnt for

critival study,

D. similis was described by Triégardh also from a single nymph from a

Passalicl, Proenfus goryi from Mexico in the lope Museum al Oxford, Unfor-

tunately, it has not been possible to trace Traégardh’s slide of this specimen,

cither in the Tragardh material in the Stockholm Museum, ov in the Hope

Miiseurn, to which it was supposed to have been returned. Tt must therefore

be presumed to have been Tost.

Tlowever, in addition to being ahle to examine Lombardini’s type, | possess

a single nymph collected by myself from a Passalid, at Annapolis, Maryland,

U.S.A. in 1949, and amongst a number of slides of Diarthrophullus quereus

(Feurse et al.) sent to me by Dr, D. E. Johnston of the University of Maryland,

was one of nymphs, all of which agree with Triyardh's and Lombardini’s species

thus establishing the synonymy of sfnilis with duodecimpilosa. in his deserip-

THE GENUS PASSALOBIA LOMBARDINI 33

Viv. 3.—Diarthrophallus duodecimpilosa (Lomb., ala Nymph: A, venter: B,

dorsum (A-B from Lombardini’s type); C, venter; orsum; E, pnathosoma from

below: F, tectum; G, chelicerae (C-G from specimen 1-241-6, from Michigan, U.S.A.).

od HW, WOMERSLIY

tion Tragardh deseribed the tectum (sic epistome) as having a triangular muero

with u very fine fringe and figures it so (Fig. 7C). In this Tragardh was mis-

taken, for Ir all three specimens before me the tectum is conical with a qquacdri-

furcate upex as in most species of Diarthrophallinae; the outer members are

strong and angled, and the inner straight, but with lony basal ciliations. It is

these ciliations which Tragardh saw and interpreted as the fringe of a triangular

teetlim.

The species is principally characterised hy having only 5 pairs of Jong

dorsal setae, but whether it shonld he strictly placed in Diarthrophallus or the

allied genus Brachytemella ‘Vrigirdh, must await the discovery of the adult

female. For the present jt is as well to retain Triigdrdh’s placing,

Redeseription of Holotype, Wig. 3A-B.

Nymph—Length of ididsoma 384u, width 2404. Shape broadly oval.

Dorsum.—With entire dorsal shield not completely covering dorsum as

figured; with five pairs of long ciliated slender capitate ‘setae of approximately

equal length from 336, to 408.: shield 312, long by 230) wide.

Venter as figured. with the median shield 254, long by 96p, widest between

cuxae Hand U4, the shield is furnished with short broken clongate markings and

marries a pair OF marginal pores in line with trent of coxae ID and another pair

in Jine with anterior of coxae TV, of the 5 pairs of ventral sctae only the fourth

pair are on the shicld and marginal; only the endopodal shields ‘of coxue II

and LV ure: well sclerotised, those: of 1 being somewhat kidney-shaped as shown,

880 long by 14, wide and do not tend to contuur the coxae as in other species,

those of coxae TV contour the cose normally: the anal shield is roughly triangular

and furnished with a pair of long setac, 336,, similar to the dorsal setae; peri-

treme small, 29» long.

Gnathosoma similar to that of other species as are also. the palpi, Chelicerae

ws Agured, movable digit with a small median tooth, fixed digit with subapical

excreseence; tectum as figured, quadrifurcate, the outer meanbers strongly angled

mutwards, the inner straight, closely adjacent.

Legs us in 1, quereus (Pearse et al.), the eoxac of leg 1 not conjoined

medially, but distinct and fragmented. I 182, long, U1-TV 240,.

Remarks. —The accompanying figures of this specimen are drawn alter re-

mounting. For comparison figures and details of a specimen from Michigan

(one nf theee) ure given as well ay measurements of the specimen collected by

myself ut Annapolis.

Specimen from Oaklands Co., Michigan, U.S.A. (one of three Iahelled

Diarthrophallus quercus) coll. D. BE. Johuston, 24th April, 1957. No. T-241-8,

Length of idinsoma 3594, width 307, Dorsal shield 317 long by 245, wide.

Dorsal setae 5 pairs to 3884p long. Ventral shield 245, long, maximum width

96; endopodal shields of coxac I 48 by 4,5 peritreme 242 long Anal setae

264y long,

Specimen from Annapolis, Maryland. U.S.A.. June, 1947 (coll. H.AW.).

Length of idiosoma 4412p, width 3504. Dorsal shield 336, long by 230u wide.

Dorsal setae, 5 pairs to 3844 long. Ventral shield 254, by 1000 maxitnum width;

endopodal shields of coxae [ 45 by 4p; pevitreme 29. long, Anal setae?

Genus BracuyrkemMeLcas Trigdrdh, 1946,

‘Tritgitdh, 1, 1946. Ent. Medd., 24 (G6), p. 386,

This genus was ereeted by Trigardh for a single fomale obtained from a

Passulid Protomocerus sp. from New Guinea, Te distinguished the genus ou

the fuct that the perigenital ring was open posteriorly with the sterno-gynial

THE GENUS PASSALOBIA LOMBARDINI as

shield completely coalesced with the ventral and not closed by a semicircular

suture as in Diarthrophallus. The genus has been redefined and the genutype

redescribed from freshly discovered material in the concurrent paper.’

Besides the above difference trom Diarthrophallus there is a significant

one in the farm of the teetum, In the two known species of Diarthrophallus

the tectum is apically quadrifureate with the outer elements bent angularly

outwards and simple, the inncr elements but little shorter directed straight

forwards, clasely adjacent to each other und with long ciliations basally; in

Brachytreiuella the tectum is quadrifurcate in B, spinosa Triig, and B. tragdrdhi

Wom., 1960 (this Journal, p. 11), with the outer elements shorter and stouter

than the inner and slightly curved outwards, the inner clements arise well within

the hasal junction of the outer ones, are much longer, simple and divergent. In

B. harnemisszai Wom., 1960 (this Journal, p. 20), the tectum is only bifurcate

apieally with two long slender simple elements,

The above three species placed in the genus are separated as in the follow-

ing key to subfamilies, genera and species of Diarthrophallidae.

Brachyiremella spinosa Trig.

Triardh, 1., 1046. Ent. Medd., 24 (6), p. 385, fig. 8.

Wouersley, H.. 2960, Seme Acarina from Australia and New Cuinea, paraphagie upon

millipedes and cockroaches and on beetles of the family Passalidac. Pt. 4. Tho family

Diarthtophallidae. This Journal, p. 13, fies. Ll and 2.

The type specimen of this specics described from New Guinea from Pro-

tomocerus sp. has apparently heen lost. The species was redeseribed (Womers-

ley, this Journal, p. ??) in the concurrent paper from fresh material of both

sexes and the tritonymph, from a Passalid fram Bulolo, New Cuinea, Aug.. 1954

(coll. TLW.).

Brachytremella trigardhi Wom.

Womersley, IL, 1960. Thid_, this Journal, p. 16, fivs, 3 and 4.

_ ‘This species was described from the female, tritonymph and deutonymph

from specimens from Passalids (Mastochilus sp.), from Mt, Lamington, Queens-

land, collected in December, 1948 (H.W.).

Brachytremella bornemisszai Wom,

Womersley, IL, 1960. thied., this Journal, p. 20, fig. 5.

Only the titonymph of this species is known, It was described from two

specimens found on Aulacoeyclus edentulus MelL.., Hinchinbrook Is,, North

Quecnsland, 9/9/56 (coll, G.F.B.), and on the same host from Wilson's Down-

fall, near Tenterfield, New South Wales, 8/10/56 (coll. G.F.B.).

Genus Passavonra Lombardini,

Lombardini, G. 1926. Duo nove genera acarormmm. Boll. Soe. enton. ital, 63 (9-10), p-

158, figs, 1-2,

Lombardini erected this genus for a new species Passalohia quadricaudala

found under the elytra of a Passalid beetle from Brazil. His generic diagnosis

was very bricf and inadéquate and merely stated that it belonged to the Lue-

laptidae, that the sexes differed Mm some sccondary characters and that the tarsi

of leg ( lacked ambulacra.

t Sone Acacina from Australia and New Goines paraphagic upon millipedes and cock-

rowhes und om hectles of the tarmily Passalidac. Pr 4. The family Diarthrophallidae,

Womerslev, H., 1960. This Journal. p, 11.

au 1. WOMERSLEY

Since his. original diagnosis of the gemis and description of the type species

Lombardini has described three other species which he assigned to his genus.

These were duodecinipilosa 1938, Mem, Soe. ent. ital, 17 (1), p. 44, figs. V and

MS najor, 1938, ibid., pp. 118-120, fig. 1h, peritrematioa, 1931, Redia 36; 245-7,

it,

In his ofiginal deseription of guadricaudata he tiguces the female and what

he then considered to be the male, but in 1943, in PAgricoltura Coloniale, 87

(3). pp. 3-6, figs. 1 and 2, he described a true male which he aseribed to quaclri-

caudata and conclided that bis original figure and description of the male were

thase of the nymph, In the same paper he described and figured a larva as of

this species.

Apart from the above species, no others have been deseribed or met with,

unr has further material been reported by other workers. The first reference

ti the genus, however, by other workers appears to be that of Tragardh, 1946,

am his important paper on the Diarthrophallidae, when he placed Passalobia in

association with his genera Dterthrophellus and Brachylremella, mainly on the

strneture Of the genital shicld of the female in that family, Trde’edh himself

cume to the conclusion that Lombardini’s male of 1926 was a nymph, but as

hie apparently had only Lombardini’s 1926 paper before him, he was unaware

that Lombardini himself had earlier corrected this while at the same time de

sering a tyne male. Triigirdh, 1946: 394. in a key to the genera of the

Diarthrophallidae, separates Passalobia from Diarthrophallus and Brachytrenvella

vn the presence of a constriction of the body posterior of coxae LV. This fea-

huve upparently was not considered as generic hy Lombacdini, but it is one of

seyentl mentioned in the original description of quadricaudata which may he

so rescarded.

Owing to the uncertainty of the status of Passelobia the writer requested

the loan of Lombardini’s. original material, and | have been privileged to be able

te study what is how extant of this, for whieh [am traly grateful to my colleague,

1 have received fron: Prof. Lombardini 6 slices, (1) the unique male and the

Jarva ot qeuadricaudata described by him in 1931, (2) the unique specimen of

duodecimpilasa, (3) two nymphs of major, one of which agrees with his figure,

and (4) one of the two recorded specimens of pierifhematira, These are all the

material which now exists, the remainder ineluding the original female and

mvingih of guedricendeatn having, | am informed, been Tost in the wav.

With Prot. Lombard*n’s permission PT huve heen able to remount these

speeimens and they are redescrihed and figured in this paper.

OF these, itis naw shawn that except in duodecimpilosa ancl peritrematica,

Hu constriction bebind coxae LV is present in both the female, male and nymph

of qnedricaudala and in the nymph (the only stage known) of major P.

daadecimpilosa is shown to be synonymous with and to have privrity over

Beachytremella similis Trag., 1946. Thos it aust be removed from Passalebin,

Lonibardini’s peritremetica isa most interesting form and a new genus, Passaleuee,

is erected for it. Thus the only twe species te remain in Passalobia are the

venotype quardricdidute, and muajer, OF all these fone species, except daddeetin

pilosa, however, there is one character by which they differ from the other genera

of the Diarthrophallidag, naniely, the tectumte is a short conieal helmet shape

with um apieal spine. tl does net terminate in feur or two branches. The original

female and nymph of quadricuudaty are now presumably lost. The male attri-

luted hy Lormbardini to quedrenudata is here redescribed, If the eurrelation

is correct, and at present | see no reason to disagree, then the characteristic

enlarged and armonred second leg in this. sex can be considered as ceneric fur

Passalobia, There is, however, ove very remarkable feature by whieh it ditters

THE GENUS PASSALOBIA LOMBARDINI a7

{rom all other species of Diarthrophallidae so far known, ‘The stigmatic open-

ing instead of lying between coxae III and [V is placed between coxac IL and

ILL as figured and is apparently more dorso-lateral than ventro-lateral. Although

Lombardini does not mention the stigmata in his description, the position be-

tween coxae IL and III is clearly indicated in his figure.

The slide containing the larvae described by Lombardini, showed that his

figure was probably correct, although when received the specimen was in poor

condition, Untortunately, however, this specimen was lost in remounting. It

is clear, however, from what was seen of the specimen before it was lost, and

from Lombardini’s figure 3, that it is not the larva of a Diarthrophallid. The

Vig. 4.—Passalohia quadricaudata Tomb. Male: A, venter: B, dorsum: C, gnatlosoma

from above showing tectum; D, gnathosoma from below; E, cheliecrac.

number of dorsal setae, the formation of the gnathosoma and the legs, especially

the tarsi with the ambulacra bearing two claws on all legs clearly separate it.

At present, however, L would not venture to place it.

Passalobia major agrees with all the characters of generic value shown im

the nymph of guadricaudata as figured and described by Lombardini and

although only known from the aomiah is probably a good and valid species.

a8 H, WOMERSLEY

Passalobia peritrematica, however, is a very striking creature. The body

is nut constricted behind coxade IV as in P. quadricaudata and P. major but

tupers posteriad of coxue IV to a rounded end and thus is somewhat obovate

in shape. The most striking feature is that while the stigmal opening although

sinall is between coxue IL and LV, the peritremes are Jong, rather wide lobe-

like structures with indistinct chambers and are directed posteriorly and free

of the body, As Lombardini remarks, tis is a unique featnre in the Acari.

In the tectum the species agree with Passalobia. A new genus Passalana is

ereeted for it.

On the structure of the tectum the two genera Passalobia Lomb. ( genotype

P. quidricaudatd Lomb.) and Pussaland g. nov. (genotype P. peritrematica

(Lomb,)) are placed in a separate and new subfamily of the Diarthrophallidae.

the Passalobiinae,

The genns Passalobia may now be more adequately diagnosed as follows;

Diarthrophallidae, with the body and dorsal shield, more or less, cun-

stricted medially posterior of coxae iV and furnished with only one pair

oF long anteriorly cnrved simple setae subposteriorly; tectum a shorl

founded cane with apical spike, helmet-like: stigraa between coxae LT and

IV (@) or hetween ecoxae LE and D1 ( 3), coxae I coalesced to form a

transverse shield; ventral shield iu nymph extending well past coxae LV,

In the male, leg Ul is very much stouter than IT or IV and armed with

strong apophyses on femur and a stroug claw-like spur ventrally and sub-

apically on tarsus.

Type P. quudricandata Lomb., 1926,

Passalobia quadricaudata |omb,

Vig, 4A-E,

Passalubia quadticaudata Lombardini, 1926, Bll. Soe. entom. ital, 63 (8-10), p 158, fies.

1-3 (nymph andl o ); 1943, PApricoltura Coloniale, No. 3. py. 3-5, figs. 1-2 (2 1.

Passalobta tetragandata Lomb, 1938. Mera, Soc. entomy ttal, #7 (1), p44 (a lapsus valami

tor quadricaudata): W938, ibid, IT (1), p. 120 (a similar Jepsus culanit).

Passelubia quaclricuudata, Triig., 1946, Ent. Medd, 24 (6), p, 38. (N.B,+Legend under

fix, 9 copied from Lombarcdini, 1926, reads “quaedricurnuta” in error.)

No material of the female and nymph now being available the following

redeseriptions of these stages is drawn up from a careful consideration of Lom-

bardini’s descriptions and his excellent figures of 1926. For the male I have been

ahle to study the wnique specimen,

Female,—Body form bilobed with a distinct constriction just behind coxae IV;

approximate length 500.2, width 250,.

Porswm with a smygle dorsal shield which anteriorly completely covers

dorsum, with one pair of long simple forwardly curved setae subposteriorly,

Venler,—Tritosternum with basal cone flanked by a pair of setae, with 4

pair of long laciniac; sternal, endopodal, metastemal and ventral shields

coalesced, expanding widely behind coxae IV te aecupy almost ull the ventral

surface with rounded margin, with 5 pairs of setae, the anterior pair, sternal

setae I, not much if at all Jonger than Tt, setae TI-IV between the second and

third pairs of coxae, Y subposterior on the ventral portion of shield; in the

intercoxal portion is the large oval perigenital ring which: is open posteriorly,

ifs anterior is in line with the middle of coxae II and the sides extend to beyand

coxac IV, at its open posterior end the sternogynial shield which is the samc

shape and occupies the whole of the perigenital ring is fused with the ventral

shiek]; the stigma is small and pliced between coxae TIT and TV and has no

peritreme.

THE GENUS PASSALOBIA LOMBARDINI 39

Gnathosomu.—No hypostomal setae are shown on Lombardini's figure. but

duubtless there are the usual 3 pairs; tectum a short cone with rounded sides and

ani apical spike, helmet-like; palpi 5-seurmented, tapering.

Legs as in other Diarthrophallids, generally directed forwards, shorter than

body, T tapering, tarsi without ambulacra and apically bifid, with a lung apical

seta (shown in Lombardini’s fig, 1! as arising from the tibia), IDTV stowter und

somewhat longer than L, tarsi with large pad-Iike ambulucra but no claws, leg

setae minute and sparse, without any long setae on femur or gen and only a

few moderately long setac subapically on tarsi.

Male lectotype, Fig, 4A-E,—OF rather elongate shape with slight constriction

posterior of coxae TV. Length of idiosoma 4180p, width 240u,

Dorstem.—With single dorsal shicld 4424 long by 220. wide anteriorly. sur-

rounded by a nurow band of striated cuticle (Fig. 4B), one pair of Jong 10a

setae posterior of the shield,

Venter, Fig, +A, as figured: tritosternum with conical base Hanked by a

pair olf setae and with paired Jaciniae; sternal, endopodal, metasternal and

ventral shields coalesced to au elongated shield ichtened ints well beyond coxae

IV but still widely separated Irom anal shield, with & pairs of short setac, the

anterior pair somewhat behind anterior murgin, the shield is 336, long and

120, wide belween coxae HT and 110. wide posterior of coxue TV, in the inter-

cogal portion Jics the perigenital ring 67, long and 43, wide, containing the

backwardly directed, detthle-segmented sternogynial shield 63. long by 38,

wide with the anterior part 48 long, the sternogyniul shield is fused anteriorly

with the sternal portion; bebween the ventral shield and the anal is a pair of

short wider spaced setae; anal shield small. triangular, 284 wide by 25, long

with adanal sctue 96. long; sligma situated between coxwe If and TI and

apparently more dorsal than ventral, without peritreme.

Gnathosama, Fig. 40, Dy with 3 pairs of hypostomal setae, the anterior

pair much longer than the others, and with paired styli; dorsally with helmet-

shaped tectum, Jabial cornicles moderately long; pulp S-segmented, without

any long setae on femur or genu; chelicerac, Fig. 4B, with short edentate chelae,

the fixed digit with subapical liyaline excrescence,

Legs. —Six-seamented, T slender and much shorter than the rest, 192,, woth-

ont ambulaera or claws, tapering, genu with a very long simple seta, tarsns

apically bifid with a long terminal seta, coxae coalesced to form u single truns-

verse shield, 1 very stout, much more so than UT or TV and armed on femur

with a strong inner process and a smaller ang subapically, tarsus with anybulacea

of a large pad but no claws, subspically with a strong claw-like spur, length uf

lee 336,, width of femur 73,2; WT and 1V thicker than 1, 288» lony, withont any

lung setae except on tarsi When they are only of medium length, tarsi with large

ambulacra but mn claws.

Remarks—The male is a remarkable creature and should the correlation «uf it

with the female described earlier hy Lombardini be correct, then the character

of the enlarged and armoured leg IW cun be considered a generic cluructer,

Another remarkable feature is that the stigma, normally hehween coxae TIT and

{V in the female, is in the male placed between coxue ID and UI us is clearly

indicated in Lombardini’s original figure, The rediscovery of the species in

both sexes is badly needed to verify the above features and clieck the correlation,

Tn his 1943 paper Lombardin| also described and figured (Fiy, 3) what he

regurded as the larva of quadricetidata. Amongst the slides sent to me by Dr.

Lomburdini was that of this specimen. Although in bad condition, it could be

seen that Lombardin’s figure was a reasonably good one. Very regrettably,

however, in an attempt to remount this specimen it became lost. : ,

40 H, WOMERSLEY

From what was seen of the specimen and from Lombardini’s figure and

description, it seems pretty conclusive that on the structure of the ambulacra

which consisted of a longish caruncle with only a small pad and paired claws on

all tarsi, as well as the body setae, it is not a Diarthrophallid and probably does

not belong to the Urepodina, Until rediscovered little more can he said.

Passalobia major Lomb., 1938.

Fig. 5.

Lombardini, G., 1938. Mem. Soc. entom. ital., 17 (1), p. 120, fig. TT.

This species was described from the nymph only, from under the elvtra

of Passalids from Brazil. Amongst the slides sent to me by Dr, Lombardini

were two nymphs of this species, one of which in good condition appears to be

tt “

Hig, 3.—Pussalobia major Lomb., 1938 Nymph: A, venter; B, gnathosoma from below:

G, tectum.

that figured by Lombardini. It differs slightly, however, in the shape of the

ventral shield and is refivured and redescribed as follows;

Tritonymph.—Body of clongate bilobed form with a strong constriction behind

coxae IV, length of idiosoma 480, anterior portion 298. wide, posterior portion

187, wide and across the constriction 115z.

Dorsum, Fig. 5A.—Dorsal shield entire, roughly contouring the body shape

360, long by 206» wide, posteriorly with a pair of submarginal long setae 67,

apart and 115,» long and directed forwards,

Venter, Fig, 5A.—Tritosternum with paired laciniae and flanked by a pair of

setae; with a single elongated shicld 2402 long and 94 at the widest part be-

tween coxae III, extending well past coxae TV but not nearly reaching anal

THE GENUS PASSALOBIA LOMBARDINI dl

shield, with 5 pairs of small setae; endopodal shields not marked; anal shield

small, triangular, 24 wide hy 24» long with a pair of forwardly directed sutuc

57p, Jone,

Cuathosoma, Fig. 5B, with three pairs of hypostomal setae, the anterior

palr much the longest. with long salivary styli, dorsally with helmet-shaped

tectum, Fig. 5C: palpi 5-segmented, without long setae on fenrur or genu Fig,

5H; chélicerae wat clearly seen.

Legs.—! the shortest and slender, 192 long with a long seta on genu. tarsus

apically bifid with a long terminal scta but without ambulacram, roxae enalesced

to form a singlo transverse shicld; 11-1V stouter, 216, long, without any long

selac, tarsi with pud-like ambulaera but no claws.

Remorks—This would scem to be a valid species, differing from the nymph

of greedricdudata Lomb. figured as a male by him (1926). in the shorter veutral

shielel and in the shorter dorsal and anal setac.

Cenus Passacana nov,

This genus is erected for the very cutious species described in 1951 iy

Lombardini under the name of Passalobio peritrematica. The genus may be

diagnosed as follows:

Diarthrophallidae in that legs 1 are antennaeform without ambulacra: or

claws and with the tarsus apically bifid with long terminal seta; legs JI-1V

stouter than T with large ambulacra but no claws; body shape obovate with a

single dorsal shield, with only one par of long dorsal setae sub-posteriorly on

euticle between dorsal shield and end of body; sternal shield extending only

slightly beyond coxac TV and into the angles between coxae IL and IT, and

hetween coxae LLL and [V; ventri-anal shield large with a pair of small sub-

anterior setae and a pair of long adanal setae; stigma between coxae U1 and

TY with long tubular blunt-ended peritreme with a number of indistinet chambers

and extending backwards and free of the body almust to the end of it; coxae of

leg T coalesced; tectura helmet-shaped. Type Passalobia perifrematiea Taombh.

The wnique specimen is redescribed thus:

Passalana peritrematica (Lombh,).

Lombardin?, G.. 1951, Redia 86, 2nd ser., pp. 245-247, fi 1,

OF this species Lombardini stutes that be bad found only two females from

under the clytra of Passalid beetles from Brazil.

It is clear from his figure, however, as well as from the single specimen now

extant and amongst the slides he sent me, that the specimens are not adult in

that there is no sign of the genital organs. True there is a peculiar large ring

with crenulite margin lying between the third and fourth coxac which micht

suggest on superficial exargination an oyum in situ; that it is not so, is evident

fram the absence of genitalia and the fact that it appears to be on the dorsul

surface. Until fresh material carr be examined the precise nature of this fealure

is problematical, but it is possibly a dorsal protuberance which in mounting

has heen depressed to give the ring-like appearance, the marginal crenulations

du te some extent extend on to the surface from the margin inwards.

Nymph, Fig, BA-C.—Shape of body obovate, idiosoma 3284p long by 199p. wide,

widest part im line of coxae IIT.

Dorsum, Fig, 6B; with a single dorsal shield as shown, which is only

separated frum the margin of the body anteriorly and ends about midway he-

tween coxae LY and the anus, with only one pair of long simple setae maryin-

ally, which are 82, apart, 53. from the anus and 72, long, ‘

42 H. WOMERSLEY

Venter, Fig. 6A.—Tritosternum with short conical base fanked hy a pair

of setae and with paired laciniae; with the sternal and endopodal shields

coalesced, with almost straight anterior margin, 1202, and strongly convex

Nymph: A, venter; B, dorsum; C, tectum.

1951),

Fig, 6.—Passalobia peritrematica (Lomb.,

posterior margin extending to slightly beyond acetabula IV, length of shield

140p, width between intercoxal angles 1204, with 3 pairs of setae; anal shield

large, apparently embracing the ventral, with strongly convex anterior margin

and sides contouring the body margin, 72, long, 82u wide, with the anus and

THE GENUS PASSALOBIA LOMBARDINI 43

adanal setae posterior, adanal setae simple and 96. long, sub-anteriorly and

about 504 apart ig a pair of short setae; stigma small and sitmated between

coxae TIT and TV with a long, sausage-like chambered peritreme, 150, long and

ca. 124 wide which lies free from the body and is directed bavkwards.

Gnathesoma with 3 pairs of hypostomal setae, the anterior pair much the

longest, with a pair of long hypostomal styli; tectum helmet-like (Fig. 6C);

palpi 5-segmented, without any very lone setae; cheligerae not clearly seen.

Legs.—All 6-segmented, [ the longest, 158,, but not so stout as I-TV, anten-

nacform, without ambulacra or claws, tarsi apically bifid with a lung apical

seta, a very long nude sela on gent; legs T-TV stouter, with large ambulacra

but no claws, without any long sctue on any segments, IL 216, TIL 178), 1V

178n; coxae of Jey I coulesced to form a transverse shield.

Remarks —Vhe curious ring structure noticed above is 110, in diameter.

Key toa the Snbfamilies, Genera and Species of the Diarthrophallidae.

1, Tectum bi- or quadrifureate, dorsum generally with some long ciliated

capitate setae 2

Suhfam. Diarthrophallinae Trag.

Teetum helmet-like with apical spike, not bi- or quadrifurcate; dorsum with

only one pai of sub-posterior long simple setae, 5

Subfam. Passulobiinae nov.

Of broadly oval body form, with some Jong ciliated capitate dorsal selae. = 4

Of clongate form, without any dorsal kmg setae. Ventral shield reaching,

to the anal, with longitudinal lines. Tectum bifureate,

Gen. Brachytremelloides nov.

B. striala Wom., 1960.

3, Genital orifice of female closed behind by a semicircular suture; coxae of

Jee 1 not couwlesced, fragmented. Tectum quadrifurcate, with inner elements

ciliated basally.

re)

zen. Diarthrophatlus Trig,, 1946.

(a) With 6 pairs of long dorsal setae.

D, quercus (Pearse ct al., 1936).

(b) With 5 pairs of long dorsal setae.

D, duedecimpilosa (Lomb,,, 1938),

= similis Trag., 1946.

Cenital orifice open behind, genital shield coalesced with ventral. 4

4. Metapodal shields present, large and not coalesced with ventral. Tectum

bifircate. Dorsum with only 3 pairs of Jong setae posteriorly,

Gen. Lombardiniella nov.

L. lombardinii Wom., 1960.

Metapodal shiclds abseut or fused with ventral. Tectum bi- or quadrifurcate.

Dorsum with more than 3 pairs of long setae, not confined to the posterior,

Gen, Brachytremella Tra, 1946,

(a) With 6 pairs of long dorsal setae of which the second pair from the front

are only half the length of the others, Teetum quadrifureate with the

inner elements the longest.

B. trigdérdhi Wom., 1960,

With all the dorsal setae equally long (b)

(b) With 3 pairs of long dorsal sctac. Tectum quadrifureate with the inner

elements the longest.

B. spinosa Triig., 1946,

With 4 pairs of long dorsal sctac. Tectum bifurcate.

B. bornemissaai Wom., 1960.

44 H. WOMERSLEY

5. Body constricted more or less behind coxae IV then widening.

Gen. Passalobia Lomb., 1926.

(a) In nymph with ventral shield although surpassing coxae IV not nearly

reaching anal; adanal setae much shorter than dorsal.

P, major Lomb,, 1938.

(b) In nymph with ventral shield nearly reaching anal; adanal setae as long

as dorsal setae. In male leg I] with femoral apophyses and subapical

tarsal spur, und stigma between coxae Hl and IIL.

P. quadricaudata Lomb., 1926.

Rady form obovate, tapering from coxae IV; with backwardly directed long

and free, chambered peritremes. ‘Tectum bifurcate. (Only known from

nymph. }

Gen. Passalana noy.

P. peritrematica (Lomb., 1951).

REFERENCES

Camin, J. H., and Conmossi, F. E., 1955. Revision of the Suborder Mesostigmata (Acarina )

based on New Interpretations of Comparative Morphological Data. Spec. Bull. I,

Chicago Acad. Sci., pp. 1-70.

Done pin, G., 1926. Duo nova genera acarorum. Boll, Soc. ent. ital., 58 (9-10), pp.

58-161.

Lomparpini, G., 1938. Acari novi. Mem. Soc, ent. ital, 17 (1), pp. 44-46.

Lomuanvint, G., 1938. Acari novi Il. Mem. Soc. ent. ital., 17 (1), pp. 118-120.

Lonmarprnr, G., 1943. Acari. Tl) maschio adulte e larva di feminins della specie Passalobia

guadricaudata Lomb. TAgricoltura Coloniale, 87 (3), pp. 3-6.

Lommaroins, G., 1951. Acari nuovi. Redia, 36, pp. 245-250.

Pearse, A. 8., eT Au., 1936. The Ecology of Passalus cornutus Fabr., a beetle which lives

in rotting logs, Ecol. Monog., No. 6, pp. 455-490.

Tricarnu, 1., 1946. Diarthraphallina, a new group of Mesostigmata, found on Passalid

beetles. Ent. Medd., 24 (6), pp. 369-394,

ON THL3 DIET AND FEEDING HABITS OF HEMIDACTYLUS FRENATUS

(DUMERIL AND BIBRON)

(REPTILIA: GEKKONIDAE) AT RANGOON, BURMA

BY MICHAEL J. TYLER

Summary

Twenty-one specimens of Hemidactylus frenatus (Dumeril and Bibron) were examined at Rangoon,

Burma; the stomach contents were listed and observations were made on the feeding habits of

several communities. Consideration of these observations and records of geckos ingesting prey

normally regarded as aposematic, led to the conclusion at insufficient evidence exists for it to be

possible to establish whether H. frenatus is a discriminate feeder, although it has been previously

believed to be so.

ON THE DIET AND FEEDING HABITS OF

HEMIDACTYLUS FRENATUS (DUMERIL AND BIBRON)

(REPTILIA; GEKKONIDAE) AT RANGOON, BURMA

by MicHarL J, Tybes*®

[Read 12. May 1960]

SUMMARY.

Twenty-one specimens of Hemidactylus frendtus (Duméril and Bibron)

were examined at Rangoon, Burma: the stomach contents were listed and ob-

servations were made on the feeding habits of several communitics. Considera-

tion of these observations and records of geckos ingesting prey normally

regarded as aposemitic, led to the conclusion thal insufficient evidence exists

for it to be possible to. ustublish whether H. frenatus is a discriminate: feeder,

although it has heen previously beliéved ta be so,

INTRODUCTION

Numerous references to studies of Hemidactylus spp. may be found in

bibliographics of zoological literature, and H. frenatus is probably onc of the

better known species,

Several papers list food items which were accepted, or examined, but re-

jected, by the yeckos, O£ these the must comprehensive is probably that by

Sevastopulo (1936) in India, whilst a note by Lamborn (1921) of an observation

in Malaya on a species which was possibly H. frenatus, is also of interest. More

recently Nagtegaal (1954) in a paper describing his successful method of breed-

ing specimens of II, frenutus and Il. platyurus (Schneider) fromm éygs exported

from Indonesia to Holland, mentioned the food items accepted or rejected in

captivity.

The present investigation, which is based on observations made al the

Young Men’s Christian Association, Llanmadaw Branch Hostel at Rangoon,

Burma, during the period |3th-28th December, 1958, was carried out to deter-

mine the range of prey ingested. Close attention was puid to observations of

feeding habits to determine whether this species is a selective feeder,

METHODS

In the majority of cases the specimens were collected by hand but, when

not within reach, capture was quite simply effected by means ol a large buttery

net,

After the geckos had been Ialled with carbon tetrachloride vapour, the

following data was recorded prior to dissection: the length of the body, includ-

ing the tail, measured dorsally from the external nares to the extremity of the

tail; the length of the beady, excluding the tail, measured ventrally from the

anterior extremity of the lower jaw to the vent; the tail was exarnined for the

presence of scars revealing previous loss and subsequent regeneration of that

appendage. The stomach was then removed and the contents examined and

listed,

* Department of Humau Physiology aud Pharmacology. The University of Adelnide.

Trans, Roy, Soc, 8, Aust, (1961), Vol, 84,

48 MICHAEL J. TYLER

HABITAT

During the hours of daylight H, frenatns lives in crevices in walls within

hiases, restaurants, shops, etc. but ut an hour or two before dusk the geckos

cmeree, and at night are te be found cungregating near electric lights in search

of insects.

Ip Caleutta geckos were seen clinging to the plate glass windows of shops

beluw neon lights, whilst the outer wiighace of warehouse walls on the dockside

at Sunibaja, Java, provided a honting ground for several hundred specimens.

The specimens examined at Rangoon Y.M.C.A. were captured on the

wills of the dormitories, staircase, showers and lavatories, and on the walls of

a small cafeteria situated adjacent to the Y.M.G.A.

‘The status of H, frenatus in private dwellings in Burma is a rather unusual

one. There is no doubt that its presence is beneficial to the occupants, for the

contral of household insect pests, a fact noticed also in the Philippines by

Taylor (1922). However, since many of these Burmese people are Buddhists,

and the belicts of some of these followers restrain them from harming even an

insect, it is probable that geckos would be tolerated in houses even if such a

symbiotic relationship did not exist. Furthermore, a widely aveepted super-

stition exists which states that if a person is bitten by a gecko, he or she must

immediately drink water for, if the gecko does so helore the victim, the victim

will dic, ILis claimed by others that this myth applies only to the Tokay (Gecko

gecko) but, whatever the origin, there appears to he a distinct relictance

amongst some Burmese to handle these creatures. The bite of both can be mast

painful and that of the Tokay severe. but it is worthwhile reflecting here that

only two species of venomous lizard exist in the world, one in North America

and the other in Borneo. The result is that the geckos in Burma are

respected, tolerated and therefore permitted to propagate their kind unmolested

in the habitations of man.

SIZES OF SPECIMENS CAPTURED

The Gekkonidae are well known for their rapid rate of growth, and Cugle

(1846) records one species (HL. garnoti Dumeéril and Bibron) completing develep-

mettt in 30-40 davs of hatching from the eyg. Nugteyaul's captive specimens of

Hf, frenatus, however, took considerably Tonger, and a specimen which mea-

surreal 35-40 mm, total length when hatehed on 31,8.53, had only reached a length

of 70 mm. six weeks Jater. His. specimens had been reared in a terrarium at

a temperature of 25° C., and it is probable that the optimum temperature, hase«l

un (hat experienced during the season when the eggs are laid, is several degrees

higher than this figure.

The histogram in Fig. 1 compiled from the body lengths (measured ven-

trally from the vent to the snout) of the twenty-one Burmese specimens, reveals

a distinct bimodality representing juvenile and adult specimens. In view of te

small number of individuals involved, it is not possible to determine here whether

the adilt specimens (55-70 mm, body Jength) represent one or more generations.

FREDING HARITS

The method of approach of JI, frenatus to an insect is initially a rapid move-

ment follawed by one of great stealth, nntil the gecko is within a few inches

oF ity prey when it mades au sudden rush at the object. The tongue plays little

ar 10 part in the capture which is accomplished by 4 rapid movement of the

jaws. The writer's observations support those of Sevastopulo who considered

that this last rush is provoked by some slight movement on the part of the prey.

DIET AND FEEDING HABITS OF HEMIDACTYLUS FRENATUS AT

At the Rangoon Y.M.C.A. fierce competition for food items was observed

amongst the geckos, well illustrated by the following example, Two mature

specimens simultaneously approached the same food item, a dragonfly, and the

larger upon noticing that a competitor existed, turned from the prey and at-

tacked the other gecko, Despite the fact that the commotion disturbed the

dragonfly, which hurriedly escaped, the larger gecko, which already lacked one

eye, grasped the smaller by the lower jaw and ching there for several minutes.

mn OF

40 45 50 55 60 65 70

Length in millimetres

Fig. L—Tlistozram of body lengths of specimens examined. Tori-

vemtal scale: body lengths in millimetres; vertical scale: frequency.

Each lizard in turn made violent spasmodic sideways movements with its head,

with the result that in a few minutes both were bleeding profusely and at the

end their issue remained apparently undecided.

Whether this attack by the larger upon the smaller was, as it appeared,

to be induced solely as competition for the same food item or whether a distinct

territorialism also exists as a contributory factor could not be determined,

STOMACH CONTENTS

A total of eighty-three food items were recovered from the twenty-one

stumachs examined, and is tabulated in the form of a point frequency diagram

in Fig. 2, Facilities for the detailed identification of the stomach contents were

not available at the time that the observations were made. The food. items

were therefore only classified to the order, and occasionally to the family.

48 MICHAEL J. ‘TYLER

Three stomachs each contained single specimens of Hymenoptera of which

one was an aphid (Family: Aphididac), another an ant (Family: Formicidae),

whilst the remaining specimen was in such an advanced state of digestion that

identification was impossible. Of cight specimens of Coleoptera recovered from

four stomachs, digestion was advanced in seven cases, but the eighth was a

member of the Curculionidae Family.

The seventeen Lepidoptera found in a total of eleven stomachs consisted of

ten adult microlepidoptera and seven adult macrolepidoptera. Of the Iatter,

the bulk of the food item was frequently large in comparison with the size of

ZYGOPTERA }+——

HEMIPTERA

ARACHNIDA

COLEOPTERA

LEPIDOPTERA

Fig. 2.—Point frequency diagram of

stomach contents. Horizontal seale:

types of prey; vertical scale: num-

her of specimens recovered from

stomachs.

the predator. The wing span measurements of the three largest prey were

33 mm., 28 mm., and 21 mm. from predators with body lengths of 65 mm.,

59 mm., and 48 mm. respectively.

Three stomachs each contained two nymph crickets (Orthoptera: Family

Gryllidae ).

Diptera were the prey most frequently ingested and a total of thirty-five

specimens (of which fourteen were mosquitoes, Family Culicidae), were re-

covered from thirteen stomachs,

The remainder of the food items consisted of five small Hemiptera, one

dragonily: Zygoptera, and five spiders (Arachnida: Family Araneae).

DISCUSSION

As has been revealed by the observational data, the habit of large numbers

of geckos to congregate together results in fierce competition between them for

any potential food item. It is therefore most interesting to note instances where

NET AND FEEDING HABITS OF HRMIDACTYLUS FRENATUS an

none of the geckos in a group would attempt to caplure a partienlar type of

inseet. Such a case is described in a note hy Lamborn (1921), who observed

three geckos separately examine a specimen of Hypsa (= Asela) alciphron Cram.

which bad settled upon the ceiling of a room in his house at Kuala Lumpur.

He noted that although geckos captured, or attempted to capture, other species

they ignured the H, alciphron. Cott (1955) conchided that this was an example

af selective feeding but, since Lamborn stated that the moth did not move at

all dering the period that it was examined by the geckos, and thus did not

provoke attack as was fod to be necessary by Sevastopulo and the writer, it

would not appear to he quite as convincing an example as Cott believed.

A much better example of geckos avoiding a type of prey is that mentioned

by Sevaslopulo, who observed geckos approaching the bee. Apis mellifera indica,

and then retreating from it. Sinee the bee would be regarded as distinctly

aposematic this reaction is perfectly normal if the predator is a discriminate

fecder, It is therefore indeed quite remarkable when the same author found

that the brilliantly coloured larva of Peraspa. lepida Cr., which, covered with

urtieating bristles, must be considered distinctly aposemutie although proeryptic

in its natural surroundings, was devoured by the geckos promptly.

The present Burmese data reveal that a wide variety of prey is ingested

in the probable proportion in which they wceurred in the hostel. Mosquitues

and other Diptera were undoubtedly the insects most frequently occurring there,

and it is therefore not surprising that these insects were found with equal

frequency im the stomachs examined. None of the items could be regarded

as aposemutic,

Since many of the prey are to be regarded as household pests, it is estab-

lished that the presence of H. frenatus is beneficial to the ocenpints,

Although examples of feeding which are clemly selective do oveur. the con-

verse cases are just as frequently recorded, and it is therefore eonchided that

there is insufficient evidence tu dute to assume that H. frenatus isa discriminate

feeder, if discrimination of prey is determincd by the visual senses,

ACKNOWLEGMENTS

I wish to acknowledge the helpful advice received during the preparation

of this paper from Professor BR. F. Whelan and Dr. [. 8. de la Lande (Depart-

ment of Human Physiology and Pharmucology, the University of Adelaide),

and Mr. F. J. Mitchell (Curator of Reptiles, the South Australian Museum),

My thanks are also duc to Miss J. Rayner for typing the manuscripts, Mr,

M_ iE. Mate for his assistance in the capture of same of the specimens, and

Mr J. Leenders for his translation of Nagtegaal’s paper,

REFERENCES

wore, BF. K,, 1946, A lizard popolatien on ‘Tinian. Copsia, 1, pp. 4-9,

Cort, TT, B., 1955. Adaptive Culuuration in Animals. Methuen, Loudon.

Lanmouy, W. A., 1921, A Mypsie moth inspectecl anc neglected hy Geekos, Proc, Ent,

Sac. London, p. 7.

Naurresan, J. 1954. Mijn evaringen met ‘Tjitiaks. Lactera, 12, 2/4, pp. 10-11.

Sevasrorvio, D. G.. 1936. The prey of heise lizards (ITemideetylian sp.) in Galentta. Troe.

Roy, Ent. See. London, 11, pp, 91-92,

Tavion, 2. UL, 1922, The Lizards of the Philippine Islands. Publ. No. 17, Buns. of

Seienee, Manila, pp. 269, figs. 9,

SUBSURFACE STRATIGRAPHY OF THE MARALINGA AREA,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY N. H. LUDBROOK

Summary

Eighteen bores in a previously unknown locality at Maralinga in the west of South Australia

established a sequence of about 1,000 feet of Proterozoic (Marinoan) shales and sandstones resting

on diorite. These are overlain by a thin series of kaolinizcd grits of either Permian fluvio-glacial

origin or of Mesozoic age with reworked Permian glacigenes. They are followed by thin paralic

Eocene silts and limestone with a relatively thick cover of Tertiary to Recent terrestrial sands.

Extension of the Eucla Basin to the north is disproved, although there has been over-deepening into

the Proterozoic in the vicinity of Tietken's Plains probably as the result of Permian glaciation.

SUBSURFACE STRATIGRAPHY OF THE MARALINGA AREA,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by N. A. Lppaook*®

[Read 9 June 1960]

SUMMARY

Eightcen bores in a previously unknown locality at Maralinga in the west

af South Australia established a scquence of about 1,000 fect of Proterozoic

(Marinvan) shales and sandstones resting on diorite. These are overlain by a

thin sevies of kaolinized grits of cither Permian fuvio-glacial origin or of

Mesozoic age with reworked Perniian vlacigenes, They are followed. by thin

paralic Eocene silts and limestone with a relatively thick cover of Tertiary

ta Recent terrestrial sands.

Extension of the Eucla Basin to the north is disproved, althouzh there has

heen over-deapening into the Proterozoic in the vicinity of ‘Vietken’s Plains prob-

ably as the result of Permian glaciation.

INTRODUCTION

During 1954 and 1955 a survey was conducted by the South Australian

Department of Mines to locate supplies of underground water lor the Long

Range Weapons Establishment project at Maralingz. Eighteen percussion bores

were drilled in an area extending from 15 miles north of Watson on the ‘Trans-

continental Railway throngh Maralinga and Tietken’s Plains to Marcoo, 45 miles

north of Watson,

Maralinga is located near the north-eastern margin of the Eucla Basin.

Prior to the investigation the subsurface stratigraphy anc geological structure

uf the lerrain immediately to the north of the Eucla Basin were unknown.

When the first (Numbers 1 to 5) bores drilled at Tietken’s Plains in 1954 estab-

lished the presence of older Tertiary sediments it was thought that there might

be an extension of the Eucla Basin to the north beyond the margin as it is at

present delimited by the Nullarbor Limestone. Subsequent drilling showed

this not to be the case, although Eocene seas gained access to the overdeepened

shallow basin at Tietken’s Plains.

STRATIGRAPHY

Stratigraphic units intersected by the wells are as follows:

Approximate

depth related Approxinate

to sea level thickness

(feet) (feet)

Tertiary to Recent non-matine scdinients +900 to + 500 48 ta S500

Upper Eocene bryozoal calearenite (Wilson

Bluff Limestone ) $ ' ’ " — 460 to + 360 106

Rocene paralic silts and sauds with lignite + 430 to + 330 100

?Permian kaolinitic grits and sandstone —, +410 to + 270 120

Upper Proterozoic choculate and blne shales

and brown sandstone ‘i + 380 to —751 1,126

PArchaean diorite . f — 751

_ * Palaeontologist, Geological Survey of South Anstrilia, Published with the permission

of the Director of Mines.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. (1961), Vol. 84.

52 N. H. LUDBROOK

The sequence differs from that of the Eucla Basin. No marine Cretaceous

was intersected in any of the bores, and the possible connection of the Eucla

Basin with the Great Artesian Basin during the Lower Cretaceous was not estab-

lished. In view of the thinness of the Cretaceous at Lake Phillipson and Mabel

| NORTHERN, TERRITORY | oucenstanp

'; a [

aa I

H |

x !

: !

x oN

bh ch

Sl , a j

02K e FLNIMESOL Gr j

Fs Marcoc ie i

na S| MAL OAMAGEA [%

al a i=

xi é x

t | Is |

v | |

y Is

tii

‘\ / oon he

SOUTH AUSTRALIA oe aaa

NAL, f !

SCALE ~~ i

Miles 50 0 50100 Miles = ,

—* ~ ee Be x iS

t is

}

LOCALITY PLAN Xeel

_ FIGURE |

Creek it is likely that any marine scdiments deposited during the Cretaceous

have been removed by erosion,

The Nullarbor Limestone of Miocene age was not proved to extend any

further north than Lake Yarle.

P ARCHAEAN BASEMENT

At 1,720 feet Bore 7 entered fine-grained diorite presumed to belong to

the basement complex, though intrusive diorites are known to occur in the

Upper Proterozoic (B. P. Webb, personal communication).

17 I6 14 15 12 13 6 10 9 7 8 118 38 | aA 2 4 5

Dark red bron

wet ek Sih «| Doo hg ot, . sore” Red clayey sana " Bunt cp sey

sare tf a Led sand) * olay Began pad? | ° Red clayey sarc - Looe sorrel ED ae Cyl Mise) ean sk orev Done ot brown, sant: Bremen .

-) yeu bef ia ee ak: ‘| \ ba! scarce . dal Camere aout Crowe claver al Yollow Alay Clay Irpestone ye TnL ap.

woke White sandstone Ay sera’ £ lay tiot Fegclate shale l age orange “J 5 Pasta SE) ti azo — ssancheal” Sana § grit fed sare Al ae mais fi SIP ge “ 2

vit oy ase re dreen rh Shue groom shale Z ger? ig, HE Suff, san Fine vellow sand gpl . "| Lheenat ptey om aigien pene 7 * y oi

eels oe re ented aheD wth. Saft chocolate shan ahd, in olay Cream sand ; 7 Pberbiie - wikebe : ani ti il betow wer te 6B | eo maierremite

$l hore i nosing Fe orett lie shale $ ' J eed sf

at |S Pee, oye Ben SOT Green Shae ad Fue PEG? Pi afe BF . siiaid ag Fale vellow sama yo sand pat |e iPr -seaeut

©, u ee ‘ K— : : ¢ Me woe . muerte Cat arte

Teele ttc Snes Poe % BARE CEE a Brome % me Blae shale wit OF Cream san Vee Sob ream sede ha : fine grey sana | nck prt epee ree rs LEN, pope

Uarolafe aa, white ase sod sandstane bars . | Fete while sand . 4 ima fy defer

acolatr 0? 'p — »| ard e

eer Kloe sha . Cream san? 7 arb Sages |

7 230 ; “ LP? vr a) 5 : ’ “ 7

ae anid shaie Brey while santl eal a, i, ¥ || feve ream sari Lignite ab

Uherolate shaie . a heey serra 5 | . 5

rotate 6 fe Pink sara pus Rapist nang 7 "White geet] sora Brew wh te abt aren

Lbocolate shale ay ees sana ter fare ur NS nk pre UE Sant Wi pebhle:

F Sarastone | 4 Yellow sara Ae 2 valor ster heh Fife seink ard yg Syowe gore

5 Bi Ss, EEL] 6 ank sand : AG? AE SAE gee Ey 5 ell at pik a. : 302) EE ae Dink blige, arey sna 2

| Shur -gresr shale $4 5 if ; 2) etow sara! a cy Shera! 23} Sane $I , 825 A eek blue “ag

= | Fate veléw send ses Nye a ‘ . Primm spent AIL) (Fe ae ere ee Aeaivrst sanie seaenere tater

= 6. eto Babs . it Motopy, - erecn-, " ear sarc $8?

=| fe" bromr be afl saci 38h 2 ~ buff Sona fea frene ity : Yefiow sand at

Jgigilore “Se 4 5 tak sara Pee any s f . Brower pik &

WA | Brows yellow sand |. Buhl elaves sama 499 & scree y 3# ad! Beeanin shea ab We ew syne *

paren Sr be SeaEN 2 at Ary earned feet SBrowr eh eres |=

it bea 7 tes Ce MEI i iar eter coren ¥ 7

= a

Cheevigte stat el gter) te ory “| apd a nile - Sat 2 Sik Li

Blow Qrege shoe Hock ayritie ads ek serra Loach. gal } Browse sandstone

=| Brower shai as store |- Z ee tard wiay iy Nee reds oF ae

eonntgte bape a 7 5 tare we, = :

LEGEND hence Shwe, ees wee “Ore Pe sod © white Brow? san Sn 2a liiree spel grit

Sere sandstone : orey FOO te ety a. way f ey apne & oat =] wt rite fay

we- green soft 584 GMa Talo 585+: op ape Bieien 7 = Z 80 rape ee

x "atl ale ingomerate: 3 Grev shale Re Trin 581 Dav boawen «ath Chocolate shale

Read sands ant . 2] 4, beg. <. a7 rey brown = Stone

* Ke : rey green trentats bay

Layer sands = Grey prise oyritie poyeteke Sanwshone Chocolate xrllstone

Saas lore and shelve ET 4.

é Shale oye

RECENT chayplate yams cxctinin sandstone 69h Brown sanatslore

Yor AY 5 Brows sana tore pf 720 Grey sana oe Crear sengeten!

Way tiatds, Cres hones ki tees Ke ay hey s shite :

= wt nen marine} mottling us Brown sandstone 740 Vbevolate shale

TERTIARY 4 ol

the Sone oreo. 800

Lae sarrds —

rf Chocdiate shale

wan se

Loafer i=

eby coburenite —

out (Milsen Bluff

EQUENE (im )

Lark nev tipek “wrk — m2

GEG, EF MARALINGA WATER BORES i-

' Se eS With Oger Fe _

L é

S niian | Se oe COLUMNAR SECTIONS IN ORDER » SOUTH -NORTH

- NO her tap S| Chocelate shale

» bail iret Ped

(oe Yocctats aa blue.

| Arey shales

PR( ITEROZOIC,

(MARINOAN) | Ped

| Bren NORMALE LES fee 5 =

' MBCHAEAN Drorste ie

Arvbersers

FIG. 2

SUBSURFACE STRATIGRAPHY OF ‘THE MARALINGA AHEA 53

UPPER PROTEROZOIC SEDIMENTS OF THE MARINOAN SERIES

With the exception of the most northerly bores 1, 2. 4,5, all bores entered

al depths not greater than 631 feet a series of chocolate siltstones and shales,

blie-green siltstones and brown sandstones. No organic remains were detected

in any of the cuttings. Lithologically, the formation consists of suft either

chocolate siltstone or pale grcen-blue pyritic siltstone passing downwards into

fine to mediwn grey-brown sandstone or shale inter-bedded with sandstone

and then into chocolate shale, There is considerable mottling of the green-

blue and chocolate shale. Tlie sandstone is generally soft, and may be loose

und unconsolidated, Siderite content is high. Dolomite or dolomitic limestone

was intersected in Bore 17 hetween 122 and 170 fect. This lithology is ewn-

sistent with the Upper Proterozoic (Marinoun) and the sediments are cor

related with the Tent Till Formation, which is currently placed in the Upper

Proterozoic.

The formation was completely penetrated in Bore 7 to a total thickness

al 1,090 feet hetween depths of 63) feet and 1,721 feet. In this bore the

tulluwing sequence oecurred below 631 feet:

Thickness

Gil- 740 fect Green siltstone with sandstone burs 108 Feet

T4HN-1,220 feet Chocolate siltstone tilerbedded with red larewn sandstone 480 feet

1,220-1,360 feet Red-brown siltsteme and sandstone 140 feet

U3G0-1,370 feet Red-brown sandstone and shale 10 feet

1,370-1,690 feet Chocolate shale with thin sundsyteune lars 320 feel

1,690-1,696 feet Chocolate shaky and sandstene " 6 fuwt

4,696-1,708 tert Choecalate shale : . 12 Jere

3 7OS8-L,721 feet Dark red sandstone } ! 13 fext

The firmation appetrs to be fat-lying, the sandstones in particular viving

very little evidence of disturbance since their deposition, which is believed to

have taken place under non-marine conditions.

GREY-WHITE PYRITIC GRITTY AND SANDY CLAYS

A maximinu of 197 feet of grey-white highly kaolinized gritty clays wis

iutersected in bores north of Bore 12, although they were ahsent in Bore 12

itsell. They are characterized by a high kaolin content und the presence uf

muscayite. pyrite. and grey opalescent quartz grains to grit size. The evains

are usually subangular but the degree of roundness varies from angular to

rounded. Muscovite flakes are fine and abundant, pyrite is also abundant and

may be present as large aggregates or nodules. Facetted pebbles occur near

the base of the forniation.

The age of the sediments is uncertain. On the western margin of the

Artesian Basin south-west of Mount Itba and northwards from Lake Phillipson

surface exposures have been mapped as "Jurassic. Tt hus now been shown

(Bahne, 1957) flat a thickness of ut Teast 1,800 and possibly 3,000 fect of

Permian tillites, clays and sundstunes passing upwards into carbonaceous shales

is present in Lake Phillipson Bore, overlain by some 80 feet of Lower Cretaceous

siltstones.

The kaolinized grits and gritty clays in the Maralinga area may therefore

Ins fluvio-glacial sediments of Permian age or Permian clacigenes redeposited

diving the Mesozoic, probably the Lower Cretaceous. The sediments differ

fram mast Permian glacigenes in South Australia in that the pebbles and grits

cunsist almost cntircly of quartz, generally blue-grey or opalescent, and are

nut heterogencous. This would tend to favour a younger age for the sediments

with resorting of the material. However, they cannot he correlated lithu-

LUDBROOK

N. H.

Ste GY

Biflojo ubapystpy aS Avs

“SBUCLSOUES UE SANIYS WOLOADJ Aig

OODYVW @% NOSLYM

Wous

NOILDAS TWWOISO1OAS

€ aYunol4

SABI pluie Sp6AB PATIUY ORY LPI lad

shojs pue spuos shoraplaogins auazo7 addy, |.

auesel] Jynig vox yj auaraz wade

PUALSMLND SOG BBD Y I

spune perspoasiay Fore |

STW OF s oo 1 2 & F SSeIW

“,

Sox

TIIM SNIMLIL

poled fa

FOISGKOY

HLYON FONITYSVR HLnNOS

SUBSURFACE STRATIGRAPHY OF THE MATIATLINGA AREA 3

logically with the Upper Jurassic-Lower Cretaceous Blythesdale Group of the

Great Artesian Basin.

The slight wverdeepening of the area north of Bore 12 may well be related

to Permian glaciation.

EOCENE CARBONACEOUS SANDS AND SILTS

Overlying the kaolinized yrits und clays are paralic dark grey-brown silty

sands 1p to 100 feet thick with lignite jin Bores 11 and 3B. These are of Kucene

age. Weathering and Jateritization have destroyed most of the organic remuins,

No foraminifera were recovered bul pyrilized shell fragments are not uncomiman.

These include “Turritella aldingue”, Dentalium sp.. Nuculani sp. and Liotina,

all of which commonly occur in Upper Eocene sediments of this type elsewhere

in South Australia.

The carbonaceous silts occur between Bore 12 and Bore 34 and are to be

corrclaled with the lignitic clays outcropping at Pidinga.

EOCENE MARINE SEDIMENTS

North of Bore 3B bryozoal ealcarenite and caleareoug sands either over-

lying or partially equivalent to the paralic silts were intersected in all bares.

These appear to be a marginal remnant of the Wilson Bluff Limestone (Eocene )

of the Enela Basin. In the sandhills area hetweeu Watson and Tietken’s Plains

the formation was either cut off in Mocene times by bedrock highs or subsc-

ynently remoyed by crosion and formation of the high dunes.

The calcarenite contains fairly abrymdant, if not very well preserved, small

foraminifera incliding Sherbornina atkinsoni (juveniles), Anomalina perthensis,

Globigerina linaperta. Cihicides wnbonifer. Cibicides pseudoconvcexus. Weronel-

lenia pusilla, Planorbulina sp., and other small forms.

POST-EOCENE SANDS

The northon margin of the Eucla Basin is marked by a series of great

dines, which attain. a maximum thickness of about 500 fect in the neighbour-

hond of Bores 12 to 11B. The base of the sands is generally marked by a laterite

and the carbonaveous. silts between Bores 6 and 11 show evidence of lateritiza-

tion, The sands are gerierally pink, red, or yellow in colour near the base and

are vich in iron minerals, For the most part they consist uf up to 290 feet of

fine cream sand with some coarse rounded grey quartz grains.

On Tietken’s Plains Bores 1 to 5 passed through lake marls and sands with

fresh water oolitic limestone containing ostracodes,

DESCRIPTION OF THER BORES

Bore |,

0-120 foot Bxisting well with hryozoal calesrenite sccurring somewhere in the jotecval,

the wsuct thiekness being indeterminable. Sample F 10/5, collected from

spot consists of a fine-graiued yelluw calcarenite with’ abundant bryozoa

and the following forininifera; Textularia sp., Qentalina sp.. Pseudoglan-

dtling clarket Parr, Lagene spp., Fissurina ap., Vaginuline ef. patens Brady,

Vaginuling sp.. Murginuling sp, Guféulina ireegularis WOrbigny, Guttalina

spy Guituline problema d'Orbigay, Angulogerina spyp., ‘Urifarina bradyi

Cushman, Bolicina spp., Cassidulina spp., Gyroiling sp., Alebamina sp.,

Cihteides vertex Doreen, Cibicides pseudeconnexua Parr, Cibicides une

honifer Parr, Anomeling perthensis Part, Globigerina linaperta Finlay,

Planorbulin. sp., Avtrananion sp, Nonion sp., Elphidium spp., Heronallenia

pusilla Parr, Notorotalia sp, noy., Sherburninu atkinsoni (juveniles), The

assemblage is of Upper Eocene age.

121-137 feet

137-145 feet

145-180

180-200

fect

feet

Bore 2.

U- 12

12- 39

feet

39- fet

Bl).

feet

a feet

Ta-

Bore 3.

O- 50 feet

50- 82 feet

OQ] feet

9I- OS feet

98-207 feet

207-225 feet

Bore 4.

(} G8 fect

68- 90 feet

90- 92. feet

O2- 95

feet

95-102 feet

N, H. LUDBROOK

F 15/54 to F 16/54, White pyritic quartzose kaolinized clay with abundant

muscovite,

Quartz grains mostly elear, angular io subrounded with etched snrface.

F 17/54 to V 18/54. Fine to cnarse mieacuons quarts sand into clay, pyrite

and finionite. i

F 19/5¢ to F 20/54. White sandy micaceous clay with quartz pebbles.

Quartz sandstone with pyrite, mmscovite and siderite.

From 121-200 feet the boring is in the kavlinized PPermian grits.

Samples FP 22/54 lo F 24/54, Brown soil and clay subscil.

F 25/54 ts F 27/54. Brown bull aad pink caleareous clay or mar] and

argillaceous limestane of I4yenstrine origin with probable ostracodes,

F 28/54, Brown argillaceous sand with larve ronnded quanz grains and

smuull aupnlar to subangular grains.

F 29/54. Yellow caleureens eguartz samdstone.

F 30/54. Yellow fossiliferous caleareous sundsteme with a microfauna

similur to thet of Bore 1, F 10754, including Lagena spp., Vaginulina cf.

putens, Cuttuline sp., Angulogerina spp., Trifarina sp., Bolivina spp., Cas-

sidulina sp., Gyroiding sp, Almbamina sp. Cibivides umbonifer, Cibieides

spp.. Anomuline perthensis, Sherborning atkinsoni.

F 31/54 to F 33/54. Yellow caleareons sandstone with a few microfossils

iadnding Cibieides umbonifer, Reussella sp.. Noteratalia sp.

Sedimeuts from 48-95 feet are of Upper Encene age,

F 34/54 to F 38/54.

stone.

PF 39/54 te F 41/54. Yellow coarse fossiliferqus calearcous sancdstona pass-

ine into limestone, Cibici‘les ambonifer occurs throughout, and from

71-82 feet is associated wilh species of Vaginulina, Spirillina, Cibicides and

Elphidiuin.

F 42/54. Yellow fossiliferims crvstulline limestone with echinoderm spines,

ostravodes and small foraminifera including Lazena spp., Angulogerina sp.,

Guroidina sp,, Cibicides ambonifer, C, pseudoungerianus, C. vortex, C.

lobatulus, C. spp., Retorbinellt sp. Planorbulina sp. Elphidiim sp,, Sher-

bornine sp.

VP 43/54. Dark grey carbonaceous sandy clay with pytite and a few fora-

minifets, including Reussella sp., Cibicides umbonifer, Cibivides sp, and

Elphidium. sp.

From 48-98 feet the boring passed through Focenre sedirnents.

F 44/54 to F AT/o4. F 140/54 to P 143/54, Grey white gritty kaolin

and sandy elay with massive kaolin at 190-207 feet.

F 144/54 to F 145/54. Grey mostly enarse clayey quarts sand.

Below 98 feet the formation is the haolinitic grits of PPermian are,

Red brown surface soil, grey-brown clay and sand-

HK OLA7/S4 to F 154/54. Red brown surface soil, caleareons cluys, fresh-

water oolitle limestone and brown sand.

F 153/54 to F 1s77a4.) Yellow calesreous sandstone with a few fora-

minilera including Cificides umbonifer.

YT 158/34. Ferraginous sandy clay with an assemblage of small foramini-

fora, including Bolicinupsts crespinae, Angulogerina spp., Urifartna hradyi,

Rerssella. sp., Cibicides umbonifer, Cibicides ef. fet gens, Cibicides spp.,

Stomatarbina cancentrica, Patelling ef. corrugata, Globiverma sp., Gimbelina

sp.. Kiphicium sp., Nonion sp,

F 159/54, Dark wey gritiy carbonaceous clay with dark grey nodules,

carbonaceous matter, pyrite, Himonite and a sinall foraminiferal assombluge

with Angulogerine sp., Reussella sp, Cibicides umbonifer, Cibicides spp.

Globiverine sp.. Gtimbelina sp.. Alahamina sp.

Eocene sediments vecur between GS and 95 feet.

¥ 160/54, Grey avitty clay with angular quartz wrains, linonile and pyrite,

2Permian,

SUBSURFACE STRATICRAPHY OF THE MARALINGA AREA 57

Bore 35.

0- 43 feet

43- 62 fect

62- 78 feet

78- 87 fect

87- 96 fuel

MH-119 Foot

119-140 feet

Bore 6.

0-451 feet

A5LASL teet

5351-583 feet

583-743 fect

Bore 7.

0- 98 feet

98-303 feet

303-323. fect

323-390 feet

390-408. feet

4082435 Feet

435-520 feet

520-527 feet

527-540 feot

540-567 Feat

B67-595 feet

395-740 feet

T40-1721 ft.

1721-17246"

Bore: 8.

O- 90 feet

90-324 feet

324-308 feet

F 120/54 to F 127/54, Red brown surface sand and clay, passing down-

wards into fine light brown and pale yellow sand,

F 128/54 to F 129/54. Fine yellow calcareous micaceous sand with broken

echinoderm. spines and Nuculana from 53-62 fect.

Yellow fossiliferous caleyrenite with bryozoul fragments, echinoderm spines

and Cibicides spp.

F 131/54 to F (33/54. Yellow sandy fossiliferous culesrenite with an

assemblage of small foraminifera including Lege spp., Vaginulina ef.

putens, Guttulina sp., Trifarina sp., Angulogerina sp,, Cibicides vortex,

Cihicides’ umbonifer, Cibicides spp. Alabamina sp., Planorbulina sp.,

Gyroidina sp. Astrononion sp., Sherbornina sp., Heranallenia pusilla,

Fo134/54 ty F 195/54. Dark grey gritty clay with dark grey aggregates

deserihed by the Petrology Section as heing composed of quartz, eryplo-

crystalline calcium carbonate, alteration products of iron minerals, ‘with

pyrite, carbonaceous und clay material, mica in small amount. <A small

assemblage of foraminifera includes Lagena sp.. Angulogerina spp, Tri-

farina sp,, Reussella sp.. Cibtvides vortex, Cibicides tumbonifer, Cibicides

spp., Alahbwmina sp., Nonion spp.

F 136/44, Pale grey sand, with rifarina, Angulogerina, Cibicides umbani-

fer, Nonion sp.

From 33 to 119 feet the boring passed through the Fucene,

F 137/54 to F 139/54, Grey-white micaceous kaolinitic sandstone with

abundant muscovite Makes, pytile and grey avgregates of carbonaceous

inatter in sand.

These are the kaolinitic grits of PPermian age.

This: bore was examined in the Petrology Section and details of the

heavy mineral assemblages and differentiation of the sediments are con-

tained in Petrological Laboratary Report No. 5954.

F 55/54 to F 92/54, Post-Eocenu sands, Celestite was reported by the

Petrulugy Section as characterizing the interval from 364-394 feet,

TY 09/54 to F 100/54. Grey carbouaceous pyritie clay and silty sands

with pyritized shell frarments including Nucuane.

These are of Eocene age.

Samples F 101/54 to F 106/54, Grey kaolinitie and pyritic sands, ?Permian,

F 107/54 to F L984, Grey partly indurated anfossiliforuus sandstones

with abandant pyrite and siderite.

Present information permits correlation of this formation with rocks of

the Marinoan Series.

Red and yellow clayey sand,

Cream sand, mostly fine.

Yellow and pink fine sand.

Finu eream sand,

Pink medium sane,

Cream and yellow roedium sand,

Fine: pink sand,

Pink sand and ironstone—aterite.

Dark gray black pyritic and carbonaceous sand,

Fine, dark grey carbonaceous silty sand with fine, angular to subangular

quartz grains, pyrite, biotite,

Grey-white kaolinized sandsteme and clay (?Permian).

Green pyritic siltstone interhedded with sandstone and conglomerate,

Chovolate and brown siltstone: and shale.

Below 959 fect the formation belongs to the Marinion Series.

Diorite, believed to be basement.

Red-brown clayey sand and grit.

Tine eream, grey and pink sand.

Reddish and yellow saricl.

398-419 feet

419-425 feet

425-463 feet

465-492 feet

492-591 feet

591-617 feet

617-674 feet

674-691 feet

691-800. feet

Bore 9.

O- 80 feet

80-373 feet

373-395 feet

395-470

470-493

493-580

380-700

feet

Bore 10.

Q- 59

59-273

273-454.

454-484

484-505

feet

505-587

587-605

603-786

786-900

feet

Bore ll.

foot

feet

feel

feet

0-115

115-275

275-325

525-406

406-425

425-409

feet

469-552

552-565

Bore 12,

()- 85

85-325

323-440

440444

444-493

493-605 Feet

603-875 fout

875-03 feet

feet

N. I. LUDBROOK

Red-brown sand and clay.

Dark red silicified ferruginous sandstone—laterite.

Red-brown and pink sand with ferruginous quartz pebbles ? from Jaterite.

Dark grey bluck carbonaceous silty sand with pyritized shell fragments in-

eliding Nuculana sp. and pyritized bryozoa imeluding Gellaria sp., of

Eocene age.

Grey clayey quartz grit and kaolinized gritty silt with pebbles and flat

boulders between 571-591 feet. (?Penmian).

Kine brown sandstone and siltstone,

Chocolate siltstone.

Brown sandstone,

Choeolate shale.

Sediments below 591 feet are believed to be Upper Proterozoic

( Marinoan ),

Red clayey sand.

Fine cream sand with red sand at 245-250,

Red-brown clay with conglomerate at base, probably lateritized.

silts and sands,

Grey kaolinized sandstone and gritty clay (?Permian).

Chocolate und green siltstone,

Grey-bnff and brown silty sandstone.

Chocolate shale or siltstone,

Eocene

Maitly red-brown sand and clayey sand,

Fine white and cream, sand,

Yellow, white and pink sund.

Red and pinks sand, ferruginous sandstone (? laterite) at 476 feet.

Dark grey carbonaceous pyritic silts and sand with numerous pyritized

shell fragments, including “Jurrttella aldingae”, Dentalium sp. and Nuculana

sp.

Crey pyritic kaolinitic sands and wravel with abundant amuseovite, (?Per

mian. )

Green grilly siltstone.

Greenish grey silty sandstoue and shale (Upper Proterozoie—Marinoin ),

Sandy chocolate shale.

Red clayey sand.

Fine ercam sand.

Red and yellow sand.

Bull and brown sand,

Brown sandstone and conglomerate.

Dark grey pyritic carbonaceous silts arid. silty sand with fine angular quartz

grains, a few large subrounded gvrains and large irregular pyrite nodules.

Lignified wood from 437-462 fect.

Grey-white kaolinized grits and clay (2Permian).

Grey-brown sindstone — Upper Proterozoic.

Red clayey sand.

Fine buff, cream and grey-white sand.

Pink, yellow and brown sand. Laterite ut 440 feet.

Ferruginized grey sandy arid carbonaceons silt, with rounded opaleseent

quartz and pyritized shell fragments of Hocene ave,

Chocolate siltstone with aw little green siltstone and white sandstune bars.

Cliocolate and blue-green shale interbedded with brown san¢lstone.

Brown sandstone.

Chocolate shale.

No kaolinized grits were present in this bore, in which the paralic Eocene

rests directly on Upper Proterozoic.

SUBSURFACE STRATIGRAPHY OF 'THE MARALINGA AREA

Bore 13.

0- 50 feet

50-363 feet

363-438 feet

438-456 feet

456-583 fect

583-645 feet

645-900 feet

Bore 14,

0- 68 feet

68-202 feet

Bore 15.

0-114 foet

114-126 feet

126-402 feet

Bore 16.

0- 78 feet

7T8- 87 fect

87-227 feet

Bore 17.

0- 80 fret

80-103, feet

103-220 feet

Mostly brick red clayey sand and. kunkur.

Mostly finc cream passing to grey-buff sand with occasional bluish. opalescent

quartz grains,

Pinkish-buff, yellow and red sand and clayey sand,

Dark grey-brown carbonaceous clay and silty sand, with pyrite of Eocene

age.

Brcaut and light blue-grey clayey sand and prit to pebble size.

pebbles at 550-556 feet (?Auvio-glacial Permian).

Chocolate and blue shale and sandstone (Upper Prolerozaic),

Chocolate shale.

Facetted

Red brown sand and clayey sand.

Chocolate and blue-vrey siltstones and shales and brown sandstones (Upper

Proterozoic).

Dark red sands and clayey sand.

Yellowish-brown sticky gritty clay with apd grains black carbonaceous

and pyritic aggregates, shale fragments, « age is uncertain, but the black

aggregates may représent weathering or reworking of the Eocene paralic

clays.

Greenish grey and chocolate siltstories and sandstones (Upper Proterozoic),

Red and yellow terrestrial sands,

Yellaw-brown clay of uncertain age.

Blue and chocolate siltstones and sandstones.

Red brown clayey sand and kimkar.

White sandstone — age uncletermined.

Red brown and white siltstone, chocolate, brown and green shale and

dolomite.

STRUCTURE

Drilling of the Maralinga area has firmly established the northern margin

of the Eucla Basin.

Between Bore 16 and Bore 12 Proterozoic bedrock comes

to within 68 feet of the surface. To the south it falls away under the sediments

of the Eucla Basin, and to the north it forms an apparently fairly even foor

tu the small basin filled with the PPermian kaolinitic grits and Eocene carbona-

ceous sands and clays and sandy limestone.

So far as can be deduced from bore sludges, the rocks appear to be flat-

lying and to have been virtually undisturbed since deposition.

RUPFERENCE

Barme, B, E., 1957. Upper Palaeozoie microfloras in sediments from the Lake Phillipson

Bore, South Austraha. Aust, J, Sei,, 20, pp. 61-62.

DETERMINATION OF THE CRUSTAL THICKNESS OF THE EARTH IN

THE GENERAL REGION OF ADELAIDE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY I. A. MUMME

Summary

From the average gravity value for a large number of absolute gravity stations located in the region

of Adelaide, the average Bouguer anomaly obtained was - 11-2 milligals. From this value the

crustal thickness of the earth in this region has been calculated to be 33 kilometres.

DETERMINATION OF THE CRUSTAL THICKNESS OF THY,

EARTH IN TITE GENERAL REGION OF ADELAIDE,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by L.A. Munenrr

|Read 14 July 1960]

SUMMARY

From the average gravity value for a lurge mumber of absolute gravity

stations Ioeated in the region of Adelaide, the average Bouguer anomaly obtained

was.-- 11-3 milligals, rom this yalue the crustul thickness of the curth in this

revion has been calculated to he 33 kilamvtres,

World-wide geophysical investigations show that there is a regular rela-

tionship between the crustal structure, density, clevations of the continents, and

the related gravity anomalies. Such equations were applicd to the Adelaide

region where the writer carried out bath elevation and absolute gravity measure-

ments,

Geophysical work has shown that the earth’s crust floats on a vitreous sub-

stration referred to ag the mantle. The discontinuity between the outer crust

and the mantle rocks is a zone of seismological discontinnities and is called the

Mohorovicic Discontinuity, Seismological information snggests that the mantle

(which is the zone beneath the Moborovivie Disvontinuity) has a constant

density of 3-32 grammes per ce., and the mean crustal density increases from

a minimum value below the ocean of 2-6 grammes per ce., to 3-08 grammes

per ce. beneath the high plateaus and mountains.

In spite of the fact that geophysical work shows that the earth’s outer crust

is the region of the greatest density variations, nevertheless, regional isostatic

balance ocenrs everywhere on the carth’s surface, and consequently a regular

relationship between crustal structuce, density, elevations of continents and

Whe related gravity anomalies occurs,

In obtaining an average Bouguer grayity Anomaly for the Adelaide Region,

the writer determined um average gravity value for a large number of absolute

gravity stations located in the region with a Carter gravimeter.

~ ‘These absolute gravity values are based on an absolute gravity value of

979-7237 gals for the absolute gravity station located at the new Adelaide

Qbservatory, The average Bouguer Anomaly value obtained was — 11:2

milligals.

Hlevations for these stations were obtained by tieing the stations, read

with the gravinmieter, into railway beuch-marks by optical and micro-barometric

measurements. The average clevation was 320. metres.

The Bouguer gravity Anomalies were computed for the gravity stations by

subtracting the theorelcal gravity values for the gravity stations frum the:

fetid observed gravily values by applying the 1930 International Gravity

Formula,

DETERMINATION OF THR Crustar Trickxess 1x THE ARpA InvesricaTren

(1) Applying Andreey’s formula, HW = 0-1 Ae@4 30, where H is the crustal

thickness in Kilometres. and Ag is the Bouguer Anomaly, we obtain a value

of 29 kilometres,

Trans. Roy, Soc. 3, Aust. (1961). Vol. 84,

62 I. A. MUMMIt

(2) Applying Woolard’s equation relating elevation and depth to the Mohoro-

vicic Discontinuity, we obtain a value of 34 kilometres.

(3) Applying Woolard’s equation relating gravity anomaly and depth to the

Mohorovicie Discontinuity, we obtain a valuc of 32 kilometres. (From

the relationship graphically represented in the journal of geophysical re-

search, Vol, 64 (1959), )

(4) Applying equation relating elevation and crustal thickness used by the

Russian and Chinese Seismologists, 11= 33 tanh, (0-38 Ah—0Q-18) + 38,

where H is the crustal thickness and /\h is the elevation, we obtain a value

of 35 kilometres.

(5) Applying equation relating gravity Anomaly and crustal thickness used by

the Russian and Chinese Seismologists, H = 35(1 + tanh 0:0037 Ag), where

H is the crustal thickness and /\g is the gravity anomaly, we obtain a

value of 36 kilometres,

(6) Applying Ieiskanen’s and Vening Meineszs formula, namely,

ToT +4 45h +h,

where Te is the normal thickness of the earth's crust at the place of eleva-

tion h, T is the normal thickness of the earth’s crust, and h is the elevation

of the area where the crusial thickness is Tce, we obtain a value of 32

kilometres.

Summurising these resulls, we have:

Crustal Thickness Equation Applied.

(1) 29 kilometres - Andreev’s equation.

(2) 34 kilometres - Woolard’s elevation method.

(3) 32 kilometres - Woolard’s gravity metliod.

(4) 36 kilometres - Russian and Chinese gravity equation.

(5) 35 kilometres - Russian and Chinese elevation equation.

(6) 32 kilometres - Heiskanen and Vening Meinesz equation.

Average 33 kilometres,

An avernge value of 33 kilometres for the crustal thickness in this area is

accepted from an analysis of the above results,

REFERENCRS

Anprery, B. A., 1958. Gravity Anomalies and crustal thickness of continental resions.

C.K, Acad, Sei., UB.S.S., EL, pp. 255-256.

Anprrev, B, A, 1959. Relation between structura) relief and gravity anomalies for the case

of some density Jayer boundaries, ©.R. Acad, Sci., TRSS., 124, pp, 311-313.

Huiskanen, W, A., aud Ventnc Mernvesz, P. A., 1958. ‘The earth and its gravity feld.

McGraw-Hill, New York.

Winson, J. T., 1959, Geophysical institutes of the U.S:S.R. Trans. . . . Am. Geophys.

Union, 40, pp. 3-24.

Wooranp, G. P., 1943. ‘Traneontinental gravitational and magnetic profile of North America

and the relation to geologic structures. Bull, geal. Soe. Amer., 54, pp. 746-790.

Woo.ano, G. P., 1954. Crustal stractitre beneath Atlantic Islands. Prac. Ray, Soe, London,

A. 232, pp. 361-387.

Woonann, G. P., 1959, Crustal structure. ‘lhe Journal of Geophysival Research, Vol. 64,

Na. 10,

Muar, T. A. 19600 Alsahite gravity detennimations on the Sunimits of a number of

prominent Hills in the Mount Lofty Ranges. ‘Trans, Row, Soc. §. Aust, 88, pp, 119-121.

LARVAL TREMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN FRESH-WATER

MOLLUSCS

BY D. E. SYMON

Summary

Cercaria velesunionis, a gasterostome, is described from the fresh-water mussel, Velesunio

ambiguus. (It is possible, but is not considered likely, that Aluthyria jacksoni can also serve as

host.) It is not a common parasite, having been found in only 16 of 1818 mussels examined.

It has a different excretory formula, 2 { (2 + 2) 4- (2 +2) 1, from gasterostome cercariae for which

the excretory formula has been described. Since it cannot be compared fully with cercariae for

which the excretory formula is not known, it is assigned to a new species. The cercaria has been

found, experimentally, to encyst in the fish Gambusia affinis, Carassius auratus, Oryzias latipes and

Galaxias sp. Adult gasterostomes have never been identified from fresh-water fish examined in this

department. These are Maccullochella macquariensis, Plectroplites ambiguus, Pseudaphritis urvillii,

Tandanus tandanus, Therapon bidyana, Fluvialosa richardsoni and Macquaria australasica.

Immature gasterostomes, probably of the same species as Cercaria velesunionis, were found in four

Percalates colonorum. Until the adult trematode is found, Cercaria velesunionis cannot be assigned

to a genus.

LARVAL TREMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN FRESH-WATER

MOLLUSCS

Part XV

Cercaria velesunionis nu. sp,

by L, Mavevine Ancri*

[Read 8 September 1960]

SUMMARY

Cervaria velesunianis, a fastercstonie, is. deseribed fram the fresh-water

mussel, Velesunio ambiguus. (It is possible, but is uot considered likely, that

Alathyria jacksani can also serve as host.) Tt is nota commion parasite, having

been found in only 16 of I8L8 anussels examined.

It has a different exerctory formula, 2{ (2-2) + (2+ 2))}, from gastero-

stome corcariae for which the exeretory furnmla has been deseribed, Since

it cannot be compared fully with cereariae for which the exerctary formula is

not known, it is assizned to a new species.

‘The cerearia has been found, experimentally, to enceyst in the fish Gambresia

affintis, Carassius auratus, Oryzias latipes aud Galaxias sp,

Adult gasterostomes have never heen identified from fresh-water fish

examined in this department. These are Maceullochella mdequariensis, Pleetro-

plites ambiguus, Pseudaphritis urvillii, Tondenus tandanus, Therapon bidyena,

Fluvialusa richarisonit and Macquarie uusiralasica,

Tuimature yasterostames, probably of they same spevies as Cercaria reles-

dnionis, were found in font Percalutes colonorim.

Until the adult tematode is found, Cercaria célesuniomis cannot be as-

signed to a genus.

Type material has heen deposited in the South Australian Museum.

Fielder, in « paper read before the Field Naturalists’ Club of Victoria on

May 10th, 1896, recorded as “the most interesting find of the month”, “curiously

modified fluke embryos in the fresh-water mussel (Unio australis)’, From

Fielder’s short description, without figures, these were obviously gasterostome

cercariac, and it would seem likely that it is the first record of Cercaria veles-

unionis, which is described in this paper. J know of no other records of cercariac

from fresh-water mussels in Australia. MeMichael and Tiseock (1958) list

Unio australis liam., of Smith, 1881, as a synonym of Velesunio ambiguus;

Unio australis Lamarck, 1819, they assign to the genus Hyridella, subgenus

Hyridella,

In this paper is given a description of the sporoeyst, cércaria, cyst and

metacercaria of G. velesunionis. Only immature adults have been obtained,

however. Mature adults could not be obtuined with attempted infections of

three Carassius turattes.

Since June, 1937, vasterostome corvariae lye been identified in 16 of 1818

fresh-water mussels collected in the River Murray between Tailem Bend and

Morgan. They have been found on only seven occasions, in 1 of 3, 2 of 6, 2 of

16, 5 of 31 and 2 of 106 mussels from Tailem Bend, in 3 of 95 from Morgan,

and in 1 of 70 from Teal Flat.

* Department of Zoology, University of Adelaide,

Trans, Roy. Sot. 8. Aust, (1961), Vol. 54.

G4 L, MADELINE ANGEL

Mussels from the River Murray were always identified as Hyridella australis

(Lamarck). Towever, in 1958, McMichael and Hiscock published a “Mono-

graph of the fresh-water mussels (Mollusca: Pelecypoda) of the Australian

region”, According to this, there are two species of mussel in the Tailem Bend-

Morgan streteh of the Murray, Velesunio ambiguus (Philippi) and Alathyria

jecksoni Tredale. Of the sixteen infected mussels collected. ten are still avail-

uble and are now identified as Velesunio ambiguus, My impression is that

probably no Alathyria jacksani (fully grown shells of which are biyger and

heavier than thase of Velesunia anetidatein) have been found infected, The

matter. however, must remain in some douht. In the most recent collection, of

70 iussels from Teal Flat, only ubout 15 were V. ambiguus, but it was from

these Ehat the single infection was found.

The cercariae tend to lie at the hettam of the dish in which the mussel is

isulated. Here, as observed with a dissecting microscupe, they contract and

expand the body, and may extend the furcae tu great lengths and then contract

them to become quite short. (These movements are not necessarily syn-

chronised,) Tf the water in a beaker contaimng the cercariac is disturbed

slightly, they can just be seen hanging suspended in the water by the twa

outstretched furcac. The body oeensionally cuntraets, and, not always at the

sanic time, one or both fureae contract also, but the cereariae do not change

their position in the water by this meuns, and have never been seen to swim.

The following measurements were made an 20 cereariae whieh had Tee

fixed by adding an equal volume of boiling 10 p.c, formalin to the water con-

taiting them, Body length 142-222 » (average 175 yj; wreatest width of body

55-97 pw (average 70 p); length of anterior organ 37-71 « (average 50 p); breadth

of anterior organ 25-43 p» (average 31 y.); width of tail stem (i.e. Geamsverse

diameter) 84-116 » (average 100»); depth of tail stem (vertical measurement )

41-70 w (average 45»). The fureae are too coiled in formalinised specimens

fi permit-of measurement, In ove living specimen the fureae were drawn out

in a straight line by a current of water, and at their greatest length meysured

2+4 mim.

The preceding measurements were taken from cercariae collected in Jate

1959 and carly 1960. A collection made ut Morgan in February 1956 frum

thvee mussels comprises oercariae noticeably larger. Measurements of 20 af

these fixed in the same way as the later infections are: budy lencth 175-350 p

(averaze 300 x); groutust width of body 72-115 » (average 91 j.): width of tail

stem 58-130 » (average 84 «), depth of tail stem 44-63 2 faverage 41 ,).

Although the <lifference in size probably has ne ceil significance. the descrip-

tion is base! on vercariue from the 1959-1960 collections; in a Few instiurices,

inforination about the 1956 material has been inchided, but where this is so

the date is stated.

The body of the cerearia is set with rows of Ane spines which are quite

prominent anteriorly but are very inconspicuous towards the: posterior end of

the animal, The anterior organ is quite well-developed) its cavity is compara:

tively small, elongated in the antero-posterior axis, and is lined with closelv-set

spines, which, though small, are much longer than those on the sarface of the

hedy. This region is more or less eyersible, and when everted gives the

uppearanee of a small spine-covered snout protruding anteriorly, In one favour-

able specimen five pairs of gland cells were seen in the anterior organ (Fig, 1).

In arrangement these resembled those fared for Cerearla sciatl by Woodhead

(1936, plate LIX, fig. 1), with the exception that they did not rest on the

bascinent membrane of the organ, but were situated more anteriorly. The ducts

LARVAL TREMATODES FROM FRESH-WATER MOLLUSCS tits)

ppened into the inverted part of the organ, which in this region appeared in

be divided in two as tn Woudhead’s. figure,

The mouth opens behind the middle of the body, nearly as fav back as the

level of the posterior third. Where is a large muscular pharynx, an oesophagus,

and a gut, which varies in shape fom spherical lo oval.

Gland cells scattered throughout the body slow up after staining with

neutral red. ‘They do not appear to huye any reeognisuble arrangement, Iut

the ducts pass forward anteriorly.

The flame cell formula is 2((2+2) +(2+2)}. The most. posterior pair

of flame cells lies near the hind ewd of the body, and in much flattened speci-

mens the last flame cell muy appear to lie in the tail stenv itself. The bladder

is t-shaped; the anterior and posterior collecting tubes join the main excretory

tube at the level of the mouth, and at the point of their union is a distinct

dilatalion of the tube (Fig. 1}. The positions of the Hame cells vary slightly in

the cervariae examined, prohably duc to the relative coumpression of the yarieuts

parts, ‘The bladder opens at the posterior end of the body.

The buse of the tail has the appearance of a cushion which cauusists of tae

regiony, ‘The upper segment is relatively elear and contains an extension uf

the bladder, which contracts at tines so that the cavity disappears completely.

The evtoplasm al the lower segment is filled with fatty globules. Some part (if

the hase of the tail has a sticky secretion, for the animal can attach itself to a

wluss surface by this region. In one specimen, in which the body was quite

free, the animal was attached by the base of the tail; it was impossible to dis-

lodge it with currents of water directed from a fine pipette. and needles were

required to free it, Dawes (1946, p. 456) stated that, according to Wuuder

(1924), the “rudimentary tail” of Bucephalus poalynerphus secreted a viscid

read Which served to fasten the cercaria to the bodv of the fish intermertiute

wis,

The fureas leave the outer margins of the upper segment of the hase uf the

tail, They, too, ave sticky; they become attached to fine needles used in handling

the cercaria, and tend to break if pulled, rather than become detached. Even

in formalinised cereariae, the furcue are sticky; it is difficult to Gear them of

any débris adhering and at the same time prevent them from breaking with

any traction. ’

Woodhead (1936) made tests with live fish and stated that, with Cercuria

seioti, C. basi and C, argi, the long furcae became entangled on the edge ul 4

fin, and the tail stem functioned as a holding organ by hecoming firmly attached,

with the posterior portion in contact with the scales of the fish.

The furcae have extraordinary powers of extension, When contracted, they

may he littke more than the Jength of the body (Fiz. 3), but when extended

may he ten times as long. The contracted condition is not, apparently, the

normal one; when the animal is suspended in water the furcae are elongated

most vf the time, and in formalinised material contracted furcae are nat seen.

Tor Speorocysy

The sporocysts furm a thick mass in the digestive gland, and are scattered

through the region of the gonad and heart. They branch, apparently very freely,

but it is difficult to obtain a sperocyst that one is sure is complete. Formalinised

material is brittle and breaks easily, and it is havd to dissect out living sporo-

eysts intact, Living sporocysts emtain many cercariae, the furcae of which may

protrude from the broken ends of the sporocyst to a great distance. No flame

cells were seen in the sporicyst walls.

L. MADELINE ANGEL

——— 0:5mm

0.1mm

0-2 mm

Figs. 1-3, 5, 6. Cercaria velesunionis; 1, compressed; 2, 3, 5, in different attitudes;

6, showing gut. Fig. 4. Sporocyst, Hig, 7. Gyst. Fig. 8 Young gasterustome from

Murray Perch. Balsarn mount. Figs, 9-13. Metacercaria of C. ¢elesunionis; 9, 11, 13,

different aspects: 10, compressed; 12, alimentary canal from lateral view, showing lip,

Fig, 8 is to the same scale as Fig. 12. Figs, 2, 7, 11 are to the same seale as Fig. 5.

Figs. 4, 9, 10 are sketches,

b, extretory bladder; c, cirrus sac; e, exerctory pore; g, gut; 1, lip; p, pharynx;

u, uterus; r, reproductive aperture.

LARVAL TREMATODES FROM FRESH-WATER MOLELUSGS 67

Tar Gysr

The cercariae have been found, experimentally, to eneyst iv the aquarium

fish Gambusia affinis, Carassing auratus, Oryzias latipes and the native fish

Galaxias sp, Gasterostome cysts were found as 2 natural infection in Uiree

Carassius auratus from Tailem Bend in 1937; these appear to be the same as the

evsts Obtained experimentally.

The cysts muy be found in great abundance in the infected fish. Jn 195R,

when detailed dissections were mude, they were more numerous in the Jwad

region than elsewhere in the body. In one fish 103 cysts. were recovered from

the head region and only four in the rest of the body. In another there weir

25 in the head region; 9 in the tail and 20 in the tissue between the fin rays ol

other fins. However. in heavily infected fish (1959-1960) there were literally

hundreds of cysts im the tail region, (The rest of the bady was nat dissected,

but was used in feeding experiments to try to find the adult stage.)

The cyst walls are thin und the metacercariae so active that the evsts con-

tinually change shape. from oval to circular, to pear-shaped, ete, The ayst wall

breaks extremely readily, and excystment takes place spontaneously shortly

after the Ussucs of the host are dissected apart. A few honrs afterwards it is

rare to find even one intact eyst, by order to collect sufficient evsts for measur

ing, it was found ueveessarv Lo transfer them into formalin as soon as they were

dissected out. (Table 1.)

THE Mrracnrcarta

Mectacercariac dissected inti 0°65 p.c. suline live for several days at 4° C.,

aud up to bwenty-four hours at room temperature.

Two fish, Gambusia affinis, were infected four and eight weeks respectively

hefore they were killed; the metacercariae from these were accidentally mixed,

but could be separated into two distinct ranges at size. The smaller size is

presumed to comprise the younger metacercariae (see Table L for measurements

of the twe groups ).

The body is spined all over; the spines are relatively Targe and obvicnts. in

the anterior half of the body, but become smaller and are very inconspieuous

posteriorly, After staining with methylene blue, granular subenticular cells

of irregular shape can be seen (though they do not take up the stain) scattered

throughout the body; no nuclei are visible. After neutral red a mass of lind

cells shows up behind the anterior sucker. Individually, these cells are nut very

distinctly defined, but the area as a whole is very definite (Fig. 10). Tt extends

behind the auterior sucker to a distance roughly equal to the length of the

suckee.

The anterioy organ has inereascd greatly in size and has much more the

appewance ol a normal sucker than was the case in the cercaria. It has na

lahes or appenduges.

The mouth opens into a muscular pharynx which is followed by a distinct

oesophagus: this is quite contractile, and opens inte dhe suctlike got. From the

lateral view, i. definite lip on the anterior border of the mouth is seen (Fig. 12).

The gut, which ocaupies, tongily, the middle of the body, i generdly rounded,

but sometimes elongated. It often shows as u conspicuous yellow mass because

of its bright vellow contents, which consist of a somewhat viscous liquid in

which are refractile globules of various sizes. The mass of the gut contents

stains deeply with neutral red.

The fame cell formula is the same as in the cercaria. The excretory bladder

is vlongated: it extends anteriorly beyond the mouth, and posteriorly opers on

the end of the body close to the excretory pore, Very often it lies diagonally

ANGEL

MADELINE

£80- GFL EFE- | T aULIoA LS

le 1

£60- efl- ecg: I spauelype,a qwnsoudjos

, I = SAPNUILA |

(F) (F) (2) THESUG | WOT} SauiO}s

FRO: 2ga- 890: Let: Ste | T [LO poor

= == = ; -cepad Ul daira m0)

L80- FEO: S00" 9ST- eon. | I SPOUAPeL | Sqpripe Bano y

(2) (9) (ov) (9¢61)

e90- |Gf0-—OFD:| GEO |290°—L2E0+} R860. J0zT-—OR80+ BOL) —F2L0- OT L-9 | SUATT LAC 10 WW

am - = -- ee |;

GFO- |e90-—280-) Leo. |620:—OFO-} OBO- [ROL —FLO- FIT-—O80+] GST: |2Fa-—OET-| @REe- jer: —HO8e! OT é SUIALT | RlvoraoNya yy

| 26T: J€06-—91T:| OBE: Por: — FeR- 03 g uM] TT | BROMO RPTL

OL Fl0-—Te8T+} Gz. |G1&-—cte. be ¥ THHuOy UT elrolaavyayy

naa. [AFe-—O0G+| S1L- [IPS eee! OT OT of dnjmyeunoy wy (946T) 149

O8L- jasa-—GPT:| ose. |Ree-—112-| 02 (0961-6861)

uTlpRMmgoy oy JAND,

mizaire “THE “THU j "UIUI “UL “Ur “TUL merase “ain “Wt “TOIT “UO pod useatt Syada

YPRoig, Wyss T TApraay Tso T Yprargy WaT

XUMAIBILT Ueno 1o;ajUy

ES ee ee eee

“PAINSOUT SUESIO JO TIQUINU OY} oyva!PUL S]TAULAINSEAUL BYy ALOTA SJOYowIq Ut WAAIH sIaqIUN.AT “YOK

‘SHMOPUNSIPIA DisvI4D JO SILpu Aunods pure aviweo4»laepayy

‘L aTAVE

LARVAL TREMATODES FROM FRESA-WATER MOLLUSCS La]

across the body (Fig. 11). In frestily dissected specimens it is filled with dark

exeretory granules, tiny to small in size, some of them compound. ‘These are

extruded readily through the excretory pore.

The anlagen of the reproductive organs are fairly well defined (Fig. 10).

There are three small rounded masses of cells which are evidently ovary and

testes, “The ovary is smaller than the others, and lies slightly anterior to the

anterior testis; from it a ribbon of cells which is presumably to become the

uterus, winds backwards between the diagonally placed testes, and then runs

wlongside the cirrus sac. which is a large organ lying to the side of the bladder

at the posterior end of the body. The genital pore opens at the posterior end

of the Vody. close to the exeretory pore, Vasa defereritin are nol seen, nor is

there any trace of vitellurii,

TuR Apu

A luboratory-raised carp, Carassius auratus, was ted aver a period of five

weeks with 15 Gambusia affinis and one small carp, all of which had been ex-

posed ty infection with Cercaria velesumioniy., Same ot these small fish were

parlly dissected before being fed to the carp. and it is estimated that it was

probably given two or three thousand cysts. The carp was killed ve days after

the lust sinall fish had been fed to it, Two youny gasterostomes were recovered

(rom its. intestine, Although these had had at least five days (and could have

liad as such as five weeks) in the gut, they showed little diflerence from the

metucercaria of C, velesenionis. (See Table 1 for measurements.) The guts

of the two specimens rneasurced -068 x -068 mm. and +068 x +056 mm,

respectively.

Two mure carp were [ed with an unknown number of cysts; they were

killed 18 and 27 days respectively after the latest feeding. Neither yielded

gustorastomes on dissection, The failure to establish infections indicated thal

Carassius auratus is not a suitable host for the species.

Aduit gasterostomes Inive not been found in any fresh-water fish exanuied

in this department. These include 31 Murray eod (Maceullochella mac-

quariensis), 96 callop (Plectropliles ambiguus), 33° congolli (Pseudaphritis

urvillif), 52 catlish (Temdanus tandanus), LO Murray bream ( Therapen bidyana),

4 bony bream (Clucielosa richardsani) and 12 Macquarie perch (Afdeqyuaria

aestralasied ),

Immature gasterostomes, however, were found iu four of seven Australian

pereh, Perculates colonornm, taken from the River Murray at Swan Reavli ite

September 1937. (They have not been found in uine P. colonerum collected

from the River Murray since that time.) In size and general appearaney, and

in the presence of a lip, these young Hukes are very similar to the metacercariac

of Cercaria velesunionis. They are regarded as. belonging to this specics.

DISCUSSION

Cercaria velesunionis is regarded as a new species. It camot he identified

with cerearine which have been deseribed without details of the excretory

system, and it differs from other gasterostome cvercuriae in which the exerctory

aystem has been deserihed (C. elegany Woodhead, 1930: G. papillosus Wood-

lived, 1930; C. seloti Woodhead, 1936, G. argi Woodhead, 1936, and ©. busi

Woodhead, 1936) in having an excretory formula of 2{(2 1 2) + (21 2)),

Hopkins (1954) pointed out that io the taxonomy of Bueephalidae, the struc:

tuve of the excretory system hud not been given phylogenetic significance, The

excretory formula, 2((2-+ 2) + (2+2)}, was found in species of three different

genera, while four different tosmulae were found in one genus (Rhipidocotyle ),

70 L, MADELINE ANGEL

Hopkins was of the opinion (and many other workers must agree with him)

that no natural classification can be made without taking the excretory system

into consideration. The nature of the anterior attachment organ, however, has

been regarded as of great taxonomic importance in the Bucephalidae. In 1944,

Hopkins (p. 355) pointed ont that the cercariae of Bucephalus elegans Wood-

head, 1930, Rhipidocotyle papillosum \Woodhead, 1929, and R, septpapillata

Krull, 1934, the only bucephalids whose life cycles had been established by

experiment, did not show any signs of the papillae or hoods which distin-

guished the adults from the forms which Nicoll (1914) assigned to Bucephalopsis,

Sle stated thal, so far, there was no way of telling which genus of the Bucepha-

lidae a given cercaria belonged to, until the life eycle had been worked out by

experimental infection. To my knowledge, no life histories have been described

since Hopkins’ statement.

Until the adult form is found, it is not possible to assign Cercaria celesunionis

to a genus.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

I wish to acknowledge the help given by my nephew. Dr. R. H. Burnell,

in collecting mussels, and by Mr. T. D. Scott, of the South Australian Museum,

in identifying fish, I wish also to express my indebtedness to the late Professor

T. Harvey Johnston for records of the parasites of fresh-water fish dissected in

South Australia.

REFERENCES

Dawes, B., 1946, The Trematodi: with special reference to British and other European

forms. 644 pp. Cambridge (England),

Frevnoen, W., 1896. Intermediate hosts of fluke, Third note. Vivtorian Naturalist, 18 (2),

pp. 24-28.

Hopkins, $. H., 1954. The American species of trematode confused with Bicephalus (Buce-

phalopsis) haimeannus, Parasitology, 44, pp. 353-370,

Horxins, 5. IL, 1956. Two new trematotles from Louisiana, and the exuretory system of

Biicephalidae, Tr. Am. Mier, Sou., 75 (1), pp. 129-135,

MeMienarn, D. F., anc Hiscock, J, D., 1958. A monograph of the freshwater mussels

(Mollusca: Pelecypoda) of the Australian region, Aust, Jour. Marine and Vreshwater

Research, 9 (3), pp. 372-508.

Nicoun, W., 1914. The treniatode parasites of fishes from the Enghsh Channel. J. Marine

Biol. Ass. UK., ms. 10 (3), pp. 466-305.

WoopHeap, A, E., 1930. Life history stndics on the trematode family Bucephalidae Tl. Tr.

Am. Mier. Soc., 49 (1), pp. 1-17.

Woooueap, A. F,, 1936. <A study of the gasterostome: cercariac of the Muren River. Tr,

Am. Mier, Soc, 55 (4), pp. 465-476,

THE SPECIES OF OXALIS ESTABLISHED IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY D. E. SYMON

Summary

Eleven species of Oxalis established in South Australia are discussed and a key provided.

THE SPECIES OF OXALIS ESTABLISHED IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by D. E. SYMON*

[Read § September 1960]

SUMMARY

Kleven speuies of Oxalis established in South Australia are discussed. and a

key provided,

A recent attempt to identify plants of Oxalis growmg in South Anstralia

has shown that the treatment of the genus in the Flora of South Australia, Part 2:

484 (Black, 1948) is now inadequate.

The genus is a Jurge one with possibly 800 species. There are two main

centres of distribution each with large numbers of species, onc in South Africa

and one in South America. There are two ypecies native to Australia, O. leetea

Mook. in Victoria and ‘Tasmania, and OQ. cerniculata L, which is very variable

and is almost cosmupulitan, All other species have been introduced, usually as

garden plants, and some of these have later proven to he aggressive and have

ecome weeds. An carly catalogue of the plants grown in the Adelaide Botanic

Garden (Schoumburk, 1878) lists forty species and inchides nearly ull the specics

listed below. Similarly, the early catalogue of the plants in the Melbourne

Botanic Gardens (Guilfoyle, 1883) lists twenty-nine specics, but few species

are grown in cither Botanical Gardens today, nor ure more than three or four

species deliberately grown in domestic gardens.

The following species have been found in South Australia:

1. QO. articulata Savigny.

2, O, bowiei Lindl.

3. OQ. campressa 1.1.

4, O, corniculuta L, — Yellow Wood Sorrel.

5. O, corymbosa DC. — Pink Shamrock.

6. OQ. flaca L.

7. O, hirta L,— Hany Wood Sorrel,

8. O. incarnata. L.

9. Q. latifolia Kunth. — Large Leal Wood Sorrel.

10, QO. pes-eaprae L. — Soursob.

ll. O. purpurea Li -- One o'clock,

Vegetative reproduction is common in the genus, with the consequent estab-

lishment of numerous distinct clones to which specitic names have been freely

given. The selection and distribution of liorticultural variants which have later

become naturalized has also added to the difficulties of naming specimens

correctly,

The phenomenon of trimerphism is also common in the genus and. plants

with short-, mid- or long-styled flowers may oceur. As is usual in such plants,

pollen from the appropriate anther level of another flower is necded for satis-

factory seed setting, Im South Australia, seed is produced freely only in the

O. corniculata. complex. Seeding does oceur occasionally in O. pes-caprae, but

all other species depend on bulbil formation for their distribution. Because

* Waite Agricultural Research Institnte.

Trans. Roy. Soc. 5S, Aust, (1961), Vol, 84.

72 D. E, SYMON

vegetative propagation is sa common, large populations may consist almost

entirely of plants with a single style length, and within these populations seed

production is negligible. The fowers of all species are sensitive to weather

conditions, and only open widely under bright, mild conditions,

The species, O, bowiei, O. flava and O, hirta, ull flower early in their sea-

sonal development and the first two may flower whilst having only one or two

leaves: after this initial fowering there is continucd leaf production. The stem

of QO. hirta elongates and branches freely after Howering has finished.

Must species produce one or more tuberised roots below the bulb during

the growing period. These roots vary greatly in size and may be trom 1-40 em.

long and from 3-10 mm. thick according to the species. They collapse late in

the growing scason and at Jeast in some species their shrinkage results in pulling

a newly formed bulb along the channel formed in soil and so assists in distri-

buting the bulbs,

Despite the size of ihe genus and the importance of some of the species

as weeds, relatively few counts of chromosome mumbers are availabic, of the

eleven species discussed here only O. hirta, 20 = 30; O. corniculata, 2n = 24;

and Q. pes-eaprae (as cernua), 2n= 35, are listed by Darlington and Wylie

(1955). Jn view of the interesting situation in O. pes-caprae described hy Oram

(1956), further cytological studies on the aggressive weedy species. would be

interesting.

In the following account, where two measurcments are ¢iven separated by

the sign X, the first is to he understood as the length and the second the breadth.

Key to the Species of Oxalis Established in South Australia

1. No stem developed above or below ground, leaves radical and springing

directly from the bulb. Flowers pale or briglit pink.

2. New bulbils sessile, leaflets with rounded lobes broadest below the apex.

hirsute * sn als . O. carymbosa 5

la. Stem developed to ground level (when leaves basal) or above ground.

3. Stem usually developed to ground Jevel only, simple, the leaves

crowded at ifs apex.

4. Flowers solitury.

5. Leaflets 3, flowers white, pale. or deep pink .... O. purpurea LU

5a. Leaflets 2-7, flowers yellow - -— a QO, flaca 6

da. Flowers umbellate or cymose.

6. Peticles flattened, narrowly winged, with a prominent fringe

of hairs, leaves and petioles hairy, Howers yellow

O. compressa 3

6a. Petioles cylindrical,

. Stems woody, perennial, no bulbs formed _ QO. articulata 1

a. Stems succulent, annual, bulbs formed.

8. Flowers pink, leaflets often large, 10 3 x 6 em., finely glun-

dular pubescent ne uy s O, bowiei 2

Sa, Plowers yellow, Icaflets smatler, to 2 x 3 cm., almost

glabrous =... aso! gnc _. QO, pes-caprae 10

SPECIES OF OXALIS IN SOUTH AUSTRALLA Ta

3a, Stem usnally developed above ground, branched, with leaves along

its length,

9. Flowers yellow, no bulbs formed, stems often prostrate

on the ground and rooting at the nodes

O. corniculata 4

Sa. Flowers pale mauve or bright pink, bulbs formed, stems

spreading or erect,

10, Petioles very short 1-2 rmm., Howers bright pink,

bulbs formed below ground only ... O. hirta 7

10a. Petioles several em. long, flowers pale mauve, bulbs

formed in leaf axils ahove ground, and alsu under-

ground |. = ! _. O- inearnafa §

1, O. artieulata Savigny, 1798, in Lamarck, Encyl. Method, Bot., 4, 686,

Perennial, 10 bulbs formed, rhizome thick, almost woody and covered with

the sears of leaf bases, sparsely branched and marked by constrictions which

divide the rhizome into segments of varying Jength,

Leaves crowded at the apex of the stem, leaflets three, obeordate, pubescent,

up Lo 4um, broad, with many orange calli along the lower maryin, and sometimes

flushed purple helow. Petioles 10-20 em. long, pubescent with: appressed hairs.

Peduncles longer than the leaves, flowers many, corolla to 15 mm., bright

mauve pink or white in a contracted cyme with the appearance of an umbel

or with the cyme branches up to 5 em, long and variously developed in dilferent

clones. Mowering in spring and summer.

Occasionally grown as a garden plant and one colony has been reported

established in the field at Mouut Compass.

Native to temperate South America, the invalved syuonomy of this species

is discussed by Young (1958),

2. O. bowiet Lindl, Bot. Reg, XTX (1833) t. 1585.

Bulb long ovoid, tapered, somewhat curved. 1-4 em., tunic pale brown when

young, dark brown when old, producing up to three stout contractile routs

5x Jem. Stem thickened at the ground level, the leaves crowded at its apex.

Leaflets broadly obcordate. often large and up to 5 x 6 em., glabrous above

but densely pubescent below along the veins and leaf margins with short, erect,

glandular buirs. Petioles terete, to 10 em. finely and densely glandular pubescont.

Pedimeles 12-25 um, 3-10 dowered, bracts 1} cm. pedicels to 5 em. Corolla

bright pivuk 2-5 em. Flowering in winter and spring.

A native of South Africa that has heen lemg cultivated as a garden plaut and

it is still to be fonnd occasionally in gardens. Now established over 40 acres

near Gawler where it is reported to have spread rapidly im recent years. It has

dso been recorded at Laura, Angle Vale and Vietor Marbour in addition to

suburban vardetis,

3. O, compressa Lf. Supp. 1781.

Bulb ovoid, pointed, 1-2 x L em. with a brawn tunic, the outer bulb scales

somewhat woody and ribbed. During growth up to three tuberised contractile

roots are produced from the original bulb. Stem slender, but thickened at

ground Jeyel and not usually developed abave ground,

74 D. E. SYMON

Leaves numerous, crowded ut the apex of the stem. Leaflets three, broadly

cuneate obovate 1-2 x 1-3 em., hirsute below. the base of each leaflet sometimes

with brown markings. Petiole 3-20 cm. long, compressed and narrowly winged,

villous, dilated below the articulation,

Peduncles several, 5-20 cm. long. Flowers 2-6 in an umbel, calyx 5-7 mm,,

corolla yellow 2 em, long. Flowering Jone to Octaber.

Established at Roseworthy and Pt. Lincoln, but possibly overlooked else-

where due to its general similaritv to O. pes-eaprae.

4, 0, corniculata L. Sp. Pl. T (1753) 435.

Perennial, taproot thickened and at times almost woody, no bulbs produces.

Stems prostrate and rooting at the nodes or long slender and ascending, branched,

herbaceous.

Leaflets three, obvordate, 3-16 mm., with a deep sinus, pubescent, stipnles

small.

Pedunecles stendes, axillary, Lowers 1-5 in an umbel, corolla 4-10 mm., yellow,

pedicels uften refexed in fruit. Capsule angular evlindrical, pubescent, heaked

5-25 mm. Seeds reddish brown, compressed, transversely rugose.

All over the State, almost cosmopulitin, An extremely variable plant with

an involved synonymy of allied specics and their varieties (Young, 1955), Plants

believed ta be indigenous do not appear to root freely at the nodes and the

corolla may be relatively large up to 15 mm, Those found as weeds of gardens

usually have smaller flowers and root at the nodes. In lawns extremely small

plants may be found bearing solitary Howers. [t is the only Oxalis which pro-

duces seed freely in Sonth Australia. [t is a nuisance at times_as a weed of

pot plants and lawns, bnt it is not important as a weed in fields. The plant

erows actively whenever moisture is available aod flowers throughout the year,

5. O. corymbosa DC,, 1824, Prod., 1, 696. O. martiana Zuce,

Butbs elobose 2-20 mm.,, tunics brown, with slight vertical striations, the

original bulb producing a large number of sessile bulbils during the growing

season. Several short, thick, conical, contractile roots tay be formed at the

base of the parent bulb.

Plant stemless, the leaves arising directly from the bulh, Leaves numerous,

petioles weak and thin below ground, to 15 em., sparsely hirsute. Leaflets three,

roundish with a deep narrow indentation at the apex of the rounded lobes,

sparsely hairy below on the veins and Jeaf margin which bears sinall reddish calli,

Pediuncles up to 30 em, bearing flowers in a contracted cyme. Corolla

purplish pink 15-20 mm. Flowering in spring and summer,

Native to South America. It is a troublesome weed in sub-tropical areas

and in the eastern States of Australia. In South Australia it is restricted to

suburban gardens. It is mainly summer growing but dues retain some foliage

during the winter. It is 4 prolific producer of bulbils, and one pot-grown bulb

has produced 110 bulbils during ane summer. These may be quite small snd

are yirtnally impossible to pick out of the soil, and the often ineffectnal efforts

at removal assist in spreading the plant.

Barossa intake weir J, B. Cleland, Adelaide suburhs.

6, Q, flava L. Sp. Pl. (1733) 438.

Bulb ovoid 1-3 em. long with a thin light brown tunic, young bulbs with a

pinkish brown tunic are abnost globular, The tuberised contractile root is Jong,

SPECIES OF OXALIS IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA 75

40 cm., and slender 3-4 mm. Stem slender underground but thickened at

ground level,

Leaves, 1-10, petioles 2-10 cm, long, dilated below the articulation, glabrous.

Leaflets 4-7 sessile, spreading palmately, linear oblong 30 x 3-3 mm.

Peduncles one flowered, about the same length as the leaves, with two

bracts below the calyx, Corolla yellow 2 em, long and the Howers are short

styled in our clone. Flowering in autumn.

Salter describes it as a variable group species with many lorms, and the

South Australian material belongs to his typical form,

Kstablished in Seuth Australia at Glen Osmond, Vietor Harhour, Tooperang,

Cambrai, Freeling, Middletown, Hartley, Pt. Lincoln, Tatiara, Although not

yet classed as an important weed, a report from Pt, Lincaln deseribes it as

spreading at a considerable rate aid causing concern.

7. O hirta L. Sp. Pl. (1753) 434.

Bulb ovoid, pointed, 2-3 cm. x 2 cm. with a brown tunic, Stem to 30 cm.,

pubescent, at first erect, later sprawling, simple or branched especially after

Howering, glabrous and scaly below ground.

Teayes with shorl fattened petioles 1-2 mm. long. Leaflets three, sessile,

oblong cuneate, slightly cmarginate, glabrous above pilose below, 5-10 x 3-4 mim.

Peduneles axillary 1 flowered, to 3 cm. with two bracts below the calyx,

Corolla bright purplish pink 3 cm. Flowermy in autumn and winter.

An extremely variable species in South Africa and Salter describes many

varieties. The Sonth Australian plants appear to be the typical form,

Established in the Meningie and Victor Harbour Cemeteries.

8. O. incarnala L. Sp, Pl. (1753) 433.

Rulh ovoid 1-1 em. with a brown tunic, smuller sessile bulbils develop in

the leaf axils during growth and later drop off. Stem rather stiff. branching, to

2f} em., the intertiodes relutively long, § em., and bare.

Leaves crowded at the nodes in clusters of 4-10 (Jalse whorls), petioles 2-4

em. Leaflets glabrous above sparsely pilose below, obcordate 5-10 x 10-17 mm.

The foliage is sweetly scented under warm still conditions, —

PFeduneles one flowered, to 4 em. long, and with two bracts above the

middle and at an articulation, pedicel 2 em., corolla 1:5 cm., pale lilac, Jong

styled in onr clones. Flowering in spring and summer.

Sparingly established in South Australia in moist or shady places al Ml,

Barker, Mt. Lofty. Adelaide suburban yardens, and on the river embankments

at Tailem Bend.

9. O. latifolia Kunth. 1882. Nov. Gen. et Spec. 237, t., 447.

Bulb glohose 1-5 x 1-5 em. tunics brown, outer scales ciliate and with Bq

vertical ridges. Seyeral short conical tuberised ruots may be produced, The

numerous new bulbils are produced from the old bulb on stolons up to 2 em,

long. Plant stemless, the leaves and flowers issuing directly from the bulb,

Leaves numerous, petioles ta 20 cm. terete, almost glabrous, Leaflets three,

almost glabrous, broader than long, obdeltoid with a wide shallow indentation

with straight sides giving them a fishtail appearance. Other clones with more

rounded lobes and with a brown crescent on the [eaves also oceur and are

rather similar to O. corymbosa in appearance.

7A D, E, SYMON

Peduncles to 25 cm. sparsely pubesceut in the region of the Iracts which

subtend the umbel of 8-13 fowers. Sepals with prominent urange calli at the

fly. Coralla bright or pale pink, I-1-2.em. Flowering in summer.

A native ta Central and Tropical South America, it is now widely spread as

a aveed in many parts of the warld, It is aggressive in the Eastern States of

Austvalia, but in South Australia it is still restricted to suburban gardens in

Adelaide gud Mount Gambier, It is summer growing in contrast to the South

Afnieun species growing here und it appears to he less. tolerant of cold conditions

than O. corymbosa. The production of new bulbils is considerable, one pot-

grim plant producing over 80 new bulbils in a season.

10, O, peés-cdprae L., Sp. Pl, 1753, 434,

Q), cernua Thunb. 1781, De Owulide.

Soursop, Soursob of Anstralia, Bermuda Buttercup of England and America,

RBuib ovoid, pointed 1-3. 1 em, with aw brown tunic, producing uw white

tubcrised coutractile root during growth and a thin annual underground stem

which may bear buhils along its length. The stem is only developed ahove

mand when the plants are crowded or shaded..

leaves many, on terete petioles up to 15 em. long which are jointed and

broadened near the base and arise from the top of the underground ster ut

the soil surface, J.eaflets obcordate 1-3 em. bread, notched, sparsely hairy

below and often with numerus purple flecks on the upper surface,

Peduncles to 30 em. long bearing an umbel of 3-16 flowers which are

breeht vellow, sepals 5-7 mm., petals 20-25 mm. long. Flowering Juue-Getober.

Two chromosome races occur in South Australia (Oram, private communi-

cation, 1956). Small populations ol tetraploids (4-28) have been found and

ineiude all three style lengths, as well as variations in Jeaf and calyx marking,

Some seed production appears to occur amongst these plants, The largest

populations are of short styled pentaploids (5x = 35) which ocenpy hundreds

af acres of und on the Adelaide Plains and Lower North,

These plants are virtully sterile and are yery uniform morphologically.

It would appear from averseas descriptions that it is the sterile short styled plant

thuf js weedy in North Africa, Israel and Great Britain. The plants are almnst

wholly weeds of arable land and they have nol invaded undisturbed sites to

any extent. Continued consumption by sheep causes chronic kidney damawe

aud may result in death, particularly with sheep new to the plant (Watts, 1953)-

This specics is an impartant weed, smothering young crops and pastures with its

vigorous xutumn growth. Field distribution in South Australia is mainly on the

Adelaide Plain and is approximately delinited by the 600 ft. contour line and the

j1-12 inch April-October rainfall isohyet Reet wg 1958). However, domestic

gardens are infested in almost every township in South Australia,

Ul, ©. purpurea L, Sp, Pl 1753, 433. syn. O- variahilis Jacq. “One o'clock”.

Bulb ovoid, 2 om., with a firm gummy blackish brown tunic. Amongst the

plants. grown contractile roots were only produced on plants from the smaller

bulbils. Stem thickened at ground level and the leaves crowded at its apes.

Leaves numerous, usually prostrate, petioles terete, 2-10 cm, long. Leaflets

three, glabrous above, ciliate, broadly cuneate rhomboid up to 3% x 3 em. but

usually less,

Peduncles one flowered, as long as, or slightly longer than, the leaves, with

two alternate linear bracts ut or below the middle. Sepals +5 cm., glabrous or

SPECIES OF OXALIS IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA 77

villous, ciliate. Corolla 2 em. long, white, pale or bright pink, or pale violet

usually with a yellow throat. Flowering in autumn, winter and spring.

This species is widely spread in South Australia as a garden escape although

it is rarely common or weedy. There is a variant with reddish purple tints to the

stems and leaves which occurs as a weed of lawns, Under continued mowing

its dimensions may be very reduced, the leaflets being ouly -5 em. in diameter

with petioles 1 om, long, Another variant with leaflets completely flushed with

purple has been grown as a garden plant and is perhaps more aggressive. It

differs from the typical plant in that the stem arises obliquely from the bulb

and may emerge up to 6 inches distant from it, instead of ulmost directly above

it. New bulbils are formed along the length of this stem and contractile roots

were not produced.

At least five colour variants and all style lengths of the typical forum occur

in South Australia.

REFERENCES

Buack, J. M., 1948, Flera of South Aust., Part JI, p. 484, Gov, Printer, Adelaide.

Danrrxeton, ©, D., and Werte, A. P,, 1955. Chromosome Atlas cf Flawering Plants. Allen

and Unwin, London,

Guinroyie, W. R., 1883. Catalogue of the Plants under Cultivation in the Melbourne Botanic

Gardens, Goy, Printer. Melbonrne,

Incuam, J., 1958-1959, The Cultivated Species of Oxalis. Baileya 6, pp. 23-32, 1958; Baileya

7, pp. 11-22, 1959.

Mienakr, P., 1958. Some Aspects of the Ecology and Physivlugy «f Soursoh (Oxalis pes-

caprae). Ph.D. Thesis, University of Adelaide.

Oram, R,, 1956. Private communication.

Saurer, IT. M., 144. The genus Oxalts in South Africa. J. S$. Afric. Bot. Suppl., Vol. 1, 1944.

ScuHompurk, R., 1878. Catalogue of the Plants under Cultivation in the Government Botanic

Garden, Adelaide. Goy. Printer. Adeluide,

Watts, P, S., 1953. ‘The toxicily of Oxalis pes-cuprae. Fifteenth Report Inst, of Med. and

Vet. Sei. Adclatde,

Youne, D, P., 1958, Oxalis in the British Isles. Watsonia, 4, pp, 31-69.

DESCRIPTION OF THE FEMALE OF TRICHONYSSUS WOMERSLEYI

DOMROW (ACARINA, MACRONYSSIDAE )

BY H. WOMERSLEY

Summary

The female of Trichonyssus womersleyi Domrow, 1958, a species hitherto known only from the

male, is described.

DESCRIPTION OF THE FEMALE OF TRICHONYSSUS WOMERSLEY!

DOMROW (ACARINA, MACRONYSSIDAE)

hy H. Wonrerstey®

[Read & September 1960}

SUMMARY

The fomale of Trichonysius womersleyt Domrow, 1958, a species hitherto

known only from the male, is described,

In 1958 my colleague, Mr, R. Domrow (Proc. Linn, Soc., N.S.W., 83 (3),

p. 220) erected a new genus Trichonyssus for the species described by myself in

1956 as Chiraptonyssus australicus (J, Linn, Soe,, London, Zoul., 43 (288), p. 597)

and collected from im wnidentified bat from South Australia. The species was

only tentatively assigned to Chiroptonyssus.

The genus Trichonyssus was differentiated from Chiroptonyssus by Dormrow

as follows: in the female by the metasternal setae being free on the cuticle and

not on small platelets, and in the male by the complete holoventral shield, the

absence of a strong process on the femur of leg IV and the presence of very

long setae posteriorly on the opisthoma.,

In addition Lo designating Chiroptonyssus australicus Wom, as the genotype

of his new genus Trichonyssus Domrow (loc. cit.) erected a seeond species

Trichonyssus womersleyi for the two specimens which L described in 1957 as

the inales of Plesiolarlaps minioplerus sp. nov, (Trans. Ray. Soc,, S.A, 80-70)

from a bat Minivpterus schreibersii blepotis (Temmink) from Joanna, S. Aus-

tralia. He showed that these males were not truly correlated with the holotype

female, The genus Plesiolaelaps he placed in synonymy with Spinolaelaps

Radford,

The males of womersleyi were distinguished from those of australicus by the

long posterior opisthosomal setac being in two groups of seven instead of a

continous eirclet of many more. The female of womersleyi has hitherto been

unknown,

Revently, however, from a bat, Chalinolobus couldi goutdi Gray, found on

board a vessel at Port Adelaide, South Australia, 26th Feb,, 1960, were obtained

three males which were found to be couspecifie with the holotype of tcomersleyi

and two femules which showed distinct differences from the females of

australicus and are now ascribed ta T. womersleyi Domrow.

Trichonyssus womersleyi Domrow.

Domrow, R,, 1955, Acarina from Australian Tats, Prac. Linn, Soe., N.S.W., 83 (3), p, 231,

Description of Allotype Female—A rather lightly scleroatised ovoid species.

Length of idiasoma (gravid) S00p, width 468,.

Dorsum—With entire dorsal shield, not covering the whole body, 500, long

by 260» wide, posteriorly becoming contracted to a rounded tip. Both shield

and surrounding cuticle with numerous. short pointed sctae to 24, long,

Venter—With only two pairs of setac on the sternal shield, the other pair being

just, but only just, aff the postero-lateral corners, the shield is 1154 wide between

® South Australian Misemn.

‘Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust. (1961), Vol. 84.

H. WOMERSLEY

‘aeIaDTOYyO “Q ayuea ‘gq fumsiop *y ‘ayRuTay “momuog iapsuatwom snssfiuoyouy

FEMALE OF TRICHONYSSUS WOMERSLEYI &1

the third pair of setae and 43 long in the median line, with strongly concave

posterior margin and the posterior half more sclerotised and band-like; the meta-

sternal setae are free on the cuticle; the genital shield tapers posteriorly to a

very acute point, its length from the setac to the tip is 1104 and the setae are

67, apart, anteriorly it is fimbriated; the anal shield is an elongate pear-shape,

105. long by 52 wide; ventral sctac as on the dorsum and to 24, long.

Legs—Normal, II the stoutest, I 608. long, IT 352, long, ITT 327, IV 409.;

coxae IL with a strongly antero-dorsal spur.

Remarks—Ditters from the female of australicus Wom. in the shape of the

dorsal and genital shields.

LABIDOSTOMMIDAE FROM AUSTRALIA (ACARINA, PROSTIGMATA)

WITH THE DESCRIPTION OF A NEW SPECIES1

BY WARREN T. ATYEO AND D. A. CROSSLEY JR.

Summary

Current investigations on the labidostommid fauna of the Australian realm required the

redescription of the type of the Australian species, Labidostomma adelaideae Womersley. Through

the cooperation of the South Australian Museum, the type specimen plus unidentified specimens

were loaned for study. Among the materials received, one new species was discovered which is

described herein.

LABIDOSTOMMIDAE FROM AUSTRALIA (ACARINA, PROSTIGMATA)

WITH THE DESCRIPTION OF A NEW SPECIES*

Wannes T. Atyeo? ann D. A, Crossiry, Jr.*

(Communicated by I. Womersley)

[Read § Septernber 15960]

Current investigations on the labidostommid fauna of the Australian realm

required the redescription of the type of the Australian species, Labidostomina

adelaideae Womersley. Through the cooperation of the South Australian

Museum, the type specimen plus unidentified specimens were loaned for stady.

Among the materials received, one new species was discovered which is described

herein,

Labidostomma adelaideae Womersley, 1935

Ann, Mag. Nat. Hist. 10th ser, 16 (9), pp. 152-153,

The dorsal integumental pattern of this specics resembles those of Lahirlo-

stomma luteum Kramer, L, barbae Greenberg, and L. vejdosskyi Storkan, but is

easily distinguished from these species in that adelaideac lacks the large gland-

like structures. (“pustules” of Crandjean, 1942; “Seitenhoveker” of Thor, 1931)

immediately behind each Jateral eve.

Female.—Colour in life dark alive-green t) greenish black, Length, melnd-

ing pnathosoma, 1004p. Gnathosoma—Chelicera (Fig. 1C): length, 189; height,

17; median surface with 2-3 short vertical rows ol small spicules at bases of

fixed digit. Fixed digit with 8-11 subeqnal tecth slightly Jarger than 10-13 sub-

equal teeth of movable digit; longest cusp of fixed digit minutely dentate

apically, Palpus, 144, in length; gnathosomal base with 3 pairs of setae, Dorsal

idiosoma (Fig, 1A), Length, 8154; without anterolateral projections; without

large gland-hke organs on median Jateral surfaces; sensilla minutely branched.

Ventral idivsoma. Epimera with polygons except: epimeron L11 with small

striated area near median line, epimeron TY with striated areas on medial and

lateral thirds. Paragenital region with larwe striated area us in Fig, 1D, Legs,

Measurements: tibia 1, 185; tursus 7, 76; pretarsus 1, 36u; tibia TV, LaS,; tarsus

IV, 143,; total lengths of legs (excluding coxae and pretarsi): 1, 654); TM, a23p;

IL, 4684: (V, 6lip. Famulus with single dichotomy; solenidia short, extending

to msertion of famulus (Fig, 1B).

Madle,—Unknown,

Type—Feniale, collected at Morialta Gorge, Adelaide. South Australia, Sep-

tember 2, 1934, by H. Wamersley, among hepatics.

Location of Type.—The South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

Remarks —A second female collected at Long Gully, Belair, South Australia,

in August, 1938, hy H. Womersléy from moss, was available for study and was

found not to deviate Irom the redescription of the type. All drawings are of the

type specimen.

1 Published with the approval af the Director as Paper No, 1032, Journal Sories, Nebraska

Agricultural Experiment Station.

2 Deparbnent of Entomology, University of Nebraska, Lincoln 3, Nebr,

*Toalth Physics Divistm, OQuk Ridge National Laboratory, Oak Ridge, Tennessee.

Trans, Roy, Soc. S, Aust, (1961), Vol. 34,

Hed WARREN T. A'TYEO awn D. A. CROSSLEY, Jr,

Labidostomma womersleyi n. sp.

This new species is similar to L, adelaideae, but can he distinguished by the

lack of striated areas surrounding the genital plates, tarsus LV being longer than

tibia IV (rather than shorter), and being slightly smaller in size,

RNS ae

a B

Fig, |. -Labidostamma_adelaideae Womersley, 1935, type female. igs, A and D,

swale |}: Figs, B and ©. seale 2. A. dorsum of idiosoma; B, tarsus I showing two

solenidia and branched famulus, C, lateral aspect of right chelicera; D, ventral aspect

of opisthosnma showing paragenital, genital, and anal regions.

Female —Colour in life deep yellow. Length, including gnathosoma, 780.

Gnuthosoma.—Chelicera (Fig. 2C): lenuth, 1702; height, 98; median surface

without spicules, Fixed digit with minute serrations on inner face, much sinaller

than dentations of movable digit; both cusps of fixed digit minutely dentate

apically. Palpus, 102, in length; gnathosomal base with 3 pairs of setae. Dorsal

LABIDOSTOMMIDAE FROM AUSTRALIA 85

idiosoma (Fig, 2A).-Length, 610y; without anterolateral projections; without

large gland-like organs behind lateral eyes; sensilla minutely branched. Ventral

idiosomu—Epimera with polygons except for striated outer third of epimeron IV.

Genital] and anal areas as in Fig. 2D. Legs.—Measurements: tibia I, 153,; tarsus

“a8 ‘i yo

100»

125 p

Fig, 2.—lubidostamma womersleyi, n. sp., holotype fernalo. Pigs. A and Dy scale 1,

Figs, Band ©, seale 2. A, dorsum of idiongoma; B, tarsus 1 showing two solenidia

wil brinehed farnulus; GC, lateral aspect of right chelicera; D, ventral aspect of

opisthosoma showing paragenital, genital and anal regions-

L, 75y; pretarsus T. 31; tibia TV, M43,; tarsus TV, L4Sp; total lengths of legs (ex-

eluding coxae sd pretarsi): [, 5724, Ul, 452n: UL. 302u; IV. 551. Famulus

with single dichotomy; solenidia long, extending almost to tip of tarsus L

(Fig. 2B).

86 WARREN T, ATYEO anv D, A. CROSSLEY, Jn.

Male.—Unknown.

Holotype.—Female, collected at Remarkable Creek, Wilmington, South Aus-

tralia, altitude 2,000 feet, September 18, 1958, by H. M. Cooper, in moss.

Location of Type.—The South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

Remarks.—Although the new species is based on a single female, the differen-

tiating characters are unique when compared with those of any known species

from the Australian realm. This new species is named in honour of Dr. H.

Womersley of the South Australian Museum, All drawings are of the holotype.

ACKNOWLEDGMENT

The authors wish to thank the University of Nebraska Research Council for funds to

employ a scientific illustrator.

RETERENCES

GRANDJEAN, F., 1942, Observations sur les Labidostommidac. Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. Sér., 2

p. 14; (2), pp, 118-125; (3), pp, 185-192; (5), pp. 319-326: (6), pp. 414-418.

GREENBERG, Bexnarp, 1952. New Labidostommidae with Keys to the New World Species

(Acarina), J, New York Ent. Soc, LX, pp, 195-209.

StrorkAn, J., 1938. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Familie Nicolctiellidac. Mém. Soc. Zool.

Tchécosloyaque Praque V, pp. 436-453.

THor, a iia Bdellidae, Nicoletiellidae, Cryptognathidae, Das Tierreich, Lief., 56,

pp. 66-77,

Womerstey, H., 1935. On some Cryptognathid and Nicoletiellid Acarina from Australia

and New Zealand. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 10 ser., 16 (91), pp. 151-154.

BASSIA UNIFLORA (FVM.)R.BR. (CHENOPODIACEAE) AND

ALLIES IN AUSTRALIA

BY ERNEST H. ISING

Summary

An examination of herbarium specimens of Bassia Sect. Anisacantha Series 1 Anderson

(Proc.Linn.Soc.N.S.Wales 48(1923)322) revealed specifically distinguishing characters of

B. uniflora ( R.Br.) FyM. and B. diacantha ( Nees ) FvM, (The latter name had been treated in the

more modern local floras as a synonym of the former.) These two and four new species,

B.burbidgeae, B. constricta, B. eichleri and B. gardneri, are described. A key for the determination

of the species recognized in the series (except B. anisacanthoides) is given. Of each species the

distribution is illustrated by citation of a selection of the approximately 600 specimens examined

from the following herbaria: AD, ADW, BRI, CANB, MEL, NSW, NT, I', PERTH, SYD (symbols

as in Index Herbariorum ed. 4), and special features are briefly discussed.

BASSIA UNIFLORA (FyM,)R.Br. (CHFNOPODIACEAEF) AND

ALLIES IN AUSTRALIA

by Ernest H. Istnc

(Communicated by Hj. Eichler}

[Read 13 October 1960]

SUMMARY

An cxumination of berbarhin specimens of Basste Sect, Anisacantha Series J

Anderson (Proc.Linn,Soe.N.8.Wales 48(1923)322) sevenled specifieully dis

tinguishing characters of B, uniflera (R.Br, )FvM. and B. eliaeantha (Nees) FvM,

(The Jatter name had been treated in the more modern Ineal Horas as a synonym

of the former.) “These two and four new species, B. burbidgeae, B. constrict,

B, eiclileri aud B, eurdneri, are described. A key for the determination of the

speaics recognized in the series (ewe pt Js, anisacanthvides) is given. OF each

specics the distiibution is illustrated by citation of a selection of the approxi-

mately GOO specitneus «xanincd from the following herbaria: AD, ADW,

BRI, CANB, MEL, NSW. N't, (, PERTH, SYD (symbols as ain Index Hur-

bariornm ed. 4), and speetal features are briefly discussed.

Since Ferdinand von Mueller (Census Austral,Pl. 1(1882)30) transferred

the Australian species described in the genera Chenolea, Sclerolaena, Anisa-

cantha, Echinapsilon, Kentropsis, Dissucurpus, Eriochitan, Osteocarpum and

Coilocarpus to the genus Bassia, he was, in Australia, followed by most of the

writers of State Floras and check lists. J. M. Black, for example, in his Flora

of South Australia ((1924)188), follows Anderson’s “Revision of the Australian

speues of the genus Bassia” (Proc.Linn.Soc.N.S.Wales 48(1923)317-355,

t, XXXIV-AXXVI1) in this “lumping” trend.

Domin (Bibl.Bot.89(1921)625) pointed out that the circumscription of the

genera within the Chenoleae (sensu Benth. and Mook,f,, Gen,P1.3/1(1880))46)

represents greatest diffeultics, and that one may become inclined ta lump into

one genus all the groups of species which have been described as genera. He,

however, regards such a procedure as being nol suitable. The unification of

Selerolaena and Anisacantha he rewards as fully justified; the delimitation of the

other genera, however, will, in Domin’s opmion, he anly possible following 4

thorough monographic stucly,

Ulbrich in his treatment of Chenopoidinceae (in Engler uy. Prantl, Nati.

Pilanzenfam. 2nd ed.16e(1934)448.449, 532-540) referred to the Australian

species treuted in modern Australian State Floras under Bassia as belonging to

the genera Austrobassia, Sclerolaena, Dissocarpus, Coilocarpus and Sclerobassta.

Ali these genera are restricted to Australia whereas Bassia (sensu Ulbrich) occurs

in the Mediterranean area, Orient to Central Asia, Siberia, and one specics in

Central Europe (naturalized in North America) but is absent from Australia,

Black (Trans,Roy.Soc.S.Austral. 58(1934)173-!76) explained the reasons

why he did not follow Ulbriel’s treatment and retained the generic name Bussia.

for the Australian species in the 2nd edition of his Flora of South Australia

((1948)301-308 ).

{ appears, nevertheless, desirable that the justification of the Australian

genera distinguished by Ulbrich be examined carefully and the Australian species

referred to Bassia by other authors be revised in view of their gencric position.

‘Trans, Roy. Soc. 8. Aust, (1961), Vol, #4,

5&8 ERNEST H. SING

This large task could not be undertaken for the present study which deals

only with a few selected species which I regard as being closely allied. It is

nuteworthy that two of them afe treated by Ulbrich as Austrobassia and three

are referred to as Sclerolacna. The other species recognized here were unknown

when Ulbrich published his treatment.

In this study the species ure treated as Bassia from conventional reasons

(im order not to confuse nomenclature without sound reasons), following Black's

remarks, and especially as the group dealt with here has been selected as defined

in Anderson's revision.

The species of the present study belong to Bassia Seet. Anisacantha Ser. 1

Anderson (Proe.Linn.See.N.S.Wales 46(1993)322). According to Anderson

this series is characterized and distinguished fram the remainder of the genus

us follows:

Sect, Anisacantha: Perianth becoming hardened from the base, usually much hardened

ettanes flowers solitary; without any wing-like expansion: spines acicular, not

fLLLG Teed,

Ser. 7: Fruiting perianth much bollawed at base, the cavity secnpyiny almost or more

than half the perianth.

All species belonging to this series with the exception of B. anisacanthoides

(FvM. )Anders, are treated herennder. Of B. anisacanthoides (Sclerolaena anisa-

canthoides (FyM.)Domin according to Ulbrich’s classification) which differs

from the other species of this series by “fruits with 5-6 spines” and which is

known from Quceusland and New South Wales (Broken Hill district), T have

seen no specimens.

ta. Fruit covered with long silky hairs, spines 2, rarely 3 ......,....., 3. B. eriucantha

tb. Fruit densely tomentose to glabrous; spines 0-3

84. Tubercle on posterior face at base of one of the spines hooked; margin of areole at

base of fruit ciliate 2.) eye ee eee eee eee ee terre ee ceeees A B. vurdneri

2h, ‘Tubercle on posterior face at base of one uf the spines not hooked; margin of areols

ut base of frit glabrous.

3a. Spines + parallel and erect.

da. Fruiting perianth soft, Jongitudinsl furrows deep; spines 1-3 unequal in length

and thickness .......2- alg a algyteblt aM tte opm tiele © wet lately Able atadatt 4 5. B. tatei

4b. Fruiting periaith bard, Tongitudmal firrows shallow: spines 2, equal, acicuJar

3b, Spines divergent (slightly in B. uniflora).

Sa. Hruiting perianth thin walled, easily broken, nsually longer than broad.

Ga. Tubercle large, beak-like, ercut, prominent, usually longer than spines

8, B, caput-casiarli

6b. Tubercle incoispicuous, wuch shorter tan spines ........ T. B. constricta

5h, Wrnitiny perianth thick walled, not easily broken (except B. diacantha}; about

as long as broad.

7a, Stele glabrous or almost so.

Sa. Seed horizontal to slightly oblique; spines. 0-2! mm. long.

92. Leaves laneevlate, villous; perianth tumentose: tubercle almost

ahsent, not ceenrrent 2.2.2.0 20222- 222, pee eee 9, B. cichleri

9b, Leaves lincar, pubescent; perianth elabrous; ttbercle often promicent,

VBTT OT oe oP aos She ieee a ale apelin wom shone: Sap peels vs 10. 8. burbidgeae

8h, Seed vertical to slightly: oblique: spines 3-7 aim. Jong: tubercle small,

slithtly decurrenf oo. ...4-5 Tha PeR eee te ree 11. B. holtiuna

7b. Style pilose or hirsute; seed horizontal to shghitly obliqae; periauth

tmutentose,

Wa, Leaves + clavate, imbricate, densely tomentose; spines absent

to about # min. long: tubercle prominent ....-.... - 1. B. uniflurs

10b, Leaves aerrow to broad linear, nat imbricate, — densely pubescent;

spines usnally 1-7 mm. Jong: tubercle not prominent

2. B, diavantha

BASSIA UNIFLORA AND ALLIES IN AUSTRALIA

Seale for Tigs. A to © = 2 mm,

ig. 1: Rassia aniflora. ( R.Br.) lvM.; 2: B. diacantha (Nees)FyM.; 4: B. vardneri

Ising; 7: B. constricta Ising, 8: B. caput-casuarii Willis; 9: B. eichleri Ising; 10: B.

hurbidgeae Ising; A: Fruiting perianths (hairy indumentum omitted), posterior face;

B: anterior fice; C: median section; D: Styles. Figures A-C drawn to same scale (as

showa in drawing); D; various indefinite magnifications (to indicate hairs on. style

and direction of raclicle only). (Al drawings from type speciniens. )

bt) ERNEST Tl, iSING

J, Bassia uniflora (R.Br)FVM. Census Austral.Pl 1(1882)30; FVM., Second

Gensns 1(1889)51; Tate, Handb.I1Lxtratrop.S,Austral (1890 )51,218;

Anders. Proc.Linn.Soc.N.$.Wales 48(1923)320 p.p; Black, FLS,Austral.

(19245190 pp; Gardner, En.PlAustyel-Oceid.(1930)38 p.p. Black, FILS.

Austral2nd ed, (1948)303 p.p.; Blackall, W.Austral WidE. 1(1954)153

pp— Selerolaena uniflora Robe, Prod.1(1810)410; Moqin DC., Prod.

13/2(1849)123 (“semen vertieale” uppers ta be an error), Benth, FlAnstral,

3(1870) 194; FvM,, Fragm, §(1873)38; Ulbrich in Engler & Prantl, Nat.Pil,

fun. 16¢(1934)534.— Fig. 1 A-D,

Undershrub, diffuse, much branched, covered with a dense indumentum,

Branches terete, densely tomentose. Leaves + linear-cluvate, slightly tapering

to base, 4-8 nm. long, 12 mm, wide near upex, acute (obtuse in appearance

before cluthing is remoyed), + thick, very densely tomentose, imbricate and

vreet chielly in upper part of branches. Flowers solitury. Starnens 5, filaments

membranans, dilated to basc, Fruiting perianth pear-shaped. 14-2 mm, long,

wide and thick, tomentose; anterior face convex, with several vertical and one

liwrizontal rib: posterior face convex, with 1-2 vertical ribs. Spines usually 2,

up te & min. long or one or both cudimentary. Tubercle very obtuse, lurue,

alte higher thau limb. Limb inconspicuous, Base + circular, obliqne. deeply

hallowed; septa radiating; maruin ylabrous. Style linear, hirsnte; stigmutie

branches 2, red, Seed horizontal to slightly oblique; radicle superior.

Sout AusraatiA, BR, Brown 307G; AD JGOLLOTS (isatype: fragrnent of holotype tram

BAU); Fowlers Bay. 1802-- HH, Basedaw: NSW 45549: Kingoonya to Mt. Eha. JV-V

7 JM, Dhaek: AD, NSW 4553!: Tarcookt. INd920.— 8, T, Borbidge: and M.

Grav 4620 and 4622; CANB: ca. 50 kan santh of Mt. Willongliby Station, 10.8,1955.—

]. B. Cleland; AD 95820125: Beltuna, 25.1%,1956— id: AD 95820104: Cape Thevenard,

tt, 400 don, west of Part Angusta. T4.VENI928.— id: AD 95820 10K; Pintumba, ea.

40 lan, east of Western Australian border near the cous 201X1957— Ry, La. Crocker;

ADW 4685 (b undc only); Kalabity Station, £0 km. north of Qhury, EX,1999.— P.M.

Hilton 797; ADW: Yuileaplowa, USVI Lb54.— BE. H. Ising: AD HSANTRO: Ooduzudatta.

20.V1h1952.— 7. G. B. Osborm; NSW 4555: Flinders Is. 1011024— — Richards: MEL:

Botween Eucla and Fowlers Bity. 1875, 1. FR, Symon: AD, ADW 20917, 20918) Coxhina-

Thevenard coustline, B.P,, sandy soll over limestone, 2.N.1959— ah, AD, ADW 20915-

an22; ca, 20 kn N. of Koonibba Siding, road to Inila Rock, Ew, mallee iat,

réd — suil. BOTN L959 (nel quite typieal).— id; AD, ADW 20923, 20024; Ft.

Sinclyir, near Penong, E.P., sandy dines near the beach front. 27.)X,1959_ (fruits arid

leaves darger).— dha AD, ADW 20025. 20926: cu, 6 km. N. of Fowlers Bay, FP,, a light

sandy soil in cleared mallee. 20,0%.1959 Cleaves less densely tontentose).- J. 0. Vereo

and W, G. Torr: NSW 45955: St. Francis Ts., Nuyts Archipelago. 17.1900.— — J, H, Willis:

MEL: Great Australian Bight, cx. 13 ke, south of White Wells. 38 VIIL1947.

Wearenn Acwenaita, NN. fo Burbitee 1535: PRHATH: Purdua Station, VITAL.

A, Gumningham 162; MEL: Dirk Harteg's Ishind. Voyage of "Bathirst. 1822,— Forrest:

MEL: Lat 3646", Long. 128°20"— KB, RL. Johnson 46 (£); AD, ca. 22 km. narth uf

Forrest. 38.1955,— 9 Oldfield CP): NSW Sb267- Murehison River. IBB2 Cyery clase to

Wpe)— AL W. Rebblewhite 8: CAND; Parrest, Nullarbor Plain, 26.18.1945.

New Soury Wares. B. Carolin d23: SYD; Sandy Greek Gurye, Fowlers Gap, 112 km.

N, of Broken UL VILIUST.— 1. P Waterhouse: SYD: N, of Fowlers Cap. 31LV,1954,

(Both thes specimens fron Fowlers Gap are not quite typicthj— A. Cunningham: F;

Liverpool Plains, 1826, (Perianths uineeveloped but probably belongs to this species.)

The original description of Scleralaena uniflora R.Br. evidently requires a

comma after “solitaciis” followed by “foliis", This would then make the de-

seription intelligible and in harmony with the type specimen.

in K, Brown's ms. notes (microfilm in AD) the leaves of this species are

described as obtuse: this appears correct if the apex outline is observed with its

very dense tomentuxe covering. When the indumentum Is removed the leaves

are found to be acute, althangh not prominently so,

Both Anderson and Black describe the seeds ag horizontal, but they are

mime often slightly oblique.

BASSIA UNIFLORA AND ALLIES IN AUSTRALIA fl

B, uniflora is confined to the coastal and dry interior portions af South and

Western Australia and orth of Broken Till in New South Wales,

In 1924 Black described a new variety as B. uniflore (R.Br,)FyM. var.

incongruens (Trans.Roy.Soc.S.Austrul, 48(1924)254). Two collections were

cited, one from Hergott (Marree) and one from Arkaringa Creek. The «ne

from Marree (J. M, Black) (chosen as lectotype of the variety) is B. constricta

Ising and the one from Arkaringa Creek (Miss Stavr) is B, Roltiana Ising. Bath

these specimens are referred to by Anderson (J.c. 329, the locality uf the second

misspelt “Arkianga”) as B. uniflora.

2. B, diacantha (Nevs) FvM., Censis Austral.Pl, 1(1852)30, FPvM., Second

Census 1(1889)51; FvM,., JeAustral.Salsol.PL(1889)t. LXXYVIL; Tate,

Handb.F].Extratrop.S.Austral, (1890)5L, 218; Moore and Betche, Handb.F,

N.&.Wales (1893)111; Diels and Pritzel, Bot.Jb. 35(1904)186 (specimen

not seen); Maid, and Betche, Cens.N.$.WalesPl. (1916)69.— — Anisacantha

diacantha Nees in Lehm., Pi, Preiss. 1( 1845)635; FvM., Fragm, 7( 1869) 14;

4(1875)75.— Kentropsis diacantha (Nees) Mog. in DG., Prod. 13/2( 1849)

!38— Pf Antsacantha kentropsidew FyM,, Trans.Victdnst, 1(1853) 133;

FyM,, Hook.Kew J. 8(1856)204— — Selerolaena diacantha (Nees) Benth.

F}.Austral, 5(1870)194 (incl, var, lorgispina? Benth, lc. 195 Pp.) Bailey,

Syn.QueensL Fl. (1883 )407; Bailey, Queens! FI. 4( 1901) 1257; Bailey, Compr.

Cat.Queensl.Pl. (1913)409; Ulbrich in Engler und Prantl, Nat.Ptffarm-

T6c(1934)534.- Chenolea ciacantha (Nees)tvM., Fragm. 10(1876)91.—

'Bassia uniflora (non (RBR.Br.)FvM.) Anders. Proe.1inn,Soe.N,S.Wales

48(1923)329 pp; Black, FLS Austral, (1924)190 pops Ewart. FLViel

(1930456; Gardner, En.Pl.Austral. Oceid. (1930)38 p.p.; Blauk, FLS,Austral.

and ed, (1945)303 p.p.; Blackall, W.Austral. Wildfl. 1(1954)153 p.p.J—

Fig, 2 A-D.

T have not seen Une type spechuen of Aniveantha kentepsidea WeM. for which special

senroly nas Analy heen made in Ko and MET. The appbestion of this name remalus there

fare somewhat doubtlul. Fow Mueller placed i as ayueoyun of A. digcantha in his Pras,

TLISGY ) 14,

Low shrub, pubescent, branching. Brancties terete, tomentose, Leaves linear,

5-22 mm, lony, to 1k mm, wide (usually about 1 mm. wide), acute, pubescent,

usuuly thin and spreading, Flowers solitary. Stamens 5; hlanients membranims,

dilated to base. S'ruiting perianth about 2mm. long and 24 mm. brvad, tomen-

tuse; anterior face convex with several longitudinal and one horizontal rib:

posterioy face convex. Spines 2, 14-2 mm. long {sometimes longer), nearly

equal, divergent, tomentose in lower part, otherwise glabrous. ‘Tubercle obtuse,

small, decurrent, highev than limh. Limb short, bent downwards. Base + ovate,

deeply hollowed; margin glabrous. Style linear, hirsute; stigmatic branches 2,

red. Seed horizontal to slightly oblique; radicle superior.

Westrunn Avsrraanra. UL. Preiss 237%: MEL (isotype of Anisaeantha diacantha Nees:

the holotype could not be traced al HBG): Quangen Plaing (Victoria): TTT.1840.— Anonym:

PERTIT: Trins.BRnilway Survey. LOOl.—~ BH PERTH; Coolgardie, VISYO— K.P,

Railey 13; PER'VAH: Mintadgin, X.1945,— 357: CANRB, PERTH: Wadderin Rocks.

1X1937— W. Dd. Campbell: P: Bonlder, 28-VILINO0 (Perianths undeveloped bat most

likely this speeies).— W. V. Fitegerald; AD 95938007. Nonnine. IN.L003.— CA.

Gardner 1723: PERTIT: Bonderine. 17 VL1922.— 6542: PERTH: Cunderdin. 23,.%.1943.—

ids PERTH: Nalyerting, VILI40O— Te. Tlelms NSW, MEL: Victoria Desert, Camp 53,

IGIXAS9L— WM. Ising; AID 95935002: Wyalkatchem, LTX,1926.— M-. Koch 1373: MEL,

PERTH: Cowenmwing. LX.1id-- 3873: NSW: Moerredin, 19.X%,1923-— J, H. Maden:

NSW 45564: Gue. X.1909.—E, Merrall: MEL. Golden. Valley. L884h.—A. Morrison; PR RL AH:

Wogan Hills, TNL903— Lb, Co Webster: NSW 45565: Coolperdic. 1900.

Sourm AvstHaur fselectlon only), Anonym, (Herb, J; M. Black): AD: Martee:

LIN.1917; Pinnarog. ZN L818; Woolshed Flat. 3.4.1916: Berri. X,1924; Tareooda. Leo;

Dublin. 12.0%.1932— W. H. Andrew: AD 95708122; Mt. Bayley near Beltana.

os KNEES’ A. JSuNG

W,.VURIG20— If G. Andrewartha 6498: ADW: 354 ox. Curnmamous, 24,01 187

D. Bates: AD: Oelden 11921 and 25.VIT1921— 6, CO Blacks AD WSTUBL35: Rennars.

11907.— J. M. Black: AD, NSW 45558: Melrose. I5.8.1915.- ich; AD, NSW 45556;

Mural Bay, 18,X7,{915 wd |7.XT,1915— id’ AD S5708133- Pt, Noorlnga. 15.1. 19D5—

id; AD 95708123; Wudinna, TOARIGL3— ied; NSW 45552: Tarconla ul: AD

S570SL38: Wirrawilla, ca, 34 kit senth-south-east al Matree. WAXLISIT— N. 1. Bur-

bidge: CANB 12214: Yudnepitmm. LLIN Ib Go Hy Clarkes ADW 8206: Biugstan

Pack. 12,1N.1086.— J.B, Cleland: AD 958201492 Ernabellu, Musgrave Range. 25.1X) (9435.—

id: AD 95820003: Halletts Cove. 24.9X.1932.— id; AD 95820037: Pinery, Port River.

37XNLAIN28— the AD G5820015; Mautung TAVINTAG2d— ids AD P5819070: Parc

Aina. 2ONTELI981— ids AD vad20085: Goldea Souk, 20,VIITL999— ids AD

95820H003; Botyeen Pouchers und Cecluia. 3X15. jd.: AD 95820008; Near seu-

edge, Mutt, Encunnter Buy. 8.2.1932— ul; AL Y5¥20009; Goyders Lagoon. 25-VU1193d, -

id: AD S5820010: Qodnadatta. 1.1927.— ids AD 95820079; Coondambu, 2!).8.1929 -

ide AD 95819073: Pt. Genmein, SALINRA—-— J. Cover: BRI 014279; Frome Rivet, Mul

poorma. LIG5G— BR, L. Crocker: ADW 4681R und 4656: Yudnapinna Sty. 12.X-138)

and 1G.N.1930.— it; AD )5939009: va, Diamantina River, Burt's Waterhule. 16.V11,1959,—

id; Al 95939008: Simpson Desert Mypedition, Camp 19. 27VL1959 (a, anly)— id.

AD 95034008: ibid. Camp 48, 4.V0N,1999 (bh, anly).— Hi. Eiebler lifdd; AD: Monash.

ITV 19ST — 1565: Ale Muring, 401859— WW. Fablbohm: MPT. Apes of Spencer

Gulf LSs8o.- Fo Giless MM@L: North of Fowlers Kav. FM. Hilton 673, G77: ADW:

VYodnapinna Sta, 2102, VILI954— 1438: ADW; Cupley Gorge, LOLIY.1955.—_ idl:

ADW 19003: Near Silt Lake, Nullarbor Plain, 24-VIEL.1955— TE. 11, Ising: AD Y5yn7123:

Evel Downs St. ea. 120 kin. sonth-west of Ouduadattn. 26,V1TT,1954— a; AD, ADW

11540, 11563, NSW 45544: Other collections from Livelyn Downs, 1952-1955—-1603: AD:

Oollew. 1BAX.120— 1718, (7387 and W757; AD, MBL, NSW, BRI: Tarcoola. 21.1X.1920.—

id= AD 95907090; Mt, Mary, near Morgan, 3.X.1922— id: AD 95907088: Tallorts Cave.

WAVIG2d— ids AD 95907098: Veolla, 23,7V.1932.- id: AD 95907095; bvraonli

Ob1987— ids AD 950070912 Mt. Marit. Wihvingten. 2h 41925— ab: AD 5907079.

Munn. B.VILIYS4.- 2872: AD: Peditka, 20VHL1I992— ib: AD 9590TU7T7: Wudimnit

Bp, 19.N.1938.— id.: Al 95907002; Pt. Dennein, SNEINB6— L, A, §. Johnson: NSW

4957) Marino. 25.70.1957 — Mf, Koel) 292: MIST Mth Lyndhurst. [xX Suu. F

Mueller. NSW 435957, MEL: Tlcklfast Bay. 1447 ovel ViLSSL- B. J. Murmy 1u2; AD,

Arcoana, ca 63 kin. west of centre cf Lake ‘Terrens. IDIA.18287— ‘tb AW. Paltridge: AD

YSU39013: Kuoruwiore Vewelalion Regesee, 21IX 1989— TL. Reese: AD BSTOSLE5: Minti

Dowus, ca [OS km, seuth-sonth-cust of Birdsvilly, Qsld. 1587-4. EY. Belardsen:

ADW S81: Buckleboo, BB. Wh1U8)—- ile ABW 980; Mumay Mallee. TY L03L— kD.

flolrlieh TE: AD. Pinkawillime, (5.721959— fH. Schodde 178; AD: Sandleton, 30 kia.

south-west af Ulanchetown, 30,TTT, L959, 1118, 1120 nnd 1133: AD; Olary Spiv, Kaona-

more Vegetation Reserve. 27 and S8.V.1959-- J, GO, Tepper 334 and 330: MEL” Yorke

Peninsula, IST9— D, J.B, Whibley 465; ADs 22 dau. east of Prrichilna, 20401.1959.—

PG. Wilson ddd: AD: Whyalkt-Kimba lawl PPO 2X.29358.— d1G: AD: 1G km. south

af Kyanentta, EP, ca. 150 kim. north ef Pt. Linewlo 13.4,1955.— ABS: AD. Minnina.

f£.P, 15M 195S— L068: AD: Pt. Willunga, 13.14959— BE, Wollasten:; AD S59 S8N0A:

Roonmmnare Stn. ca. GO km. north of Yuta. SLY 154.

Nonttrens Trearrony. GC. Chippendale 2798, 8937, 3980: AD. BRI, CANB, NSW, NT:

en 17 km. east oF New Crown Sto. S.LX.1950,-~- J. Bo Cleland: NSW 45541, Brookes

Souk, GA. 15.VIIL1831. id; AD 9582600d) Eamiltan Bare. ca. 90 kot. north-west of

Alice Springs. 7.0.1927— FR. Ao Dale: NSW (5540: Standley Chasm, 64 hin, west ol

Alice Springs. 7.WIL1939.- Wo J. Hemdlerson; MEL: Powells Creek, 1895.— E. H.

ising; AID SB9ONTLOT. Rodinga, 5.1N.1933. 2702; AD: Hirseshpe Bend, 84.VNT.19S!,—

fh. Fabsent anil G. Chippendale 3920; AD, NSW: ca. 28 km. south of Horseshoe Bend,

LLN.1557— FH. Kempe; MEL: binke River. — L&8i. M. Lezarides 5979: BRI, CANB.

NT: no Jocality. 12.fA.1956.— GOG7- BRI, NY: on 3 kin. north of Bond Springs Stn,

DEIN ASSG— TR. A. Perry 5455; CANS: ca. LL kin. south-east uf Ringwood Stu. Sinise

Desert YAXI955,— 3236: CANB, NTs cao. 8 km. cust af Alice Springs, 5.111.1953,—

DO. E. Symon 70: ADW: ea. 19 kin. north ot Alioe Springs, S.VILL95R— VY. Tate; AD

Ys0! 188: Itpilla George, affluent of Finke River.— RB. E. Winkworth 130: BRI NT: ta.

27 bin. north of Kulgera Stn. 10.111.1954— 149: BRI, NT: va. 32 kur. senth of Henbury

Head Station. 10417.1954.— 1170) NT: New Crown Stn_ 7.VI1J955.

Qowexsnanp. Wy, Barton: MEL: Armaddilla. 1887.— 8, T. Blake 5607: BRI: Cuinie

mmiliu 291V.0094— 5659; BRI, NSW: Morven. 1.V,1934— 501: NSW: Worldstock,

OO VELN34— Eh. Bownnin 2362: MEL: Capes BRiver— HH. Clarke: NSW 45537: Mullivan

fixer, TL 1904. R. L. Grocker: AD SSTO8G: Simpsem Wesert, cu SL km. north-cust

cof Birdsville, BVUI9O39— S. L. Mvernsr 754: TAT: Noondooa Stn, I4NITIA34— 1ROA:

BAT; Blackall, LSTL 1938. 2416; BRI, CANB: Boaliran Sty, SLE Id7— 3425; BRT

BASSIA UNIFLORA AND ALLIES IN AUSTRALIA us

CANR: Tatala, 20, 1V,1945,— S460: BNL, CANB: ea. 4) kan southeeust ol Rolla

17.ViLLOt— A. A. Molland and G. Gnauck 100; CANB 31874; St, Gearge-Bollon Hd.

TW4453.— 6, E, Holbard and ©. W. Winders 6021. BAT: Mungallula. SLX 1990 —

L. 8S. Smith 598: BRE: Kindow Stu, Darling Downs. 7.XI1988— 7, Wedd S2l, BHI:

St. George, Vi1896.- Dr. Wheelers MET: tewatds Stokes Range gine Coopers Cieck.—

Go). White: BRI 014277; Wyagu, Goondiwindi district, TX.1919,

Naw Sowrn Warnes, N.C. Beadle: SYD: Condobolin. 301.1946.— Annie Bell: MEIL-

Booligl, TLachkuw River, INIKS7T— FL Retche; NSW 48509: Plaine near Bourke.

(7VLIBGR.— — id.; NSW 45400; Paroo Biver. IX1900. ik; NSW, MEL: Warrege River.

TX.1585— A. D. Blacks AD 93938009: Broken Hill, XAQI7— 7, Treakwell: NSW

H5515: Nyngan, Vit91I2— NT. Burbidge 2005: CANB; Daniliquin, 9.1.7950,-. 1, F

Constables NSW 4068: Bourke. 16.10X.1947, &. G. Cuthbertson 28: CANB 26895: Uposinut

Sto. Ga. dO knw west of Wanaaring, 20.Y.1953.— 11. Deane; NSW 45508: Broken Ell

and Tarrawines, VITL180d. 0, By ELovilind: NSW 455(8: Cobar. IVIOI1— Te fh. W,

Heulerson: NSW 45511; Cundabooka, 2,1918.-- Mrs. Holding: MEV; Darling River.

N.1887.- 1. A. 3, Johnson: NSW 43765: Taleban, east of Ranking Springs. 7.V,1953,—

SETS: NSW: Wannaring, LVIA947— L.A. §. Johnson andl E, P. Constable 997:

NSW, Winatheo St, 98 kin, west of Milparinks, 4.VL0055.— A. 8. Little: NSW 45507;

Walweth 1898. fj H.. Maiden aod J. L, Boorman: NSW 45512: Girilamboue, VIEL LBLO,

G. VW, E. Mnaw 1433: CANB: oa. 22 km. front Jerilderis on Wurlingten Pork Real,

28150 — 34h: CANB: “Myall Mandi", Tramie. 2601L1Nd6.— (445; GANB 50721:

New Wanganell. 23,N.1950.— A. Morris: NSW 45504; Broken Hill 715: ADW, NSW,

BHT: Vib Stuct Stn. near Milparinks. 271X1921— 9294: ADW, BRI: Stephens Creek,

Brukea Hill V2.VIITLU28.— 1055: ADW: Thorndale. 12.1 1024— A, Cunningham: P

Lachlin Biver. ( Periiumths undeveloped bul probably this species. J— Tow, Muaer: MEL:

Lachlan River. 187T&— l= WERL> Murrumbidgee River, TX.AS74.-— ©. 'T. Musson 137):

MEL. Namol River, L890.— LL. B. Peacocke: NSW 45516: Miandetta (Nyngan ta Cobar).

[XN 152,- L. Pidgen and J. Viekurv; NSW 15503; 96 hin, cast of Broken Fill,

S0.NUN1930.— ih; NSW Sf265: Broke Hill 2b VUU.L939 (form swith glabrous stwhe?—

J, Ho Riches l4: CANB: Tehelery, Movlamein. 28.4.19490.— 72 pp; CANB (‘Lb und ¢’):

ff kin. castnorth-cast of Broken Hill 13.X11949— 8, Hue H422: CAND: Byrrock-

14ND 1— J, Wy Vielery: SYD; Collarendei-Walaete 21NILIO%4— 0. 4. Willis

G3; CANB: Wanganelly. LS WIL 1949.

Vieronra. Uf, Ry Browne £5: CANB: ea, SO Jon. from Swan Hill 20.VITT. bade —

J. Dallachy; MeL, AD: 179 Sand hill, Pine Plains. Wimmera &.X.L86— J. Midone:

NoW 45530: Underbool, N.1915— FF. Meller: MEL: Ayoun I853.— F. Vf Beadve-

MEL: Shire of Dimboola, 17.X1.1892 and QIN 1900.— adder AIEL. NSW 49533. Winters.

1n92— J. Rowlands 8: M¥Ki.; Banuerton via Rehinvale. 31VUL954.— &. Walter:

NSW 45592; Bake Hindmarsh. X.1899— Wy W. Watts 463: NSW. Nanruly. TX.117—

Aaa: NSW: Duinosy Road wu 12 km. from Wyeheproof. NYA9IT— OH, B. Williamson:

AB. Lake Albucutya.

This species is perhaps the most widely distributed of the yenns Bassia ja

Australia.

It may appear that the narrow-linear leaf forms. (less than 1 mm. in width),

which, remarkably cnough, are mostly confined to Queensland and Now Suuth

Wales, should he separated specifically. This, however, ig not advisuble as

other distinguishing characters have nut been observed. Generally the leaves

in the dried state are linear, ie. with parallel margins, without any acti

widening towards the summit whieh is usual in the clavate leaf of B. uniflora.

The hair clothing of the leaves is + pubescent and very rarely approaching

the density of the tomentuse indumentum of B. uniflora,

The character of the style has rarely beun used for diagnostic purposes. Tt

has been found to be a good one, Tn both B. uniflora and B. diacantha the

style is + hirsute and otten the lower part of the stigmatic branches are the sami

Sometines the tubercle has a slight bend forward.

Other characters such as the limb, hase avd filaments generally constant,

One of the specimens cited with the original deseription ef Seleralaena

divcautha var. longispina ? hy Bentham (FlAustral, 5(1870)195; “Wimmera,

Dallachy") is Bassia ciacaathe (Nees)FvM, LC have not seen the other spect

mens quoted by Bentham, but part ef one of them is referred by Andersen

4 RANEST EL ISING

(Proe.Linn.Soc,N.S,Wales 43(1923)337) to B, obliquicuspis Anders, and another

purt to B, patenticuspis Anders,

3. B. eriacantha (FvM.)Anders., Proc.Linn.Sov.N.S,Wales 48(1923)328; Black,

FLS-Austeal, (1924)190; Gardner, En.PlAustral,Occid. (1930)38 _(eri-

eantha’); Black, FILS,Austral. 2nd ed. (1948)303; Blackall, W Austral Wildfl.

(1954)152— Kentropsis criacantha FvM., Fragm, 2(1861)140— Selero-

laena eriacantha (FvM.)U)brich in Engler and Prantl, Nat.Pilifam. 2nd ed,

16e(1934)534— [Anisacantha lanieuspis (non FVM.)FVM., Fragm.

7(1860)14 p.p,J [Sclerolaena lanicuspis (nou (FYM.)FVM. ex Bean

Benth,, Fl.Austral, 5(1870) 195 p.p.s Maid. and Betche, Census N.S.Wales Pl.

(1916)69 p.p.]

Additional details to description: Flowers solitary, Stametis 5, filaments

rienibrangos dilated downwards. Style, connate part + hirsute, stigmatic

branches 2, red. The long, dense, silky covering of the perianth, particularly

the hairs on the murgin of the areole are a marked feature of this species. The

limb is -+ erect.

New Sovre Watas. H. Becklers MEL (part of holotype); Darlieg Hiver (desert).

St i Victorian Expedition 1860-- N, C, Beadle; SYD: 16 ton. cast gf Broken Jil.

VLDL,

Norturius Tenarory. M. Lavurides S749A: AD: cn. 14 kin. south of Deon Well.

WVIN.L956— TR Tf. Ising: AD 96008017; Macdonald Downs Station, ca, 240 km, N-E,

af Mive Springs. 1IX.1933.

Socru Avstnamia, J. B. Cleland: AD 95620034; Abmioga, S.VIIL1931, ET

Ising 1406: AD: Kingoonya. 23,0%.1920,— 2664; AD! Ootliadatta. SIN T931.— 2902:

AD: Pedirka, 11X.1932-— 1752: AD; Turooola, 21,7X,1920.- Re IL Pulleine; AD

H5820112: Nonning, V,1931.

4, Bassia gardneri Ising, sp.nov. Fiy. 4 A-D.

Fruticulus, iudumento fulyns, Rani “ costati, tomentosi. Folia linearia,

7-A) mm, longa, 1-2 mm, lata, acuta, tenia, pubescentia, Flores solilarei-

Stamina 5; flanenta membramucea, deorsum dilatata, Perianthium fructiferum

ea. 24 mm. longum et latumn, dense tomentosuim, facies anterior converit, aliquot

estis longitudinalibus et uno costa horizontali bases spinis connecto; facivs

posterior conyexa, 3. costis longitudinalibus, Spinae 2, 5-6 mm, longae, fere

acquales, divergentes, magnam partem plerumque dense tomentosae, Tuber-

vilum obtusum, apice uncinato; costa decurrens, crassa. Limbus brevis, ineli-

atus, ciiatuy. Busis clliptica vel prope cireularis, obliqua, profunde excavata;

septa tadiata; margo dense ciliatus. Stylus linearis hirsutus; rami stigmutici 2,

sub-rubri, multi) exsecti, Semen horizontale vel Jeviter obliquum; radicula

supera,

Undershrnb, indumentum browrish. Branches + ribbed. tomentuse.

Leaves linear, 7-20 mm. long, +2 mm, wide, acute, thin, pubescent. Flowers

solifary, Stamens 5, filaments membranous, dilated downwards, Fruiting

pevianth ea. 2 mm, long and broad, densely tomentose; anterior face canvex

wilh several longitudinal and one horizontal rib connecting the bases of the

spines; posterior face convex with ca, 3 longitudinal ribs. Spines 2, 5-6 mm.

long, nearly equal, divergent, usually densely tomentose for mest of length.

Tubercle obtuse, hooked at summit; rib decurrent, thick. Limb short, bent

downwards, ciliate, Base ellipti to almost circular, oblique, deeply hollawed;

septa radiating; margin densely ciliate. Style linear, hirsute; stigmatic branches

2, pink, much exserted, Seed horizontal to slightly oblique; radicle superiur,

Wess Austaaui, ©, A. Gardner 6184: PERTH (holotype); AD 9601N004 (isn-

frre): Wandagee, Minilya River, §.X.1941— W. V. Fitzgerald: NSW 4550h: Nannine.

(X.1903,— GC. _A. Gardner 6047; PHIL: 96 km. cast of Carnarvon. 201K1941.— G199a:

PERTH; Wandagee. BXA.1H4L. A. W. Fhunphries: PERTH: Wooleen, Killer Pacdock,

23,1X.1950.— J. H. Maiden: NSW 45562: Laverton. IX,1909,

BASSIA UNTVLORA AND ALLIES IN AUSTRALLA 6

8. gardneri is recognized chicfly by its hooked tubercle, densely ciliate

murgin of the areole at the base of the fruit and long ribbed branches, It is

only knewn frum semi-wrid localities in Western Anstralia,

5. Bassia tater FvM., Vict.Nat, 7(1890)66; FyM., Icon.Austral.Salsol.Pl, (1891)

E71; Tate. Trans.RoySveS,Austral, 19(1895)80; Koch, Trans.Roy.Soe.s.

Austral. 22(1898)106; Anders,. Proc,linn.Soc.N.S.Wales 48(1923)981;

Wack, FIS-Austral, (1924)193; 2nd ed. (1948)303— Austrebasyia tate

(FvM.) Ulbrich in Engler and Prantl, Nat.PiLfam. 2nd ed. 16c( 1934 )532,

Additional details to deseription: Style linear, hirsute; stigmatic branches 2,

thick at base, tapering npwards.

Snore Austianta. BR. Vate: AD 96034019 (isotvpu); Lake ‘Torrens, 11.VI.1883.—

MN. W. Andrew; AD 9B94L096: Paris VSNITIG20— ids AD 95941041; Murnpoowie.

26VINI920— Ho GC. Andrewartha 8300; ADW; Purple Downs Stn, VIUBS— JF. B.

Clelind: AD 95820105, 95941047; Maree, 13.VI.198d— -B, L. Crocker: AD H50d N42;

Towards Lake Kyre, Caup 34. Simpson Desert. Expedition, 21.V11.1939.— 7, Bicliler

129480; AD: uw 3 km. south of Leigh Greck, 2@.18.1056.— R. Till 76: AD: Witchelina,

LLVULIS55— TM. Hilton: ADW 21309; Between Mt Lyndhurst and Avondule.

1OUV.I055.-- -M. Roch; NSW 45496: Mt. Lyndhurst. VI(LIS97 (det. Ro Late).— tel.

1y2 7p. AD, BRI, MBL, NSW: ihid. VIE, IX and X,1898 and VILLIS8O— TL ON.

Lothian 114, 115, 128, 119, 120, 122, 197. 124, 1312 AD» Near Leigh Creek, 26,LN,1959

wid LA1950.— M. Murray; AD 98034020: Cootanoorinna— didi: AD 98031021; Niipinnis

Phity— DD. EB. Symon: ADW LIST: Fariny, 20,.VK1I953— RB. Tater NSW 454975 nn

locality (possibly isotype, reeeived frou Adelaide University Herbarium on 1.1903)

6. Bassia parallelieuspis Anders,, Proc.binn.Soc.N/S,Wales 48(1923)3881, 34

H-l; Black, FS Austral. (1924)193; Qnd ed. (1948)303.~— Austrobiasie

parallelicuspis (Anders. ) Ulbrich in Engler and Prantl, Nat.Pflfam, 2nd ed,

16¢(1934.)533_

Additional details to deseription: Limb short, erect, pilose; style usttally

glabrous; stigmatic branches 2; several longitudinal weak rihs on antertor lace

of perianth; radicle superior

Sovtic AustmaniA, M, Koch 202 pops NSW d5d93) (luetotype): Mt. Lynlinest.

AILW97.— J. B Cleland; AD. 95820007, NSW 50264: Podirka. 6.VITLI933.— “f-. AD

95820078; Mt. Chambers Gorge, Flinders Bane. SO.W.1037_.. id: AD 58320070:

Hbungn S&VNLIS31- ROL. Crocker 2: AD: Abmings Creek, GVLIN39— BB. H, Tsing

2675, 2873, 2010; AD: Todirka, 22.VU11031, SL VIL2932, TIX,T982— Mo Koch 292

pp NSW 44401 (syntype); Mb. Lyndhirst IX.1899 <quotud by Anderson be. as

VIIEJ899).— 292 pp. PERTH: ibid. NASYB— 292 pps AD: hid, N80Q- Bd,

Murray I9L pp: AD: Arcoona. 16.7%, 0927,

New Socrn Warnes, N.C, Beadle; SYD; Yulpuogin. X.1939,

Nowrneky Tenkrrowy, §, A, White: AD 95951002: Finke Hiver between Crawa Fomt

ant) Horseshoe Bend. Aug, 1913.— BL. Crocker: AD 95052014: Charlotte Waters (Simp-

sou Desert Exped), 27,.V,1939,

7, Bassia constricta Ising, spaiov.— B. wilflora var inconaruens Black,

Trans.Roy.SoeS.Austral. 46(1924)254 pp. (specimen fromm Hergatt)—

Fig, 7 A-D.

Fruticulus; rami tenuiter costati, sparse tamentosi. Folia Hinearia, 3-10 mm,

longa, = Lomin, lata, acuta, tennia, pwhescentia, Flores solitarei, Stamina 5;

filamenta membranacea, deorsum dilutata. Perianthium fructiferum medialiter

coustrictum, 1-24 mm. longum, 14-1 mm, latum, apice unilateraliter produetn;

min? tenui, straminedi, sparse Eamentosi; facies anterior concava, aliquot castis

longitudinalibus costa horizentali singulart prominenti; facies posterioy concava,

Spinuwe plerumque 2, interdum inchoatac, ¥-4 min. longue, divergentes, inaequalis,

aciculares vel obtusae, fere vel omnino glahrae, Tuberculum obtusum, in costae

tenui deeurrenti. Limbus_ brevis, inelinutus, ciliatus, Basis oblonga valde

obliqua saepe sursum in flabello producto, = tumida, profunde excavata; septa

radiata, inconspicaora; margo wlaber, planus, Stylus linearis, fere vel omnino

glubur; rami stigmatic! 2, sub-rubri, Semen yerticale: radicala supera.

HG ERNEST HH. ISING

Undershrub; branches finely ribbed, sparsely tomentouse. Leaves lineur,

3-10 mm, long, + 1 mim- wide, acute, thin, pubescent. Flowers solitary. Stamens

5; filaments membranous, dilated downwards. Fruiting perianth = constricted

in middle, 14-24 mm, long, 1-14 mm. broucl, nnilaterally produced ut the summit,

walls thin, straw coloured, sparsely tomentose; anterior face concave with several

lomeitudinal and one prominent horizontal rib; posterior face concave. Spincs

usually 2, sometimes both or one only rudimentary, #4 mun. long, unequal,

acicular or obtuse; divergent, glabrous or almost sc. Tubercle obtuse, decurrent

ina thin rib. Limb short, bent downwards, ciliate. Base oblong, very oblique,

often extended upwards in a Jip; + swollen, deeply hollowed; septa radiating,

inconspicuous; margin glabrous, flat. Style linear, glabrous or almost so; stig-

matic branches 2, pink, Seed verticul; radicle snperiar-

Souti Ausrracia. E. LL tsing 4000; AD 95909007 (holotype), L, NSW, US, Z: Qod-

nadittta, 20,VIILI955.— J. M. Black sn. AD 959496028 (leetetype of Bo uniflora ver.

tncongruens Black), NSW 45546; Hergott (Maree), 148.1817 — Hy Wy Andrews AD

95708135: Murnpeawic, ea, LOO kin, north-east of Leigh Creek (Veltord). 19.VL,1920,—

J. M. Black: AD 950416020: Tleryott (Maree). JL Ig17.— ih: AD 9546027: Mum-

dowdna. 15.4.1917— N, T. Burbidge: CANB 183148: Parachilna Gorge. 11X17 98—

J.B, Cleland: AD 95817068: Mt. Lyndhurst Station, 43 bin. oorth-oast of baigh Creek.

1HV.1924— ids AD 95820142; Beresford. 25,VIIL1932.— ids AD 95820131; 6 Lin.

N,of Marree. S.W1lL1989— F. M. Ailton 1245: ADW: Mer Merna, co, 35 kin, south af

Hawker, S.1V,1955.— 1326: ADW: Mt. Lyndhurst, west side, 9.IV.1955— 1896: ADW:

Near Like Frome, alluvial pking. IO1V.I955— L4l0e ADW: Between layndhurst anc

Avondale, 10.1V.0955,-— PB, H, Ising 3903: AD: Algebuckina, ea. 60 ko. south of Godnu-

dutty. 3.X0.1953.-id-: AD UB9OD04S: Keelyn Downs, ca, 120 km, south-wast of Oocdnu-

datta. VIIT.1953. (Further collections of EH. Ising from Nvelyn Downs in AD.)— jd.:

AD 95909089; Fiaaing, cu. 55 kin, north of Lelgh Greek, 18.VI1N,1933.- 2655: ALD:

Marree, ca, 340 km. north of Port Augusta. 21VINA93L (and sn. of 18/VILELUS,

15.V1.1955 and 31-%.1955).— 2664 and $752: AL; Oodnacltta, ca, 350 km. north-west

oF Marree. 7.1X.1931 smc 26.1X.1955— tet: AD: Oodnadstta, I6VINI95S and 30,¥TT.

1953,— id; ADW 11657; Oodnarclatta, 25.1X1953— 1. 8. Jones: AD 95909007: Oodna-

dattu, S¥IDLIG4— EC, Millard: AD 95909090; Warburton River = Diamantina River

in aerth-cast ctrner vF South Australia— 7, G, 2. Osborn: NSW 45547: Mt. Lyndhurst.

XILIGI2.— DB. E. Symon; ADW 10590: Oadmadatra, IS VLINS3. (‘This specimen was

seen hy L. A. §. Johnson and determined by hin as a new species (alfinity B. patenticuapis)

on 11,01955,)- F, D. Warren: AD P5009091; Finniss. Springs, cu. 6S kus, west of Marre,

LN, 1D26,

New Sowrtr Wares. Anonym: MEL: Upper Darling R

CANB 21579 (a): 6¢ km. E.NVE, of Broken Hill, 13,XT.1949.

The fruiting periznth is longer than broad, usnally constricted in the middle.

produced at one side at summit and base + clongated upwards; these characters,

with the vertical seed, are good distinguishing fealures.

8. B. caput-casuarit Willis, Vict,Nat, 73(1057)153—Vig, 8 A-D,

This species is remarkable for its large tubercle; this and the whole perianth

is likened by its author to a cassowury'’s head and is a good distinguishing charae-

ter, The hollow tubercle in many, if not all, the species of Bussia, acts as a

receptacle and pratection for the radicle, and this is the case with this snecies.

The seed is vertical or almost so.

Vacvonta, EE. Hamsay: AD 95715012 (isotype): Meridian Road, co. 3-6 mylles (8-7

km.) senth oF Benetook, north-west Victoria. U.VITIG8O. (Molotype in ALBL, wot seen.)

9. Bassta eichleri Ising, sp.nov,—lig. 9 A-D,

Fruliculus parvus, 10-20 em, altus, ramis et ramnlis numerosis, ascenden-

libus, tumentosis, Folia linearia vel anguste lanceolate, 7-14 mm, longa, ad

Thusene ca. Taam. Jate, sursum ucominatt, sessilia, 4 imbricata, acuta, tenuia,

+ villosa. Flores sulitarei Stamina 5, filamentis membranaceis, deorsuin dia-

tatis. Perianthium fructiferum prope globosum, ca. 2 mm, longum et Talim:

mun classt, tomeritosl: Facles anterior convex, plarilus costis longitudinalibus:

facies pusterior comvexa, Spinae 2, 4-24 mm, longac, interdum inchoatac, diver-

1890.— J. A, Rivhes 72 pips

BASSIA UNIFLORA AND ALLIES IN AUSTRALIA oy

penles, aeiculares, prope vlabrae, Tubereulum parvulum, hued decurrens,

Limbus brevis, melinatus, ciliatus. Basts elliptica, obliqna, profimde excavata;

septa radiata, inconspicua; margo glaber; stipes crassus, saepe excentricts,

Stylus linearis, force yel omnimo glaber; ramis stigmatieis 2, subrubris. Seren

horizontale vel leviter obliquum; radicula leviter ascendens.

Undershcub, small, 10-20 om. high, many ascending tomentose branches

and branchlets. Leaves linear-lanceolate 7-14 mm. long, ca. 14 mm. wide in

Jower part, tupering to apex in upper part, sessile, = imbricate, acute. thin,

= villous. Flowers solitary, Stamens 5, filaments membranous, dilated dawn-

wards. Fruiting perianth almost globular, ca. 2 mm. long and broad; walls

thick, tomentase; anterior face convex with several longitudinal ribs, posterior

face convex, Spines 2, 4-24 mm, long, often rudimentary, divergent, acicular,

almost ghibrous, Tubercle very small, not decurrent, Tamb sheet, bent down-

wards, ciliate. Base elliptic, oblique, deeply hollowed; septa radiating, ineon-

spituous, margin vlabrous; stripes thick, often excentric uccupying ca, halt of

wevity. Style linear, glabrous or neavly so; stigmatic branches 2, pink. Seed

horizontal to slightly oblique; radicle slightly ascencling.

Sow Austnauia. b. Pt, Ising, 4001; AD 95907073 (holotype): BM, 1A, kL. MEL,

NSW, US: Evelyn Dowos, cw, 120 kr, sooth-west of Oodnadatta, 2HN.1955,— 3997.

AD: thid. IAIX1955.-- ids AD P5907074s ibid B.X.1H55,

The lancealate leaves, small globular almost spineless fruiting perianths

with their thick walls and thick stipes clearly divide. this species fram. others in

this surtes,

40. Bassia burbidgeae Ising, spnov.—Fig. 1 A-D.

Rami yraciles, tomentosi, Folia lincaria, 5-10 mm. longa, ca, 1 mm. Ista,

+ acuta, tenuia, pubescentia, patentia. Flores solitarei. Stamina 5, dilameutts

membranaceis, deorsum dilatatis. Perianthium fructiferum pyriforme, 14-2): mm.

Jongum, 12-2 tam. hktam, glabrom, fnseo-rubrumy fueies unterlor convexa, alnpuut

costis longitudinalibus et una costa horizontali heses spinis connecta; facies

posterior eouvexd, plnribus costis lungitidinulibus, Spinae 2, 4-2 mm. longae,

interdum une inchoato, divergentes, glabrae. crassae, Tuberculum ohtusim,

latum, saepe amplius quam dimidium tubo Jongius, interdum apice leviter

inclinato vel uneinato, in costa tenui decurrenti, Limbus brevis, inclinatus, a

apicem tubereuli ciliatus. Basis - circilaris, obliqua, profimde excavata;

septa radiata; margo glabro, Stylus linearis, glaber; rami stigmatici 2, rubri.

Semen horizontale vel leviter obliquum; radicula supera.

Branches slender, tormentuse. Jeaves linear, 5-10 mm. long, ea. 1 mm, wide,

+ acute, thin, pubescent, spreading. Flowers solitary, Stamens 5, filaments

membranius, dilated downwards. Fruiting perianth pear-shaped, 14-94 mm.

long, 14-2 mm. broad, glabrous, dark red; anterior face convex with several

longitudinal and one horizadtal cil connecting the bases of the spines; pasterigr

face convex and with several longitudinal ribs, Spines 2. 4-2 mm. long. some-

times one rudimentary, divergent, glabrous, thick. Tuberele obtuse, sometimes

more than hall as long as tube, otten slivhtly bent Forward at summit, or hooked,

deenrrent in a thin rib, Limb short, bent downwards, ciliate to summit of

tibercle. Base = circular, oblique, deeply hollowed; septa radiating: margin

slubrous. Style linear, glabrous: stigmatic branches 2. recdish.. Seed horizontal

to slightly oblique: rudicle superior.

Wusrens Ausinatia, NS. T. Burbidge 84: PERTIT (holotype), AD 9GOL0005 Gsotype):

Glenern Station. VITLISS8— Tl: PERTH: ibid, 1V.145s-

The fruiting perianths of this species are quite distinct in this group in Weiny

plabrous (although 8. tatet becomes glabrous in age) and dark red in eolour:

the large broad tubercle is unusual which is sometimes nearly as long as the

06 ERNEST H, ISING

tube. It is confined to Western Australia, and only two collectings were received

for examination.

11. Bassia holtiana Ising, Trans.Roy.Soc.S.Austral. 78(1955)111, Fig. I, 17-19 —

[B. uniflora var. incongruens Black, Trans.Roy.Soc.S.Austral. 48(1924)254

p-p. (lectotype excluded; cf. B. consiricta Ising ).]

Sourn AustrauiA. FE. H. Ising 3624: AD 95708045 (holotype): Evelyn Downs, 120

km. south-west of Oodnadatta. VIII.1953.—_ id.: sm.: AD: Evelyn Downs (further collec-

tions from type locality). 18.X.1952, 11.VII.1954, 20.%.1953 and 19.VIIT.1954 (perianth

reddish almost glabrous), 27.V¥II.1955. (leaves densely villous, perianth glabrous), 16.VJIL

1952 (perianth densely tomentose), and VIIL.-X.1952-3.— Miss Staer s.n. (Herb. J. M.

Black): AD 95942007: Arkaringa. WVII.1914. (This is one of the specimens which have

been cited in the original description of B. uniflora (R.Br.)FvM. var inconeruens Black,

yet J. M. Black did not write the varietal name on its label.)

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

My thanks are expressed to the following: the curators of the Herbaria AD, ADW,

BRI, CANB, MEL, NSW, NT, P, PERTH and SYD for the Ioan of specimens; Mr. L.

Dutkiewicz for preparing drawings; Dr. Hj. Eichler for help, advice and facilities given in

the State Herbarium of South Australia; Mr. P. G. Wilson for the translation of the diagnoses

into Latin.

CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE FLORA OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA

BY G. M. CHIPPENDALE

Summary

New records of 32 species, deletion of four species, and notes on three species are given for Central

Australia.

CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE FLORA OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA

Na, 2

by G. M. CrrprenDAaLe

[Read 13 October 1960]

SUMMARY

New yeeords of 32. species, deletion of four species, and notes on. three

species are given for Central Australia.

NOTE

The specimens mentioned in this paper, when not collected by the writer, have been

either donated to the Narihern Territory Herbarium at Alice Springs, or have been notified

by personal communication, »

In quoting specimens collected by members of C.5,1,R,0., M. Lazarides and R. A. Perry,

I have used the citation “Herb, Aust.” with the collector's initials and number. This has

been necessary, as these collectors have overlapping nuinbers, and to my knowledge, these

numbers do not represent a number from the Canberra Herbarium.

OPHIOGLOSSACEAL

Ophioglossum coriaceum A. Cunn, This species has heen repeatedly col-

lected on Ayers Rock, but has not been published as a new record for Central

Austrailia before.

GRAMINEAE

Aristida echinata Henr. 9-5 m. north-north-west of Alice Springs, M. Laza-

rides, 12/6/1958 (Herb. Aust. ML5183). 2 m, north-east of Hermannsburg, M.

Lazarides, 16/5/1955 (Herb. Aust. ML5312).

A new record for Central Australia.

Avena fatua L, 37 m. south-east of Ynendemu, M. Lazarides, 16/7/1956

(Ilerb, Aust. ML6010). An escape plant, probably from hay, and hardly to be

considered as a naturalised plant as yet, It is, however, a new record for

Central Australia.

Digitaria eriolepis Henr. Hatches Creek township, M. Lazarides, 9/5/1957

(Herb. Aust, ML6264),

A new record for Central Australia,

Eriochne isingiana J. M- Black. 2m, south-south-east Aileron, M. Lazarides,

29/8/1958 (Herb, Aust. ML5790),

A new record for Central Australia.

Eriachne mucronata R. Br. var. desertorum C. A. Gardner. 32 m. north-east

of MacDonald Downs Homestead, M, Lazaridcs, 8/9/1956 (Herb, Aust,

ML5921),

A new record for Gentral Australia.

Paspalidium clementii (Domin) C. E. Hubbard. Elkedra Station, M.

Lazarides, 29/3/1956 (Herb. Aust. ML6210).

A new record for Central Australia,

Sorghum jlumosum (R. Br.) Beauv. 14 m. north-west Ooratippra [ome-

stead, M. Lazarides, 11/6/1958 (Tlerb. Aust. ML5272).

A new record for Central Australia.

Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust. (1961), Vol. 84.

100 CG. M, CHIPPENDALE

MoracrAE

Ficus platypoda A, Cunn. var. minor Benth. Dr, E. J. H. Corner of Univer-

sity of Cambridge has redetermined a number of specimens previously placed

under F. platypoda var. platypoda, sa that the variety is a new record in Central

Australia.

CHENOPODIACEAE

Atriplex pseudocampanylata Acllcen, 13-1 m. east of Finke town, G. Chip-

pendale and L. Johnson, 12/10/1957 (NT3933).

A new record for Central Australia.

Bussia diacantha (Nees) F. Muell, Following redeterminations by Mr.

E. HL Ising of many specimens previously placed under B. uniflora, this makes

a new record for Central Australia.

Bassia quinquecuspis (F. Muell.) F, Muell. var, quinqueeuspis. 35m. south

of Napperby ITLS., M, Lazarides, 28/9/1956 (Herb. Aust. ML6082), 36-2 m.

east of New Crown H.S., G. Chippendale and L. Johnson, 12/10/1937 (NT3940).

26 m. east of Armstrong River, G. Chippendale, 25/6/1958 ( NT4651).

A néw record for Central Australia,

Bassia quinquecuspis (TF, Muell.) F. Muell. var. villosa (Benth.) R, H. An-

derson. 24 m. south of Barrow Creek Township, R. A. Perry, 3/9/1955 (Herb.

Aust, RAP5353),

A new record for Central Australia.

AMARANTHACEAE

Following critical determinations of a large number of specimens by Dr.

G. Benl, Munich, the following are new records for Central Australia:

Prilotus alopecuroideus ( Lindl.) F, Muell. var longistochyus (W. V. Fitzg.)

Benl. 1m. south of Glen Edith, G. Chippendale, 24/6/1959 (NT6237). 11m.

south of Plenty River, G. Chippendale, 14/8/1959 {NT6514).

Prilotus astrolasius F. Muell. 14-2 m. south-east of Tanami, G. Chippen-

dale, 3/5/1958 (NT4266). .

Ptilotus atriplicifolius (A, Conn. ex Mog.) var elderi (Farmar) Benl. Me.

Olga, G. Chippendale, 13/9/1956 (NT2889). 6m. south of Police Station, Harts

Range, G. Chippendale, 9/7/1957 (NT3482),

Prilotus calostachyus (F. Muell.) F. Muell. var. preocerus (Diels) Benl. The

Granites. G. Chippendale, 2/5/1958 (NT4213),

Plilotus Jusiformis (R, Br.) Poir. var. fusiformis. 6-1 m. south-cast al

Tanami, G. Chipponcale, 2/5/1958 (NT4258).

Ptilotus latifolins R. Br. var. maior (C. A, Gardn.) Benl. 22-1 m. east of

New Crown H.S., G, Chippendale, 12/10/1957 (NT3936).. Simpson Desert,

46 m. north of Andado H.S,, G. Chippendale, 7/9/1959 (NT6602).

ATIZGACKAR

Trianthema australis Melville. This is delated from records of Central

Australian plants, as the original record was based on a specimen from Char-

lotte Waters. which has been redetermined as T. galericulata. Melville.

Trianthema oxycalyplra F. Muell. 30+2 m. north-west of The Granites, G.

Chippendale, 2/5/1958 (NT4229),

A new record for Central Australia.

LEGUMINOSAE

Daviesia chordophylla Meissn. This is deleted from records of Central

Australian plants, following redetermination by Miss IL Aston, Melbourne Wer-

FLORA OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA LOL

barium, of the specimen quoted by Chippendale (1960). ‘This specimen is

now placed as Daviesid sp. aff. leretifolia RK. Br.

Swainsona burkei F. Muell. subsp. burkei A. Lee: This was omitted in

error from the Check List of Central Australian Plants (1959). The subspecies

oecurs widely in Central Australia.

MIMOSACEAE

Acacia gonoclada F. Mucll. ex Benth. 13 m. cast-south-east of Tanami,

M. Lazaridus, 22/4/1957 (Herb, Aust. ML6253).

A new record for Central Australia.

CAESALPINIACEAE

Cassia chatelainiana Gaud. This is deleted from the records of Central

Australia plints, as the record was based on a G, F. Hill specimen No. 393,

which was redetermined by Mr. D. Symon as shown in the following specics.

Cussia costata Bail. et White, 70 m, north of Survey Camp IV (about 20

m. north of Lander River), G. F. THill, 28/6/1911 (G. I’. Hill, 393).

A new record for Central Australia,

Cassia luerssenii Dornin. 23 m. west of Pine Hill H.S., G. Chippendale,

11/8/1959 (N'T6439),

A new record tor Central, Australia.

EUPHORBIACEAE

Phyllanthus ramosissimus (F. Muell,) Muell-Arg, Tempe Downs, Thorn-

ton, undated. A specimen noted while examining specimens in Melbourne Her-

barium.

A new record for Central Australia.

SAPINDACEAE

Dodonaea petiolaris F, Mucll. 2m. south-west of Lucy Creek Station, M,

Lazarides, 5/9/1956 (Herb, Aust. MLAS90L). This specimen matches the frug-

mentary type and other specimens in Melhourne Herbarium.

A new record fur Central Australia.

MALVACEAL

Abutilon macrum F. Muell. 12 m. north of Gosse’s Bluff, G. Chippendale,

4/4/1958 (NT4159).

Originally recorded by Tite (1896), but herbarium specimens seen were

withont reliable labels, Now definitely recorded in Central Australia.

My TACEAE

Thryptomene parviflora (BF. Mucll,) Domin or vel. aff. Palm Valley, G.

Chippendale, 25/8/1956 (NT2678).

A new record for Central Australia, but will need further examination when

more records are made,

BORAGINACEAE

Heliotropium. crispatum F, Muell,.cx Benth, Can be deleted from Central

Austvalian records, as was based on two specimens which have been redeter-

mined as H. bacciferum Forsk., yiz.. Ellery Creek, G. Chippendale. 15/4/1956

(NT2037), 2m. north-east of Limestone Bore, Napperby, G. Chippendale,

17/5/1956 (NT2073).

G. M. CHIPPENDALE

MYoroRACcEAE

Eremophila alternifolia R. Br. 32 m. north-north-east of Angas Downs HLS.,

M., Lazarides, 20/6/1958 (Herb. Aust. ML6131).

A new record for Central Australia.

o Newcastle Waters

+ Recorded by Smith (1956).

® New records,

Eremophila dalyana F. Muell. 7 m. south-south-east of MacDonald Downs

HLS., M. Lazarides, 8/9/1956 (Herb. Aust. ML5931). 9 m. west of deserted

Huckitta H.S., G. Chippendale, 13/8/1959 (NT6488).

A new record for Central Australia.

Eremophila exotrachys Kraenzl. Previously rarely collected but now known

to occur frequently in the sandridge areas west and south-west of Alice Springs.

It is found mostly under trees between sandridges.

FLORA OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA 103

Eremophila obovata L. $8. Smith var. obovata. Following the description of

this species in 1956, it has been recorded in many localities in Central Australia

as shown in Fig. 1.

RUBIACEAE

Anotis scleranthvides (F. Muell.) Domin. 35 m. south-west of Alice Springs,

R. A. Perry, 10/9/1955 (Herb. Aust, RAP5475),

A new record for Central Australia.

COMPOSITAE

Angianthus tomentosus Wend]. 30 m. south-south-west of Napperby H.S.,

M. Lazarides, 28/9/1956 (Herb. Aust. ML6088).

A new record for Central Australia,

Helipterum sp. nov. aff. albicans. As recorded in the Check List (1959), this

refers to the species described in last year’s Transactions as Helipterum saxatile

P. G. Wilson.

REFERENCES

Criprrnpatr, G. M., 1959, Check List of Central Australian Plants, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8.

Aust., 82, pp. 821-3368.

CurprenDALe, G, M., 1960. Contributions to the Flora of Central Australia, No. 1. Trans.

Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 83, pp. 199-203,

Smaitu, L. $., 1956. Proc, Roy. Soc. Queensland, LXVII, No. 5, p. 33.

Tate, pA. Report of the Horn Expedition to Central Australia— Botany, 3 (1896),

p. 2.

Wixson, P. G., 1960, A Consideration of the Species Previously Included Within Helipterum

albicans (A. Cunn.) DC, Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 83, pp. 163-177.

ARCHAEOLOGICAL STONE IMPLEMENTS ALONG THE LOWER RIVER

WAKEFIELD, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY H. M. COOPER

Summary

This paper records the occurrence of large stone implements, many primitive in type and

manufacture, discovered upon a series of former native occupational sites adjoining the banks of the

lower reaches of the River Wakefield. Their resemblance to material from Hallett Cove (Cooper,

1959) and also the similarity in position of the principal camps in both areas is discussed and it is

suggested that at least some of the implements may represent the earliest stone culture associated

with man in these parts of South Australia. A brief description relating to relevant physical and

floral features at present prevailing in the district is given.

ARCHAEOLOGICAL STONE IMPLEMENTS ALONG THE LOWER

RIVER WAKEFIELD, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by H. M. Cooper?

[Read 13 October 1960]

SUMMARY

This paper records the oeeurrence of large stone implements, many primi-

tive in type and manufacture, discovered type a series of lormer native

occupational sites adjoining the banks of the lower reaches of the River

Wakefield, Their resemblance to material fram Hallett Cove (Couper, 1959)

and also the similarity in position of the principal camps in both arcas is dis-

cussed und it is snegested that at Inast some of ihe implements may represent

the earliest stone cultue associated with nian i these purts of South Australia.

A brief description relating to relovant physical and Horal features at present

prevailing in the district is given.

INTRODUCTION

The River Wakefield (native name Undalya) rises in cleyated country

north of Manoora. Its water How is angmented by many small erecks and water-

courses Which drain considerable areas with vearly average raintalls of up io

26 inches, during its course through hilly country for a distance of about 25 miles.

Thenee it emerges on to the open plains through a gorge with almost perpen-

dictilar cliffs in the Dalkey Hills (vide accompanying plan) which exhibits jn

this place a fine example of rock scenery. Tt resembles a typical “gum creck”

of the Far North wpon entering the plains, its meandering course being lined

for a few miles downstream with fine examples ot Eucalyplus camaldulensis

(Red Cum), The stream thereafter wanders across almost flat country by way

of a multiplicity of bends, some so sharp as to alinast encroach upon each

other until it finally enters Gulf St. Vineent in the vicinity of Port Wakefield.

The total length of its lower course from the Dalkey Ills’ gorge to the seu,

owing Lo the extraordinary manner in which it meanders across the plains, must

be nearly 40 miles if one includes all the minor curves aud bends.

The present stream appears to be cutting itself a channel in the bed of an

old river valley which in places is about 500 virds wide anc at a point ubout

one mile below its exit from the gorge it has scoured deeply into the alluvial

banks producing a vertical cliff over 65 feet in height.

The River Wakelield rims permanently, and ulten strongly, trom upstream

until ubout lulf u mile below its emergence from the core, when its flow dis-

appears below the sandy bed, There is no more permanent ruming water

between this place and the sea with the exception at a soak, somewhat saline,

in the vicinity of Whitwarta. The river, aller good winter rains, rams as far as

the gulf, sometimes in heavy Hood, but normally ceases to flow below the spot

mentioned near the gorge durmg September or October. The sea, which rises

ahout ten feet at spring tides, extends upstreara For about half a mile above

Port Wakefield. No tributaries nor even watercourses of any consequence enter

the river duwastream from just below its exit from the hills whence practically

the whole of its normal fow is derived.

* Ton. Assaoiate in Anthropology, South Australian Muscnm,

Trans. Roy. Soc. 8, Aust. (1961), Vol. 84,

COOPER

106

a SSS

SIN Z i o & IsaTiW

ALISdMVD S3LON30 @

“sa avMoOTS

YAW INV We

= z

STONE IMPLEMENTS ALONG THE RIVER WAKEFIELD lO7

AVERAGE ANNUAL RAINFALLS IN LNerES

Plains:

Port Wakefield - . 12-8

Balaklava vn wo LE3

Hills:

Auburn 22-6

Mintaro 23-7

Watervale 25:7

ELEVATIONS IN FEET OF RaAtavay STATIONS ABOVE Low

Water Sprine Tinus, Port ADELAIDE

Port Wakeheld . f ; 18

Bowmans .. i. a ai 96

Suits . a a i 147

Balaklava .. 4 5 a 224

Ridgway .. . é _ 287

Watervale ' a . 4,859

FLORA

The flora of the plains’ country, through which the river runs below the

gorge, has mostly disappeared as the result of clearing the land for cultivation,

but scattered patches which survive serve to indicate in part some of the larger

species which grew there recently. They include Casuarina stricta (Droopin

Sheoak), Acacia salicine (Broughton Willow), Eucalyptus camaldulensis (ited

Gum), Encalyptus oleosa (Red Mallee), Pittasporum phillyrevides {Native

Apricot), Callitris propinqgua (Native Pine), Eucarya acuminca (Native Peach

or Quondony ) var Melaleuca pubescens (Blauk Teatree).

All the above species. disappear, however. after descending downstrcam to

u point a litthe above Port Wakeheld where the couutry has been almost denuded

of the local fora, being replaced with dense thickets of Lycium ferocissimum

(African Boxthorn). The littoral vegetation, commencing below this place and

working inland from the sea-shore, includes, amongst others, a sequence of the

following species: A coastal fringe of Avicenia marina (Mangrove); Arthroc-

nemum and Salicornia spp. upon the saline flats; Atriplex spp. including

A. paludosa upon the slightly higher ground, and alsu Nitraria schoberi (Nitre

Bush),

DESCRIPTION OF CAMP-SITES AND THEIR ASSOCIATED

STONE IMPLEMENTS

The principal camp-site discovered by the writer is one situated. upon level

elevated ground at a height of about 100 feet adjoinmg the western limit of the

Dulkey Hills on the south side of the river and identified upon the accompany-

ing plan as Camp A. Its location, an ideal one for primitive man, provides un

extensive view of the surrommding country generally and at its immediate foot

runs it permanent water supply along the river bed. Material for the massive

stone implements, in addition, was readily available in part from a large supply

of waterworn pebbles in the river-bed just helow the camp and also from large

angular blocks of convenient natural size weathering out of a quartzite outcrop

situated upon a hill adjoining the eastern boundary of the site.

The material employed, although comprised chiefly of coarse quartzites,

includes a small proportion of other rocks, including igneous, milky quartz,

Lu8 HH. M. COGPER

chaleedony, fossiliterons Lower Cambrian limestone and a type of quartaite,

fluviatile in origin, apparently rare in this locality, which due to its excellent

conchoidal fracture, protioued the best trimmed implements.

The presence hereahents of a large number of slighthy used hammerstones

is uf economic interest because it indicates that they were discarded after little

vse iwing to the ease with which replacements could be made from the river-

hed, This is in marked contrast to well-worn cxamples found upon many camp-

sites elsewhere in South Australia where, owing te the absence or scarcity uf

suitable material, they were iv the nature of family weasures and retained rugard-

less Ot heavy wear due to continuous use,

An examination of L70 large implements found upon Camp A reveals the

existence of two well-defined types, (1) “horsehooF-shaped cores mostly with

well-developed stepped trimming, haying in most cases disevidal or semi-

discoidal flat hases, and @) pebbles and angular blocks af casial shapes possess-

ing a simple flaked working edge.

These two groups are separated by & Jarge intermediate series of other

naissive Implements, varlable and nondescript in form which tends to merge

the whole assemblage to such a degree us to render impossible the satisfactory

demareation of any arbitrary division between types (1) and (2). It appears

cunvenient, therefore. to eonsider them as a single unit, tentatively at least,

Some “horschoof-shaped implements, type (1), derived from water-worn

pebbles, possess natural rennded or curved hases and this form, which is re-

tuined without bimming in any way, is in marked contrast to the conventional

flat-bottomed examples. Many “horsehoofs” were reduced to a state of “nver-

hang” by wear and retouching such as Fig. 11. Fig. 1, on the other hand, which

weighs 4% Ib,, and is the largest of this type yet recorded, shows Little evidence

of use, A few cxamples possess two distinct and separate teimined Hat-bottomed

wurking margins, the second being produced by merely reversing the implement

when worn and fakiog the nether side as a replacement. Vide Fig. 8 Others,

icersionally, are made from blocks with a natural "keel” (such as Fig. 7) which

is retained, the margins upon hoth sides being trimmed in the normal fashion.

Pebbles and angular blocks ~type (2)—from which uo few fakes have

bven struck, provided simple but efficient single-edged cutting and chopping

toals. No predetermined effort was made to select material nniform in shape.

the prime requirement being provision for the primitive faking referred to. Vide

Figs. 12 and 13, The nether sides of some of the implements indicate that they

had heen reversed when in use and used as hammers similarly to others at

Hallett Cove. The simplicity of construction needed for the evolution of the

mussive implements, generally. is indicated by the existence mf a comparatively

smmul oumber of discarded waste “lakes struck off during their manufacture. The

unly other large types found were two or three pebble choppers with well-

execuled stepped trimming —somewhat comparable with poorer examples in

the Kangaroo Islund series — Canper (1943) and two biface implements,

Vhe oevurrence of verv few small quartzite implements upon Site A

judicates that even the pnoresh examples of large trimmed cores were munutac-

tured deliberately as tuols and do not, therefore, represent discarded working

eures, An éxaumination of material found upon camp-sites proceeding down-

stream discloses that Une incidence of small implements —apparently more recent

unc Murundian in type (Hale and Tindale, 19301) —inereased and that of the

lurger implements decreased as the coast was approached. This rutio was ap-

parent inan évep mere marked degree upon camp-sites on the low-lying exten-

sive freas araund the head of the gulf abave Port Wakefield. The possible nse

by the earlier communitics in the vicinity of Camp A of simple thin flakes of

Wy,

Fig. 1, Large implement clerived from a Hat block, Weight 448 Ibi Uniface.

Mig, 2, “Horschoef-shaped with fat basa,

Semii-unifiace,

Fig, 3. Uniface implement with flat base,

Trimmed along one straight working edge.

Pig.

Fig.

Uniface implement, almost diseaidal, Made from a thick flake.

Ovate anifuce iplement, Figs. 3,4 and 5 have been made from superior material

and possess well-exceuted sceondary stepped trimming,

. Anintar water-worn block with primitive trimming. “Horsehoof” shape.

. Large angular block with “kecled” base both margins of which have secondary

trimmed working edges.

STONE [IMPLEMENTS ALONG THE RIVER WAKEFIELD itl

milky quartz, devoid of secondary timming, is veterred to in detail later in

this paper,

The locations, generally, of camp-sites along the lower reaches of the River

Wakefield were confined to situations upon the hanks sufficiently high to be

free from Intmdation due i heavy tlood rains in the hills, This refers more

especially to the vieinity uf sharp bends where floodwaters bank up and spread

out over large areas rendering them unfavourable for human occupation.

A small field just below Pareora H.S. adjvining the river, where a large

patch vf rceds suagests the possible existence of a soak below the surface, yielded

about 40 hammerstones anid one or two millstones but a lack of discarded chip-

pings. ‘This suggests the former existence here of 4 women's camp, probably a

Fuicly recent one, established tor domestic purposes:

Site B, upon the north bank of the river, is situated upon a raised and

éstensive level expanse of cultivated Jand which leads down in this place by

a gentle slope to the old river valley hereabouts about 250 yards wide. ‘The 60)

large implements. found upon this site are comparable with those trom Camp

A. There is no permanent water supply in the river bed fronting Camp B

at the present time, but it is probable that one may lave existed during the

period of its occupation.

A “horschoof” core with its well-defined trimmed working faces greatly

smoothed was discovered upon a rvised onltivated Held 300 wards tolaud tron

the channel of the present river. together with others in normal condition, about

wne mile below Camp B. ‘he reason for the heavily zolled condition af this

interesting specimen is difficult to explain.

All large implements collected upon the camps denoted on the accom-

panyme plan, with the exception of two bitace tools already mentioned, possess

semi-anitace and, rarely, unilace trimming, ‘The Making, in every case appears

to have been confined solely tv hammer dressing, The total number of large

implements recovered trom camps along the river exceeds 350 and the totul

distance necessarily traversecl an foot during the survey amounted ta over LO0

miles, The examination of this wea is by no means complete, because Ib was

found impracticable tu follow every small curve and bend in the meandering

stream during the time avgilable, Large type material upon camps which: mey

have been overlooked, however, is unlikely to altor, appreeiahly, the general

rend of that discovered.

Local inguiries eonfien that neither Camp A nor Camp B, the prin-

cipal sources of material discovered, liad been cxamined previously and prob-

ably nome of the others with the possible exception of one. The material

recovered, therefore, may be considered as truly representative of the stone

implements used and left behind by the former inhabitants of Uhese ureas.

An examination of a typical serics of the large implements, 47 in number,

pracheally all from Camps A and B and of which the accompanying drawings

ire representative, indicates a voncentration of individual weights which dues

not differ materially from an average of almost 2:6 lb, ‘There are occasional

specimens, however, such ag Fig. 1 (4% Tb.) and Fiv. 16 (14 lb.) widely uutside

the preyailing weights, a variation which appears to occur in many material

cultures,

Neither pebbles nor rocks. apart from Kunkar-lravertine, were found in

the bed of the civer or upon its adjoining banks, below a point about tliree-

quarters of a mile from: its emergence through the hills, to the sea, <A little

jhaterial of inferior quality, however, may have been secured upon the surface of

undulating country away from the river near a weathered bar of sancstome

which crosses the bed of the stream above Bowmans, The main portion of the

————

Trimined core, priginal form probably “borsehoaled” iy shape. Tt has. twa very

ate working taces, one evidently: serving as 9 replavenent For Eve original, Weight

. 7

A worn rind core iriplement derived from i witer-warn pebble whine briginul

rounrled base has been retamed. Some pittive gud Dresing jodicate ets acditlonal

hee as ad hammers Weieht 3 Th.

“Harselhool™ thinned core, conimencing to oxhibit siens uf wear, shown lay its sides

tentling to bectune yertiod, the result uf continued use and vonsequent metenching

OF stepiperl beings

“Horsehoat” trimmed care with the development of “sverhqge? we m excessive

vine quae Hecrasayry reshaping

A Wat water-warn pebble whiel) exhibits siniply dake Winning upon its warking ede,

STONE IMPLEMENTS ALONG THE RIVER WAKEVIELD 113

workshop material, therefore, appears to have heen transported downstream from

the river-bed and slopes in the vicinity of Camp A, Implements and hainiver-

stones of Ane-graincd quartzite pebbles towards the Port Wakefield sectiim of

the river may live been derived from Yorke Peninsula and the South Hummucks

Ranges to the west and nurth-wvest of Port Wakefield, where such material is

available. Stone for the manufacture of implements. discovered along the lower

reaches of the river, therefore, could have been secured from at Teast two sources

with a possible everlap somewhere along the course of the streara,

The existence of a very small proportion of farge implements, which exhibit

vimming and shaping of a high order, amongst the inaterial existing alone the

River Wakefield and possibly elsewhere should not be considered, without some

qualification, as being associated, necessarily with a more refined cultore period

rather than with those of similar technique bul inferior workmanship, No native

worker tu stone, however superior his skill as a eraftsman, can produce a finished

implement of the finest quality if his supply of rocks is confined la those refrac-

tory in nature such as granites, micaccons schists, evarse, gritty quartyites and

milky quartz, The trimming of all implements of outstunding merit found in

the area referred to in this paper was due te the excellence of the material, ap-

pacently limited in supply, which was utilised in their manufacture. This

supgests that they may not belong, necessarily, to a later period, Type, not

workmanship alone, appears to warrant consideration in many cases when deter-

mining, the correct sequence in which to place such artifacts where stratification

does not occur,

A few examples of the shells of Anadara tapesia, a species of seu-shell

sxtinet in this urea and elsewhere, as far as is known in all Sonth Anstralia. were

found upon several cump-sites below Bowmans, including one showing evidence

of useé.as a seraper. Another, with extensive wear, was discovered at Port Arthur

near the head of the gulf opposite Port Wakefield.

Large mitive kitchen middens composed of this species along parts of the

New South Wales coast, where it is a living form, indicute its use as a favourite

sonree of food supply, No similar mounds nar hearths have been discavervd

upun camping grounds in South Australie including the head of Gulf St. Vincent

and the Port Wakefield area where extensive stratified layers and lagoon deposits

exist, These include uriusually larce single valves up to 6% ounces in weight

and over di mehes long, An isolated ocenrrence of Anadara lrapezia shells in

situ. about ts miles upstream frum Port Wakefield, exists in a small surface

capping of Kuokar-Travertine situated apen a slight rise in agricultural land

about 200 yards from the river-bed, Its height above low water spring tides —

25 feet — suggests their possible association with a late Pleistocene terrace. The

absence of Anadare trapexia middens and their casual appearanee upon camp-

sites, appurently collected for domestic purposes, tent to suggest that they were

already Tossil forms when carried there during the native decupation,

Paired Anadaré trapesia shells. dug up in situ by the author fram a little

below the surface of a siule lagoon a few miles inland from Port Wakefield, have

been supplied for a Carbon 14 Dating which should prove af interest, even

indireelily, in relation to cerlain aspects referred to iw this paper.

DISCUSSION AND TENTATIVE CONCLUSIONS

All the camp-sites deseribed in this paper lie just within the N.E. bounlary

of the new extinct Kaurna (Adelaide) tribe, their neighbours in this direction

being the Neadjuri people (Tindale, 1940). Material discovered along the

River Wakefield. in the absence of caves and rock shelters suitable for itive

eccupation and resultant stratification which ave somewhat rare in South Aus-

lid H. M. COOPER

tralia, is confined to implements embedded ear the surface and disturhed by

ploughing during the course of agricultural pursuits in the fields, A small rock

shelter, suitably situated ut a muderate elevation in the gorge cliffs adjoining

Camp A was examined for possible stratified material, but without success.

The decomposed nature of the rock composing it, however, indicates that its

formation may be recent. A search for other shelters along the river above the

gorge in hilly country miglit prove more successful.

An examination of material from Camps A and B, the principal siles,

af which the accompanying drawings are representative, indicates that the

assemblage of stone implements is composed of, it may be repeated, iypes (1)

and (2) with an intermediate admixture of various shaped forms, which tend

to link them, as already described in this paper.

Type (1) is “horschoofed” in shape with stepped tbinming which suggests

a more advanced technique in flaking than that empluyed in type (2). The

presence of luege noumbers of examples in group (1) with execssive wear indi-

cates that it was of considerable economic importance in the camp life of the

natives and if contemporaneous with the simpler form of hand chopper (type

2) it may have been utilised for domestie purposes of another nature or for the

completion of wooden implements primarily fashioned by these of type (2).

The “horsehonf’, however, in view of its stepped trimming teclmique, may repre

sent a later cultural period.

Type (2) was trimmed with a definitely preconceived motive, irrespective

of ity natural form, for the production of a heavy implement fashioned to provide

a simple working cdge which with the aid of its weight would be quite effective

in supplying the needs of primitive man, such as cutting, chopping and scraping.

The great diversity in shape of pebbles and blocks chosen for the construction

af this type indicates the simplicity of its construction and, indirectly, tends ta

revert the primitiveness and Tack af variety of the makers’ domestic and hunting

equipment.

tt is most diffienlt ta define any arbitrary distinction for the separation of

tvpes (1) and (2) into two well-defined blocks because the: intermediaries, as

described before, tend to merge the one into the other. It seems probable,

however, that all, whether they were contemporaneous or are indicative of a

eradaal refinement in technique with the passing, of time, ure the components

Wf a stable dominant material culture which endured over a considerable period

more especially if undisturbed by any incoming intlmences from outside.

Possible uses would have inclided cutting and chopping honghs and

branches: for the manufacture of elubs, spears, wurlies or sheltery, far scraping

purposes generally, including the final preparation of hunting weapons and

dumestic appliances and also the making of toe holds for the ascent of trees

in search of food. All the above, therefore, with few excenlons may have been

employed as general purpose tools.

The almost total absence wf millstones and pounders may indicate that the

nilives of that period were hunters who relicd upon the chase to a large extent

for their sustenance,

It seeins reasonable to assume, too, that the peculiar native fora of their

times, somewhat similarly to that existing today, would have tended, amongst

nthut causes, to have made them not foal producers but food gatherers.

Tn order to attempt a trne evaluation of the significance and purpose of

archacological steme cultures of primitive furm, such as thuse referred to in

this paper, It Is helpful to bear in mind the changes in climate, fora, possible

isalation and environment generally existing at that time when comparerd with

ior recent and even historic periods. Jennings (1957) referring to primitive

Fig. 13,

Vig. 14.

Fig. 15,

Fig, 16.

A thin, flat, angular slab with a roughly fashioned working margin.

An angular and irregularly shaped water-~worn block which has been very simply

trimmed. Flat base,

A triangular-shaped. implement with well developed stepped trimming; similar to

Hallett Cove, Fig. 12 (Cooper, 1959). Trregularshaped nether surface.

A well designed implement formed from a flat wateravorn pebble, The trimmed

wurking edge extends around about three-quarters of its periphery; the remainder

being retiined m its natural shape, apparently, as a grip for the hand.

118 H, M, COCPER

tan in North America remarks: “His entire economy and, of course, his objects

af material cultnre were geared to the resources of the land.”

Stone age man, even during the carly developmental periods of his material

cullures —despite the necd for massive stone implements for his essentially

Neayy reqnirements — would have un undoubted need for comparatively small,

thin pieces oF rock with sharp knife-like edges for various light duties, such as

blend letting and ceremonial rites, eutting and shaping the skins of animals in

the preparation of skin cloaks and other suchlike duties, the nature of which

Pig. 17, A massive water-worn pebble implianent. Its stepped trimming is somewhat similar

to the more inferior examples urnongat the characteristic Kangaroo Island pohble

chopper industry. Weight 2 Ih.

Fie. 1S. A “horschoof”-shaped trimmed care found by Huliney (1895) ot Mitla, Mexico.

Figured specimens L to 27 art’ all eave implements with the cxerption uf Fin. 4, whieh

his been derived froma Hake, Figs. J, 3, 4, 5 and 11 were provided with a wnitie trimmed

workiug ouirgin; the remainder, as far as the warn coudilion of sume pormuts, appear to have

lwen semiunitace ty. design.

would depend chiefly upon climatic and environmental conditions at present

obscure. The earliest materials for such work, doubtless, were natural random

fragments of rock with sharp edges which he could seenre from the surface af

his hunting grounds. These, it is logical to suppose, he found later could be

replaced with simple and far more efficient primary flakes easily made by striking

them off a black of rack with a hammerstoue.

Reference was mude by Cooper (1960) to the existence upon certairi Kan-

garoo Island carmp-sites not only of a very limiled number of small milky quartz

implements with secondary trimming. but also an unduly large quantity of small

cores of the same material from & few of which they had evidently heen derived,

These were associated, however, with scores of simple primary flakes, many with

keen edges, some of which were lightly chipped upon their nether sides. This

offen suggests damage due to use and if true in this case it indicates that these

particular flakes were deliberately made and explains the existence of an other-

wise inexplicably large number of small working cores.

STONES IMPLEMENTS ALONG THE RIVER WAKETIELD iy

A ninnber of milky quartz cores, similar in size and shape to those of Kan-

garoo Island, were found upon the River Wakeficld Camp A, but practically

no small implements of that material with secondary triaming. There exists,

however, an abundance uf simple flakes, many sharp edged, similar to those

upun the island. The manipulation of milky quartz tu pruduce seeondary trim-

ming is most difficult owing to its refractory nature as already stated, but this

material provides, with little difficulty, thin primary flakes with razur-likey edges

ideally suitable for ght cutting purposes. ‘The probable contemporary nse of

the Jatter for such purposes by the makers of the massive implements deseribed

herein merits sume consideration,

In the absence of confirmatory stratified material the age of the River Wake-

ficld Jarge implements, similarly to those at Hallett Cove which they su closely

resemble (Cooper, 1959), must he one of surmise at the present time, ‘The

complete absence of tools of other than primilive forms, however, tends to

suggest that in part at least they represent the earliest occupation of mun in

both areas, The types from these two localities are almost stmilac in concep-

tion and some individual specimens from both areas ave weathered to such an

extent that they oun be overlooked entirely unless: examined with the greatest

eae.

The gencral situations of Camps A and B near the River Wakefield

vorge, in addition, are significantly identical with those upon the high ground

bordering both sides of the creek and gorge at Hallett Cove, and in many vases

other sites found upon Kangaroo Island.

It appears, therefore, that these large implements from the River Wakefield

area ate archaealovical in period, belong to the culture termed Kartan and

are possibly Negrito (‘Lasmanvid) in origin. The occupational periud may hye

been wetter ane colder than that now prevailing,

These early communities along the river, if this proves to be true, were

probably very small ones, later to be driven out or assimilated by Uhe advancing

Auustruloiuds or other new arrivals, The astonishingly bivh proportion of “horse-

hoof” and intermediary tepes worn, apparently, to the utmost limit of their

usefulness, may suggest that for some purposes at least they were equal ur

superior to newly formed tauls, especially in the light of the availability of an

unlimited supply of raw material. This significant proportion, upon the other

hand, may strengthen the suggestion that the communities were very small anes.

The searcity and in places the almost total absence of the smaller types,

generally recognised as more recent, along, the course of the River W akefleld to

the sea and the arous around the adjoining head of Gulf St. Vineent, together

with the paucity of food shell vemains in the vicinity of the latter, may appear

sumewhal surprising. It suggests, however, that the area as 4 whole was an

ynattractive one to the aborigines during recent times due to its aridity, large

aregs Of saline marsh. precarious water supplies and consequent scarcity of game.

FE apuv be of interest ta refor in this particular place to the existence vf

“horselwot-shaped trimmed implements discovered by W. H- Holmes in Mexico

amid the rnin of buildings apparently associated with a Mayan Period which

was described by him in 1895.

Fig. 18 is a drawing based upon the thi'd reproduction in his Plate XLII

and as wil) be ahserved it is remarkably similar in design, fneluding stepped

trimming and wear, to a typical smaller implement of “horsehoof” shape from

Suuth Austrulia, Holmes noticed other specimens of corresponding shape but

larger in bulk,

These implements were found in large numbers by [ulmes niet only in the

soil of the surrounding ficlds, but also intermixed with the adobo mortar em-

ploved in constructing the great buildings of the Mayan Period.

118 JT. M. COOPER

Holmes, in discussing the source of these implements, concludes that he

cuutcl not determine, with the evidence at his disposal, whether they were

contemporaneous with the construction of the Mayan buildings—and were in

cansequence devised to dress in some way the stone utilised in the building of

thete edifices ~ or whether they represented an earlier culture period wpon the

sam: site and were merely retrieved from the nearby fields by the Mayans for

admixture with their adobe material in order ta strengthen it or for some other

purpose now unknown,

The existence of “horsehoot” trimmed owes in Mexico, similar in type ta

those of South Austealia, does not indicate. necessarily, that both series ure of

the same antiquity. This is a problem which is governed to a considerable

degeve both by the period of time needed for their diffusion by primitive man,

Often over considerable distances — assuming that they were derived from a

chmimen source — ard alsa by the length of their persisteuce in a given Iocality,

Their use intermixed with the udobe mortar in the latter suggestion by

Holmes, thercfore, would indivate the presence of an earlier material culture

period wpon the saine: site,

The rapid expansion of settlement and commercial activities in the vicinity

of Adelaide lus necessarily obliterated, dispersed or buried the original camping

grounds inhabited by the former native dwellers of the surrammding plains and

coustal areas, These localities, fortunately, were carefully examined during

recent years by several experienced collectors and the implements retrieved have

heen classified and stored in the South Australian Museum for futuré reference,

‘The material discussed in this paper owing to its deposition, being merely

displiced and exposed from near the surface by the ploughing of the fields, assists

but little in terms of constructive stratification, but similarly ta that recovered

elsewhere upon the Adelaide Plains, it will be of assistance at some later date

when further information may enable a correct sequence of the relevant periods

to bes established.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

If is desired to acknowledge. with appreciation, assistance afforded by the

following: Mr. K. Tiller, Balaklava, for his courtesy and kind permission te

collect upon fields where the principal native camps were discovered; Mr. B.

Penna, South Hummocks; Mr. H. Fraser, Bowinans; the manager of Pureora

homestead, Port Wakeficld; Messrs. Angel and Son, Whitwarta; Dr, B. Daily,

Curator of Fossils and Minerals, South Australimn Museum, for invaluable assist-

anee in identifying certain rocks; Miss V. Richardson, of the samme institution, for

the excellent plan and drawings which accompany this paper; Mr, A, 'S, Under-

wood, Balaklaya: Mr. R. R. Underwood. Port Wakelicld; and the South Aus-

tralian Raihvays for most useful information relating to the heights above sea

level of various places.

REYVERENCES

Coormn, H. M., 1943. Large Stone Inplements from Seth Anstralia, Bue, §. Aust Mus.,

Adcluide, '7,, pp. 343-369.

Coosint, IL M., 1959. Carte Archaeologica! Stone Implements fran Iilett Gave, Sith

Australia. Trans. Roy. Sac. 8, Aust, Adelaide, 82, pp. 53-60,

diac, TL M.. and ‘Trynane, N, B, 3950, Notes on Some Wuman Teonaine iq de Lower

Murray Valley, South Ansteilia, Reo. S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 4, pp. 1455218,

Tha aves, W, HL, 15u5, Archaeological Studies among He Ancient Cities of Moxieo. Pield

Calumbien Museum, Chicago, pp. 285-288.

Jersrns, J. DA, L957. Danger Cywe, American Antiquity, Salt Leake City, Utah, U.S.A, 23,

part 2, pp, 1-328, ;

Mireoart, SB 1940. Results of the Harvard-Adelaide Universities Anthropological Mepert-

tian. ‘Trans. Hoy. Soc, S Aust, Adelaide, G4 (1), pp. L10-231,

THE OCCURRENCE AND COMPARATIVE MINERALOGY OF SOUTH

AUSTRALIAN MAGNESIAN CROCIDOLITES

(RHODUSITES)

BY D. KING, M.Sc.

Summary

The numerous deposits of crocidolite asbestos in South Australia are confined to dolomite and

marble horizons of the Precambrian and Cambrian bedded sequences. South Australian and

Bolivian crocidolites differ in chemical composition, physical properties, mode of origin and

industrial importance from the wellknown commercial crocidolites (or blue asbestos) of South

Africa and Western Australia. No related fibrous amphiboles of intermediate chemical composition

have been described in published literature and it is suggested that two varieties of crocidolite can,

therefore, be distinguished. These are crocidolite proper and magnesian crocidolite ( rhodusite )

THE OCCURRENCE AND COMPARATIVE MINERALOGY OF

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MAGNESIAN CROCIDOLITES

(RITODUSITES)

by D. Kine, M.Sc.

[Read 13 October 1960]

SUMMARY

The oumeroas deposits of erocidolite asbestos in Sonth Australia are con-

fined te dolomite anc marble horizons of the Precambrian and Cambrian bedder!

seqyMENnces,

South Australian and Bolivian crocidolites differ in chemical vompusition,

plysicul properties, mode of origin and inciustrial importance from the well-

known cammercial eracidelites (oar blue asbestos) ef South Africa and Western

Australii. ;

No related fibrous amphiboles of intermediate chemical conyposition have

been described in published literature and it is suggested that two varieties of

eroacidohite can, therefore, be distinguished. These are erocidulite proper and

magnesian cracidolile (rhaddusite ).

INTRODUCTION

Crocidolite aceurs at numerous localities in the Flinders Ruuges of South

Australia, mostly in bedded dolomitic rocks of the Proterozoic Torrensian Serfes.

The most productive of the cracidolite deposits, none of which are currently

mined, were those in the Precambrian dolomites of the Robertstown district

(Fig. 1 (6)), Other deposits oceur in the same rock sequence at Burra (Mor-

phett’s Shaft), near Eurelia and Orroroo (Lid. of Coomooron), in the Hawker

district (Hds, af Wonoka, Arkaba and Adams), and at Oraparinna Station in

the northern Flinders Ranges. Similar deposits occur in the same Precambrian

formations 34 miles south of Mt, Fox, in the Peake and Denison Ranges (Fig.

1 (1)) and in marbles of Cambrian age near Dutton township (Hd. Dutton),

In most of these deposits, including those of the Cambrian marbles at

Dutton, the crocidolite is lnoalised within zones of intense fracturing, and is

accompanied by irregular discordant bodies of a mafigneous-looking rack.

Crocidolite vems occur within this rock and extend into the adjacent dolomites,

The ignews-looking rocks are composed mainly of albite, biotite and tour-

maline and in the largest observed outeraps are up to 100 feet wide. The fol-

lowing brict petrographic descriptions, and others previously published (King,

1955 ), illustrate that these rocks are very variable in composition, distribution of

constiluenl minerals and grain size.

Specimen No. P 224/53 from the quarry Huor, Blue Hole deposit, Roberts-

town, consists mainly of albite and a very dark iron-rich tourmaline. Small

flakes of a pale biotite accompany the albite and some crystals of alkali-amphi-

hole are also present. The grain size of the albite and tourmuline varies from

0-2 t0 0:6 mms. An adjucent courser specimen contains. abundant tourmuline

with some associated quartz, decply weathered feldspar and erocidolite, Banded

aggregates of tourmaline occur adjacent to veins of crovidolite.

Specimen No. A 1476/56 from the southern [ace of the same quarry is com-

posed of orthoclase, iron-rich tourmuline and interstitial, randomly orientated

Trans, Roy. Soc. §. Aust, (1961), Vol. 84.

120 D. KING

biotite. Minor amounts of albite, quartz and yellow rutile are also present.

chemical analysis of the specimen is presented in Table 4.

A distinctly different rock is exposed in the adit just east of the main road

at Reudiger’s workings, Hundred of Bright. Specimen No. 176/55 from this

locality consists essentially of a pale-coloured magnesian biotite with accessory

I T

I3I° 135° 135° 137° 139°

» OODNADATTA

LEIGH CREEK !

;

so*

| x?

xXS

32°.

OLARY |

{ 34°

x7 }

L- Att FOX |

2- ORAPAR/NVIVA ‘

3- HAWKER DISTRICT |

4-— EUREL/A-ORROROO i

5-BURRA |

6 = ROBERTSTOWN i 262

7-OU77TON | |

SCALE IN MILES \

a 109 200 300 400 500 |

40°

Fig. 1, Map of South Australia showing distribution of crocidolite asbestos deposits.

hematite, magnetite, pyrite, quartz, apatite and rutile. Feldspar and tourmaline

are absent.

Trenches in the Hallelujah Hills area, Hd. of Bright, expose fibrous croci-

dolite accompanying a medium to fine-grained rock (P.176/55) composed of

grcen biotite, andesine feldspar and prisms of alkali-amphibole (riebeckite).

SOUTH AVSTRALIAN MAGNESIAN CROCIDOLITES 12!

The biotite grains occur in clumps which appear to be pscudomorphous after

amphibole, Small crystals of tourmaline are present. | |

The mineral described as tourmaline in these rocks differs from common

tourmaline in being readily friable, and apparently is very susceptible to weather-

ing, [t occurs as brownish-black anhedral grains which are strangly plewchireic

i ean section. The refractive index (y= 1'705: yy = 11735) is exceptionally

high,

; A sample of dolomite from adjacent to an asbestos vein at Reudiger’s Work-

ings, Hobertstown, was analysed with the following result;

Silica, 4:16 p.c; caleium carbonate, 45-8 p.c.. magnesium carbonate,

39-9 p.c.; oxides of iron and alumina, 6-68 p.c,

Thin beds of magnesite are interbedded with the dolomites of the Torren-

sian Series. There are alsa numerous rock phosphate deposits throughout the

State in the same sequences (King, 1953), These minerals normally occur

independently of the erocidolite and the tourmaline rocks,

Other Crocidolite Oveurrences.

The major producing crocidolite deposits of South Africa and Wester Aus-

tralin are confined to bedded ironstones adjacent to dolomiles in the Preeam-

brian sedimentary terrains, Miles (1942) observed in Western Australia that

“the crocidolite oceurs as conformable seams enclosed in the banded ironstones

whieh are frequently interbedded with thin bands of dolomite”, Dealing with

the Transvaal crocidolite deposits, Hall (1919) states that “the veins invariably

lie in country rocks of the banded ironstone type and close to the underlying

dolumites”.

The Bolivian deposits (Ahlfeld, 1943) are likewise “limited to the vicinity

of dolomitic beds”, but in this case of possibly Cretaceous age.

No igneous rocks are known in proximity to the Western Australian or

Bolivian deposits. In South Africa, while sore amosite deposits are considered

to have been induced by hydrothermal solutions derived from the Bushveld

intrusion, the crocidolite iy developed to a similar extent over wide tracts far

heyond the influence of the igneons rocks (Peacock, 19281.

COMPARATIVE MINERALOGY

(a) Physical Properties,

In all the deposits described above, the crocidolite is found fn a wide variety

of physical states, including an earthy amorphous form described as incipient*

or potential crocidolite (Peacock, 1928; Miles, 1942), aggregates of interlocking

minute fibres termed crocidolite wool (King, 1955), the commercial crocidolite

asbestos, and prismatic erystals described as, needle riebeckite, These distinctive

forms Of crocidolite are usnully closely wssociated and are considered to repre-

sent progressive stages of cryst#] integration in the pracess of crocidolitisation,

veHected in their chemical composition by a gradual loss of water (Peacock,

1928),

The tensile strength of the South Australian and Bolivian crocidolites is

very variable but consistently less than that of the commercial blue ashestos,

Accordingly, they aré of subordinate industrial importance, and unsuitable or

inferior for the production of protective tabries and in asbestos-cemeut products,

The weak fibre crocidolites have, however, a limited market as a refractory

packing, being a better insulator than blue asbestos (Gartrell, 1929), and as a

filter medium and medical dressing (Asilican Compound). These arc special

* A similar Forin of crovidolite from an vecurrenee in the Abriachin district of Scotland

has been uaaed Aliniuchanite.

122 D. KING

uses related to their unusual tendency to focculate in water and form a matte

by wet separation, but the demand for such products is now largely satisfied

by fibre glass materials.

(b) Chemical Composition,

The few previgusly recorded chemical analyses of South Australian craci-

dolite asbestos (Jack, 1920; Wyiaond and Wilson, 1951) are representative of

the grade of fibre which has heen mined, However, in view of the wide range

TABLE 1.

New analyses of South Australian Crocidolite.

| SAL S.A.2. S.A.3. | WAL SLAB.

80. : fi4-58 A432 49-06 54-24 L253

ALO, | 2-08 1-70 110 2-41 15]

Fey, 17-53 16-14 4-16 16-117 18+04

FeQ a-30 1-87 1-28 5-19 2626

Med 11-18 12:98 THB 11-48 13-00

Cag 0-14 0°36 6-58? (-12 0-33

Na,O 6-82 6-48 5-68 7-08 TS4

KO 12 22 1-12 0-82 0-30

H,O+ 17 Q-14 0-30 0-16 0-57

TO - 240 4.45 bed. 2-34 4-5)

TO, 0-28 0-33 O21 0-36 +26

CO; = a 6 4p* = =

SO, Wil 0-01 +02 O- 08 =

cal 0: OF — 0-17 0-08 =

Total 100-59 | H-50 100-56 100-38 90-87

Analyst PL. Hemingway.

+ Dolomite impurity.

8.4.1, Dull, carthy, lavender-coloured “incipient” crovidolite, Reuliger workings, Robertstawn.

Tho sample contains both earthy material and layers of fibres. The earthy purtion contains traces

of felspathie material together with many minote opaque praies.

§,A4.2. Pale blue silky, slip-tibte crocidolite, Reudiger workings, Robertstuwi. The swnple consists

of rrocitlolity with only traces of fine interstitial material,

6.4.3. Silvery gray, slip-fibre crocidolite, Reudiger workings, Robertstown, It consists mainly of

crocidolite containing traces of a colourless ashastos with « much lewer B.1, wid positive elonga-

tion. Dolomite is abundant as an pnpurity.

&.A.4. Lavender coloured eross-tibre ovouicolite which partly rechiges to u powder on enushing,

Blue Hole deposit, Kobertstown. Tho sample corituins bath flexible and brittle varieties of short-

fibre rrovidolite, with similar optical propertics, The flexible fibres contain litle interstitial material,

while the brittle crocidolite haa up ta 5 per cert. of extremely frie grained impurities.

S.A.5. Pale blue-grey, silky, long fibea ovovidolite—washed state, Qraparinna Stution. The

erocidolite is free trom granular impurities. A few of the fibroq have @ relatively low RT. aud

positive elongation.

of forms and physical praperties of the mincral, additional chemical anulyses

representing a varicty of crocidolite types were undertaken, The selected

samples were prepared for chemical analysis by microscopic methods, so that

they were essentially freed of impurities. Mineraloyical details of the analysed

samples are recorded along with the new chemical analyses in Table 1. Sample

S.A. 3 contains a noteworthy amount of dolomite, which is reflected in the

analyses by the higher values for lime, magnesia and carbon dioxide, and by a

proportional decrease of the clements constituting crocidolite.

12,

CROCIDOLITES

ESTAN

AUSTRALIAN MAG?

SOUTH

“BMSGIY UWIOIZ OPISNpPON yy

(RU6L ‘Gjeeurg) wIpuy ‘euosAzY ‘ouURpNaRqug,

“(LEG DL “UOETTAY 2P PMOUTA\A) “ISN “US (UAMOIRTOGOY ‘BTpOpmMods oaqy HuoryT

“(LEGL “SBE ENy WIS “Wag “PA ‘(Guissasoad yo) ayeaquacios azypopiood)

(SFGL ‘PENNY? BIATOR SALOPLOOU SrLOdg La

‘(OPEL “Olona )} BIAGOY ‘oINOpliomw suomyny

(GFT “axVIFIGM) BLATOR ‘oIpOploot snosqyT

(LEST ‘SUIRG BY TOQ8OD) PUYST opoysy ‘oypOpiPoaD

(S207 oMotad) Vonpy yIMoOy “yse\4 puepenbenyy feywypoprsoss aepnsy

USZil ‘Hooorag) wonyy qynag MM pugpenbuy feyyopwar qusid|ouy

“(BEGL ‘MWOuwd.|) BolapW YOY “4sd44 puypenbiryy toqyjoprooswy snoaqn7

(O8-haGT “Wosdung) eyyaysny ‘(_ oajopracso jruyuajod,,) YAO aqATyPoqary

‘Los-626T “uosdung) ripraasny mesa, ‘sotney AopsseurR py, “eg1[opToar

(O8-6Z6T ‘Wosdiirg) ermaysn EY Udeqse Ay ‘sedueyy Aus wuMEpy ‘ay pop.

kaa

tala deidese

€9°0 SUpPIECH +

(QIGW FRAA\) epopmacig uPEEUseyy

(aig Fao.) soasaqey BNE 10 sajopmac.%g

| |

S8- 66 | #18-K6 | 90-001] R&-66 | FF-OO1) GO-OOT| S8-L6 | PZ-OO1} OF-O0T) 8F-OOT $4001, 96-001) LE-OOT 06+66 T219.L

TIN IN TEN FO%Ip

aoUd yf, TUN TL 60-0 ‘fd

UN @e-0 20-0 UN | 30° "Oj;

ona L, UN | 89-0 TIN rO-0 HOTT, EN | 10-6 £0-0 SOL

i 1890 zL-0 £0-6 LY 96-0 Te) FT | GL-0 | 89-0 — OPH

ORE OF Z9+1 zee | ZL sa Mek BY-e 09-3 go-Z Oe-g Lo-@ | 16-1 +0°8.

fE-0 GEO 7) OL | OPO OF-0 TL-0 60-0 LO-0 | FO-0 90-0 92-0 85-0 On

G2-9 FE-9 LL-9 O8-9 ge.g ag-e GO-8 1-9 oT: GLa 10-9 gree 00:9 ra) OPEN

oo +0-T OF +O zL-0 Le OT-% TE°1 Imo g1:0 61- 11-0) OF-0 6F-0 OB)

10-00 LE-SL | PE TE, O8-OL | GEL GL-EL OS FT | BOO Gel 83:5 LED | GPa F6-£ 95°8 O38

cama) 80 eoEty [ues | Tei) RO-0 TIN TENT 10-0 10:0 OT

OL-St - GL-ET | TROT | 91-SE | 86-81] O0¢- FE] O9-ct | S8-LT | F9-38 | SP-Os | F9-RE | GO-9G) EB-8E! 9R-0z "Ora

€2-0 | OL-e BL+T ee-E 06-8 06°E 99:0 | 0-0 noo | BO RL-O Fe-0 | -€0-0 "oF1¥

- | os ae} |

fl |) «&T a1 IT Or 6 8 L 9 | @ e . & eT

Blac BIPNy RYURQSLY TPYNOS BLAITD ST POTTY mony Wynag WIPRISOY W283 AA

“sosdjerre poysTpqnd Jo AWwuUnNs — soqwaqse sujoOplnod Jo uoTgeOdUtOD pRATUUOT

VTaAViL

124 D, KING

The analyses show that the various forms of erocidolite from the South

Australian deposits are of uniform chemical composition, and wre largely com-

posed of silica (54 p.c.), ferrie iron (16-18 p.c.), Ferrous iron (2-6 p.c.), magnesia

(11-13 p.c,) and soda (6-8 p.c.), :

The analyses listed in Table 2 are representative of the published chemical

analyses of crocidolites, They show that the South Australian crocidolte 1s

identical in chemical composition with asbestes from the Cochabamba Province

of Bolivia (Ahlteld, 1943), but differs considerably from the commercially im-

portant eracidolites mined in South Africa and Western Australia, Thus, two

varieties of crocidolite can be identified on the evidence of chemical composi-

tiou and correspond with the two different types recognised in the marketing

oF evocidolite,

1, The common variety of erocidolite (crocidolite proper or blue: asbestos )

from South Africa, Western Australia and Rhode Island is a sodium iron silicate

witli a subordinate content of magnesia (1-4 p.c.). Ht is a high quality asbestos.

2, ‘The limp and silky asbestos which is found in South Australia and

Bollvia is a mugnesion crocidolite and differs from the common variety in eon

laining from 10-L5 p.c, magnesia and up to 5 pc, alnina, which take the place

of furrous and ferric drom The silica content is slighUy higher in the magnesjan

varieties. Bababndanie from India and rhodusite from Siberia (Smeeth,

1208) are also to. he classed chemically as mayuesian crocidolites.

The available analyses provide no evidence of the existence of any croci-

dolite intermediate in composition between the two varieties,

espite the cantrast in chemical composition, the two varieties have in

cummon the peculiarity of ovcwring in any one deposit in a number of physical

states, including the emorphous or incipient form. Miles (1942) remarks that ...

“the close similarity in composition of the pure crocidolite to ‘potential’ croci-

dolite and to the associated host rocks from both Western Australia and South

Africa is remarkable”. This is equally true of the mayuesian cracidolites.

The superior insulating qualities of the magnesian crocidolite is probably

to be velated to the high magnesia content. The much lower tensile strength

uf the magnesian varicty accords with the observation of Dutoit quoted by

Frankel (1913) that the strength of crocidalite is proportional to the amount of

ferrons oxide tn the molecule—2-6 p.c. IM muguesian crocidolite as compured to

17-19 pc. in blue asbestus proper, A higher silica content (54 p.c, as compared

te 52 p.c.) and higher magnesia content may account for the greater brittleness,

as was found with chrysotile asbestos (Soboleff and Tutarinoff, 1953),

fe) Optical Mineralogy,

The optical constants of crocidolite and magnesium crocidolite are Given in

Table 3, The data on the South Australian crocidolite is a combination of the

pulilished work of Wymond and Wilson (1951) and determinations by M. J.

Bucknell on samples colleeted by the author, Only slight variations from the

mean optical constants given were observed in the numerous specimens

examined,

The main difference to he noted is the lower refractive index of the mag-

nesian crocidolite, which is even more evident hy reference to the complete

determination for South African blue asbestos by Peacock (1925), viv.

a= 1-695, B= L699, » = 1-706

(d) X-ray.

X-ray studies of the magnesian crocidolite from Bolivia und the common

varlety tram South Afriea by Whittaker (L019)... “show a greater resemblance

to ane another than to bre photographs of other amphibole varieties. Tb is

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MAGNESIAN CROCIDOLITES 125

thus confirmed that the mineralogical classification of the Bolivian material as

crocidolite is correct, in spite of some considerable differences in properties from

South African crocidolite’, Garrod and Rann (1952) also observed close simi-

larities in the unit cell dimensions of Bolivian and Western Australian crocidolites.

(e) Electron Micragraphs,

The electron micrograplis (Figs. 2 and 3) provide a farther means of com-

parison of the crocidolites. Fig. 2a is a sample of the best grade blue ashestos

from Wittenvom Gorge, Western Australia, and Figs. 2b, 3a and 3b are magnc-

sian crocidolite from the Blue Hole deposit, Rohertstown, South Australia, The

specimens were prepared by teasing and dispersion in water and separation

of the finest fibres which remained in suspension. These were dried on col-

lodiou films on the microscope specimen carriers.

TABLE 3.

Optient! eonstants of Grocidalites.

Craovidalrts Alagnesion Cvoetileclite

Western Ausiratia South Anstralia

Miles, 142

Retractive Index a =

p 1-695 a

ou i — 1-670

Pleoghroism Ntrenier Strong

XxX Deep prussigg vila Blne green {or sky blue)

Yo | Trdige blue Yellow to greenish vellow

vA Yellowish green Violet

Hxvinetion NAC | 2 te 3 degrees or rss {to 6 degrans

Absorption Btrong Strong

Birefringence Weak Weale to morerale

Elongation Leugth fret Leneth fast

The micrographs illustrate the superior quality of the Western Australian

mineral, which is seen to be frayed longitudinally into ultrafine unbroken fibres

which are bent in places into smooth curves. The fibres of the Robertstown

asbestos are much shorter and coarser by comparison, with some irregular broken

edges (Fig. 3a) which may be due to intergrowths of other minerals, such as

tale, as observed in sorne thin sections,

In hoth cases, the finer fibres appear to be tubular and similar in this respect

ta chrysotile asbestos (Bales ef al, 1950). ‘The tubular form of the magnesian

erocidolite is clearly evident from Fig. 3b, at X 15,000 imagnification. This

micrograph shows the presence of discontinuities along the length of the tubicles

marked by darker-coloured rings orientated normal or slightly oblique to the

length of the fibres, The orientation of the rings is consistent in individual

fibres and may correspond to crystal directions. The minute cylindrical partings

are commonly of slightly greater diameter than the adjoining sections of the

individual tubes (Fig. 2b), and are similar to the “multiple tubes” which Bates

et al. (ap, cit.) described in chrysotile.

ORIGIN

Tt is evident from the investigations ciled that the process of crocidolitisa-

tion is largely confined to rocks of dalomitic composition; and that, in the case

of erocidolite proper as found in Western Australia and South Africa, it involved

the recrystallisation of rock material in situ, under conditions of mild load meta-

morphism,

126 D. KING

Peacock (1928) conceives crocidolitisation as . . . “a mild, static, non-

additive metamorphic process resulting in the chemical union, along soda-rich

bedding planes, of the necessary constituents already in situ”. The process is

described as a... “sweating action, facilitated by interstitial rock moisture, and

induced by 2 moderate rise of temperature and pressure such as would result

from simple burial of the ironstones to moderate depths”. The same conclusions

are recorded by Miles (1942) in his report on the Western Australian deposits.

The magnesian crocidolites are found similarly in proximity to dolomitic

rocks, but the mineralogy of these deposits is indicative of a different mode of

origin which would involve the introduction of some of the constituent elements

by hydrothermal solutions.

TABLE 4.

Chemical analysis of the tourmalinised bincitie rock, Bluc Hole deposit, Robertstown,

S10, 49-38

ALOg | 20:40

Fe,0O, 2-70

FeO 1-60

MgO 8-20

CaQ 0. 62

Na,0 15

KO O58

H+ 1-08

HO — 1-96

80, (02

Ol 10

Total 99°67

Ahlfeld (1943) considers that the magnesian crocidolites of Bolivia are a

product of dynamic metamorphism, accompanied by the introduction of iron

und magnesia by thermal solutions. Hematite, pyrite, chalcopyrite and the

calcium boro-silicate, danburite are assuciated minerals.

The magnesian crocidolites of South Australia are likewise confined to

bedded dolomites and marbles, but arc localised in faulted zones and commonly

jn intimate association with small and irregular bodies of albile, biotite and

tourmaline-bearing rocks. Wymond and Wilson (1951) have described such

rocks from Robertstown at meta-dolerites and tourmalinised meta-dolerites and

attribute the crocidolitisation to . . . “late magmatic activity associated with

‘doleritic’ intrusion”. Rocks associated with the Oraparinna crocidolite deposits

are also classed us dalerites (MeBriar, 1949). The writer has since expressed

the opinion (King, 1955) that the so-called dolerites are not intrusive igneous

bodies but are of metasamatic origin. The evidence favouring this view is con-

sidered below.

The igneous-looking rocks vary considerably incomposition. Their prin-

cipal constituents occur in the following combinations — albite-tourmaline-

biotite; orthoclasc-biotite-tourmaline; biotite; biotite-andesine-tiebeckile. Albite-

biotite types with variable tourmaline are the most abundant (Wymond and

Wilson, 1951), Marked variations such as these are found within individual

exposures and the erratic distribution of tourmaline is clearly apparent in the

outcrops,

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MAGNESTAN CROCTIDOLITES 127

A sample of the freshest available rock from the Blue Hole deposit, Roberts-

town, was analysed with the results shawn fo Table 4. A pelrographie descrip-

tion of this sample (No. A 1476/56, above) reveals av unusually high content of

orthuclase, reflected in the chemical analysis by uw ligh potush content (9-58 p.c.).

Although albite is the more common feldspathie constituent of the rocks ex-

amined in section, and probably in all of the more highly decomposed exposures,

the low content of CaO (0-62 p.c.) does not accord with the classification of

these racks as dolerites. The average lime content of Tasmanian dolerites, for

exainple, is 11-34 p.e.

Over extensive areas, these albite-bivtite igneous-looking rocks have been

found only within the dulomitic members of the bedded sequences,

The principal mineral constituents of these rocks also oveur in vartithle

umeuots as replacement clots and veins in the adjacent dolomites. A specimen

frany the Hallelujah Hills deposits (65/56) is described as a imetasomuytised

dulomitie rock composed of tourmaline, dolomite and albite. Vesicle-like struc-

Lures evident in the hand specimen are composed of albite and granular dulo-

mite enclosed by an aureole of fourinaline. Another specimen (PI77/353) from

Reudiger's Workings is a dolomitie marble which is replaced in small clots by

hintite, feldspar and ferruginous material, Tlemutite is alsindant in the inter-

stices of the marble.

The mincral assemblage of the eroeidolite-hearing rocks is in many respects

comparable with that of the tale deposits of the Gumeraeha district, distant some

sixty miles southerly of Robertstawn. Tale is locally abundant in the dolomites

i proximity to the asbestos occurrences, while albite, tourmaline, rutile, amagne-

sian-rich hiotite (and phlogopite), pyrites and apatite are common to both types

al deposits, According to Stillwell and Edwards (1957) the formation of the

tale bodies involved altcration of maguesian rocks by soda-rich solutions,

It is envisaged, therefore, that the biotite-albite-tourmaline and related cock

types resnited from metasomatic alteration of doluniutes by hydrothermal soh-

tins, derived from a deep-seated acid igneous source, and which entered the

dolamites along existing fault zones. The formation of cracidolite would mark

a lute stige in these processes. This postulated conversion of dolomite inte

alhite-hiotite-tourmaline-rich rocks and crocidolite would involve the introdue-

tim Of solutions rich in soda, ferric and ferrous iron, boron and possibly sili¢a

and alurnina. Lis inferred from the constant assuciation of the crocidolites with

dolumites Hat the magnesia is derived from the dolomites, and not introduced,

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

This contribution is largely based on data obtained while the writer was

employed as a geologist with the Mincs Department of South Australia, Must

helplul laboratary determinations were contributed by colleagues in the Depart-

ment. These inchide all chemical analyses performed under the directivn al

T. Frost and petrographie and mineragraphie studies by A. G. W. Whittle and

M. [- Bucknell, The electron micrographs were taken at the Physies Depart-

ment, University of Adelaide.

The assistance of Dr. A, B. Edwards, C.S.LR.0., Mineragraphic investiga-

tions, in the preparation of this paper is greatly appreciated.

The uuthor is grateful to the Director of Mines of South Australia (Mr.

‘lL. A, Barnes) for granting permission to publish.

REFERENCES

Auteeno, F., 143. Los Yaeimientos de Crocicdolita cn los Yungas dé Cochabamba, Notus

Muse ly Plata, 8, pp, 555-371.

Bares, T. PF, Sano, L. Band Mink. J. I, 1950. Thbular Crystals ot Chrysotile Asbestos,

Selence, 111, 2880, pp. 512-543,

128 D. KING

Cnester, A, H., and Camns, F_1., 1887, Crocidolite fron: Cumberland, Rhode Island. Amer.

Journ, Science., Vol. 34, pp. 108-116,

Franken, J. J., 1953, South African Asbestos Fibres. Min. Mag., 89, pp. 73-83, 142-9.

Cannon, R. L, and Hann, C. S,, 1952, Preliminary X-ray Studics of Crocidolite and Amasite-

Acta, Cryst., 3, p, 285.

GaurretL, W. H,, 1929. Relative Heat Conductivities of Samples of Asbestos. Mining

Review No. 50, S. Aust, Mines Dept., pp, 40-45.

Gumucio, J, F., 1949, Memorandiun Sobre los Yacimientos de Asbestos del Chapare, Mineria

Boliviana, Vol. 6, No. 44, pp. 8-11.

Way, A, L., 1918. On the Mode of Oceurrence and Disitibution of Asbestos in the Trans-

vaal, Trans. Geol, Soc. S. Africa, Vol. 21, pp, 1-36.

Jack, R, L., 1921. Report on the Ashestos (Crocidolite) Deposits on Sections 2A and 3A,

Hundred of Bright. Mining Review No. 38, Dept. of Mines, S, Aust., pp, 48-53.

Kinc, D., 1955. Investigation of Asbestos Deposits in the Rohertstown and Truro Districts.

Mining Review, No. 105, Dept. of Mines, 8. Aust., pp. 58-73.

MeBriarn, E. M., 1949. Petrological Examination of Kocks from the Oraparinna Asbestos

Deposit at Oraparinna. Mining Review No. 87, Dept. of Mines, S, Aust., pp. 179-180.

Mines, K. R., 1942. The Blue Asbestos Bearing Banded Iron Formations of the Hamersley

Ranges, Western Australia. Bull. No. 100, Geol. Surv., W. Aust.

Peacock, M..A,, 1928. The Nature and Origin of the Amphibule Asbestos of South Africa,

Amer. Min., 13, No. 7, pp. 241-286.

Ripeway, J. E., 1949. Asbestos Deposit—Oraparinna Station, Mining Review No, 87, Dept.

of Mines, S. Aust., pp. 175-179.

Smirson, E. S., 1929-30. Contributions to the Mineralogy of Western Australia, Ser. V,

Riebeckite, Hamersley Range, N.W. Diy. Proc. Roy, Soc., W. Aust,, 16,

Smeuri, W, F., 1908, Notes on a Variety of Riebeckite (Bababudanite) and on Cumming-

tonita from the Mysore State. Ree. Mysore Geol, Dept,, Vol, 9, pp. 85-94.

Sououerr, N. B., and Tatarmorr, M. V., 1933. Cause of Brittleness of Chrysotile Asbestos,

Econ, Geol,, 28, 2, pp. 171-177.

Stuwewy, F, L., and Epwarps, A. B., 1957. Petrology of the Gumeracha Tale Deposits.

Bull. No, 26, Geol. Survey. of S. Aust., pp. 31-49.

Wiateasee E. J. W., 1949. The Structure of Bolivian Crocidolite, Acta Cryst., 2, pp.

Wreaonw, A. P., an? Winson, R. B., 1951, An Occurrence of Crocidolite néar Robertstown,

South Australia. ‘I'rans. Roy, Soc. §. Aust., 74 (1), pp. 44-48.

D. Kine PLATE |

Plate 1. Electron micrographs, at x 5,000 magnification, of crocidolite

proper from Wittenoom Gorge, Western Australia (a), and magnesian

crocidolite from Robertstown, South Australia (b).

D. Kine PLATE 2

a oa

Plate Il. Electron micrographs of magnesia crocidolite from Roberts-

town, South Australia. The top figure (a), at x 5,000, illustrates incon-

sistencies in the fibrous habit and the lower figure, at x 15,000, shows the

tubular form of the individual crystals.

OUTLINE OF THE BIOSTRATIGRAPHY OF ANDAMOOKA

OPALFIELD

BY N. H. LUDBROOK

Summary

Precious opal occurs at Andarnooka in conglomerates interbedded with sandy clays carrying a rich

microfauna of arenaceous foraminifera of Aptian age. A notable discovery from recent sampling is

the presence of late Pleistocene or early Recent marine mollusca and foraminifera in sediments at

the top of several of the shafts. This confirms the belief that late Pleistocene-early Recent high sea

levels converted the area from Spencer Gulf northwards towards Lake Eyre into an extensive

estuary.

OUTLINE OF THE BIOSTRATIGRAPHY OF ANDAMOOKA

OPALFIELD

by N. H. Lupsrook®

[Read 13 Octaber 1960]

SUMMARY

Precious opal oceurs at Andamooka in conglomerates interbedded with

sandy clays carrying a rich microfauna of arenaceons foraminiferu of Aptian age,

A notuble discovery frou revenl sampling is the presence of late Pleistocene

or carly Recent marine mollisca and toririnifera in sediments at the tup of

several of the shafts, ‘his confirms the beli¢f that late Pleistocene-early Recent

high sea levels converted the area from Spencer Gulf northwards towards Lake

Eyre intw an extensive estuary,

INTRODUCTION

The present paper is based on mieropalaeontological examination of 37

samples collected from 17 shafts over a wide area of Andamooka Opalfield by

L. G, Nixon and M. B. Langsford in July and August 1958, The general geology,

structure and economic geolagy of the field were discussed in a recent report

by Nixon (1960), but biostratigraphic details were not included.

Almost without exception the Cretaceous and younger rocks are extensively

kaolinized, a feature commonly produced by weathering in arid parts of South

Australia and not of any particular stratigraphic significance. As a high pro-

portion of the Lower Cretaceous foraminifera are arenaceous forms they survive

the process of kavlinization but are generally preserved as distorted and deflated

tests which are not always easy to identify.

STRATIGRAPHY

The sequence of lithologic units occurring on the field was tabulated by

Nixon (1c. p. 17). Disregarding the red-brown earth and red sand dune cover,

three stratigraphic mnits ure present:

1, Late Pleistoucene-early Recent marine gypseous sandy clay.

2. Lower Cretaceous (Aptian) mottled red and grey clays, kaolinitic sandy

shale and kaolinitic sandstone and conglomerate.

3. Upper Proterozoic (Marinoan) dolomites, quartzites, chocolate shales and

brown sandstones,

UPPER PROTEROZOIC (MARINOAN)

The only pre-Cretaceous material examined was sample F 195/58 (3) from

a bore near Bickford Ridge which entered chocolate shale and brown sandstone

at 80 feet. These belong to the series of dolomites, slates and quartzites tenta-

tively correlated with the Marinoan Serics. They unconformubly underlie the

Lower Cretaceous and outcrop on the north and cast of the field (Nixon Le.

p. 15 and Fig. 1).

® Palacontologist, Gcological Survey of Sonth Australia. Published with the permission

of the Director of Mines,

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. (1961), Vol. 64.

LEGEND

Marine Pleistocene ......-- a

Cretacecus outcrop

Opal warkings

Opal Horizon ..-.----...-.-%

Scarp: Approximate limit

of Cretaceous

Cha o

Stephens |

Gully

ANAM oH

tle

7ORRE Ns

NY ADELA {DE

VICTORIA

tiny

Phy ih

1 =

aM mg

Zaye,

Paddock

§ Bova

Moditied after Nien (960

Andamooka opal field showing Cretaccous outeraps and opal workings

BIOSTRATICRAPHY OF ANDAMOOKA OPALVIELD 1a

LOWER CRETACEOUS (APTIAN)

The Cretaccous sediments al Andamaoka consist of approximately 73 feet

of interbedded eleys, shales, sandstones and conglomerate, The upper hult

of this sequence was sampled from the “bottom gouge” or “hottom toe dirt”

upwards to above the opal Lorman. The accompanying Table 1 shows the

distribution of Foraminifera within the harizans “bottom: gouge”, “heluw the

dirt”, “toe dirt’, “opal horizon”, and “hove opal horizon”, Twenty-five species

of arenaceous foraminifera are present, only uine of which have been deserihed

or ean be identified at present with named species. They aro, however, all

commen species occurring in the Great Artesiim Basin, The assemblage is

characteristic of the Aptian (Rema Formation). The “bottom gouge” and toe

dirt clays are distinguished by an abundance of Heplophragmoides chapmani

Crespin, This species has not been recognised ahove the Lower Albian in South

Australia and oceurs in varying abtmdance In the Aptian mainly in siltstenes

and mudstones. YTextularia anacooraensis Orespiw with which it is assorted

in most of the Andamooku sumples is known to oecuy anly in the lower part

af the marine Aptian, to which Gandrying sp. 3 is alsa limited.

“Genus A” occurs in the Aptian intersected by water bores at Marree,

Most of the associated species lave less restricted ranges,

The distribution table indicates né considerable stratigraphic range and the

whole of the thin Lower Cretaceons sequence prohably shoukl he placed In the

luwer purt of the Aptian equivalent of the Roma lormution.

(1) The “bottom gouge” or lower toe dirt horizon {s represented by sample

FP 146/58 at 29 feet depth in Terry Moore’s shaft at Blackboy. The maternal és

mostly clay, very rich in Textylaria anacooraensis and other associated foramini-

Fera which constitute almost the eutite residue after washing,

(2) Between the “hottont gouge” and the “toe dirt” the sediments consist

of fine grey-white kaolinitie and sericitie sandstone with a poor foraminiferal

assemblave, Most of the samples appear to be unfossiliferous. but a few indivi-

duals of Trochammina sp.. Haplophrawneaides chapmani, and Textilaria ana-

cooraensis were recovered Fram samples F 159/60 and F 160/58 from the lower

part of Opal No. I, nerthavest of Hallion Mill. This horizon is probably repie-

sented in F 162/58 to F 166/55 from the White Dam area, F 167/58 and F 165/58

from Schualton’s Shaft, Treloar Hill, and F 170/58 from Opal Creek, Sample

F 167/58 carried an unusual test of Trochammina sp, 2 in which the agglutinated

grains are of opul,

(3) “Toe dirt®. Opal miners apply this name to.a muttled, partially ferru-

ginized clay or shale immediately below the opal horizon. Most of the choy

disappears on washing leaving a residue vich in arenaceous foraminifera, mainly

Haplophragmoides chapmani and Textularia anadcooraensis. Poraminiteral tests

are heavily furruginized and brick red in colour, F 139/58, F 145/58, F 145/58,

F 153/58, F 158/58, F 169/58, f° 174/58, F 177/58, b' 180/58, IF 183/58, F 185/58,

F 187/58, F 189/58, F 190/58 and I’ 192/58 were taken from this horizou.

(4) Opal Horizon. The conglomerate band in which the opal coumonly

occurs is represented by sample F 140/58 from W, Cronin’s shaft at The Saddle

and is distinguished by the presence of Ammoabaculites australis (Mowchin)

which oceurred in only one sample below this level, At German Gully the

cimylomerate carcies fossil] wood and the pelecypod Pseudavicula australis

(Moore),

(5) Above Opal, The seciments abave the opal horizon are heavily hanlin-

ived sandslowe and gypscous shale with a rather sparse microfauna in which

several species of areriaceous foraminifera are generally represented in small

N. H, LUDBROOK

132,

“suamaeal? 67 yTepungye wu

SIKOUMgads CF-[T uOTIUIOD «3

suauliaads Q[-) quanbad} 7

smautpsds 9-9 alwI J

stlamlaads g-7 ale AduA A

if | ] 1

—|———— + S| zp aml ay Hy my Hp aA Ke - —f/-fe—-}o =f] -j -]-l-jJa :

JF) @y=)-f-jJ-}]-!'—-jy-y rm] mpm] se— — —)/-yFr-}]-.-f;-l-|2z

= JF)-fryp-] -— | - fH ep epee yr Hypa] aH} ade -~{S]-]= Alo 3

sf II a) et ee} ] Hd eH Jj ai, = -|—~ Joo—— ———

| A | =

eee Pape] = Pt) a flal_]] 2 Meee 2 (Pe ye atfe= = Rye /al/ave es

| j—_|—_|—_} 2!) =} tf} alo} ey] — = —~ f=]; AP—]—fr—y)—-le—_epr es —/Apmlm}aye A ayn:

= I — | -| A | YRbpa puinnnaajpdoddsy

| -— : —- A = » Tunuysne DUnibMnpandouds

= a; -|}-];als)/—-|af ae] ea] a a) a BAS wLanprapoy.

— —— Al = | rfefelefefe}-}-};-—]-}- la -/|rlj-/|—-|—-]- B)

Oal,o-f—}-}—-}/-y- fay @, =] Hp ep ede glaltal]—-|]—-|}-Jj/aleja ——-|—-

Fl-|]-]=-/-;=]@)/-|]p¢)a)aj;pl]-7- 4a —~j;A #fef—}-};—'-}-]-]- = a

SSS pea tah) a) = pep eK) apa eat e | =H t= =r ee Aly

da};A};—f-J-];n£}—-]a;g)a}—-|e}-)- a)/apja;arl}—-}]-'-}aA aAl-] ala A al]—-|/ai}—-—)a oe

=| -| A [afm prteHfe— H=fapae fete} = — 4 Se = TED Gould Fr

e aad ~d wont ~- = ne z ==> A + pj's — Q = = = — S > = ry —> aw = RIMQOU RE

- = - 3 ]- ——! ora inryloray

ro a => = = L dS soproumbnaydopdn gy

— — 1 =i ROS Lyotp saplow Baty Eada Ay

-~JA}-f }ay—f—-f}efy—-jefe ==) — - Tid /dbhajPplajg |e | v 7) i VET dniqdejdny

a -j- —|- - =|- H S WIHT

FS =|=4|= A]; — i -j|-[- A apoUIsH) VUISO)eT

: dj eine =|F a = T ds punuininwadiy

S)sp epg) ee) a oS] ty tet] Ss) Aqui aydug

Lente eek etl Oe el u rl ee ol

SC) OS) el we Bloat) mo au Land o oa ws a1) 1

oS) =| me) ee) ee] we) ey] a oO a Soleo — ae i

sil ot] ctl an) | cal ai] sh] ge] aa an ww) sy] gt et) oe] oe

) OO) co} we) &] w] Oo wm) OO we D oe al val oh Te) oo

uez Woy edo GAoqy [BEG 4p acy, qaIp aby Amnon

AOTSEL. BIG} OST

"ppaytdo Ryoomepuy va)

‘T ATV

UBIO] SNOIDeIAID JO UOTINGITISIEL

BIUSTRATIGRAPHY OF ANDAMOOKA OPATATELID 133

numbers, Textularia anavooraensis and Trochanomina minuta are usually pre-

sent, Haplophragmoides chapmani was absent from all but two samples.

PLEISTOCENE-EARLY RECENT

The detection of Recent species of foraminifera and mollusca in samples

taken from Kevin's shaft, German Gully, and W. Cronin’s shaft, The Saddle, is

quite unexpected. This discovery provides positive evidence of the existence

of a late Pleistocene or early Recent estuary extending northwards from Spencer

Gulf by way of Lake Torrens towards Lake Eyre where brackish water or

estuarine foraminifera were recovered trom clays intersected in twa shallow

boreholes and from a thick shell bed with Coxiella gilesi 36 feet above the

present level af the lake (Ludbronk, 1956),

The foraminiferal assemblage in the sample from Kevin's Shatt consists of

Cribvobulimina polystoma (Parker and Jones), Nulecularia Incifuga Detrance,

abundant Peneroplis planatus (Pichtel and Moll), Discorbis mire Cushman,

Elphidium ef. eraticulatum (Fichtel und Moll). Associated miolluscan species

are Macoma deltoidalis. (Larnarck), Diala lauta (Adams), Salinator fragilis

(Lamarck), Batillaria (Zeacumantus) diemenensis (Quoy and Gaimard). Both

the foraminifera and mollusca are well preserved. The assemblage is typical

of that living in yery shallow water in warm, sheltered inlets in South Australia

at the present time.

Several other samples from the Gun Cully-Lanatic Hill area contuined

sporadic examples of Elphicdium, Cibicides vefulaens, and bryozoa, but us they

uppeared to be fortuitous no conclusions are drawn from their occurrence.

Fresh water ostracoda and oogonia of Chara were present in samples

FV 166/58 from White Dam and F 195/58 in red clayey sand from the hore near

Bickford Ridge. These are considered to have been recently depasited,

DESCRIPTLON OF ‘THE SAMPLES

(1) W, Cronin’s Shaft, The Saddle,

F 139/58. Floor of shaft.

Truu-stained red and groy clay, washed residucs consisting of ferruginized

clay, fine angular quartz grains, ferriinized forgiminifera,

The stmple contains a mixture of Cretaceous and Recent specics, The

Cretaceous species arc: dominated by Huaplophragmoides chapmani and

Textularia anucoorensts. The Recent species are Discorbis mira Cush-

man, Eiphidiun: ef. craticulatum (EF. & M.), Peneroplis planatus (EF. &

M.) and Maryzinopora certebralis Blainville. It would appear that

Picistocenc-carly Recent material assumed to occur at the top. of the

shaft has fallen in and contaminated the toe dirt forming the }ulk of

the sample.

140/58. Immediately above toc dirt-opal horizon.

White kaolinitic sandstone with Armrmohaculites qustralis, Washings

consist of medium angular quartz grains, kaolin, gypsum and some

muscovite,

I 141/58. 5 feet above F 140/55, Kaolinitic sandstone with fine ta

medium angular to subrounded quartz grains with pitted surtaces, some

hematite. No microfossils observed,

(2) Bills Shaft, Hurd Hill, near German Gully.

F 142/58. At 2 feet depth kuolinizesd clayey sandstone with medium fine

subrounded quartz grains and a good deal of iron staining. No mievo-

fossils observed.

134 N. H. LUDBROOK

F 143/58. At 10 feet depth. Hard resilicifed kaolinitic sandstone.

F 144/58. At 20 feet. White kaolinitic sandstone with a few [oraminifera.

F 174/58. At 25 feet. Iron-stained mottled siltstone—toe dirt—with abun-

dant foraminifera dominated by Haplaphragmoides chapmani (68

examples ).

(3) Terry Moore’s Shaft, Blackboy.

F 145/58. 27-28 ft. 6 in, Mottled red and grey clay (toe dirt), washings

consisting Of kaolin, fine angular quartz grains, abundant partly ferru-

ginized foraminifera dominated by Haplophragmoides chapmani (84

examples) and Textularia anacooruensis.

F 173/58, 28-29 feet. Hard kaolinitic grit with quartzite pebbles.

F 146/58. At 29 feet. Lower toe dirt horizou. Most of the sample is

clay and the residue consists almost entirely of foraminifera, with Tex-

tularia anacooreensis in abundance (76 examples).

(4) Yarloo Extension.

F 147/58. White gypseous. kaolinitie rock, the washings consisting mostly

of kaolin and gypsum, with a fragment of precious vpal. Two doubtful

foraminifera only were observed.

(5) Jubilee.

PF 148/58, No. 1. 19 ft. 6 in. Toe dirt with abundant ferruginized fora-

minitera, mostly Haplophragmoides chapmani.

F 149/58 No. 2. 15 feet. White kaolinized sandstone, with fine angular

quartz yrains, muscovite, very abundant Textularia anacooraensis, and

abundant Trochemmina minutia.

(6) Kevin's Shaft, German Gully.

F 150/58. Red surface sandy clay with medium subangular to sub-

rounded quartz grains and grains of silicified sandstone. Abundant iron

oxide staining,

F 151/58. At J4 feet, Mottled red and white soft evpseous sandy. clay

with fine quartz grains and some iron oxide, The sample contains well-

preserved foraminifera and mollusca living in shallow estuaries at the

present time.

Foraminifera

Cribrobulimina polystoma (Parker and Jones) (1 specimen),

Nubecularia lueifuga Defrance (1 specimen).

Pencroplis planatus (1°. & M.) (23 specimens).

Discarbis avira Cushman (1. specimen),

Elphidium ct. craticulatum (Fichtel and Moll) (1 specimen).

Mollusca

Macoma deltoidalis (Lamarck) (1 valve).

Diala lauia (Adams) (3 specimens).

Salinator fragilis (laroarck) (4 specimens).

Batillaria (Zeacumantus) diamenensis (Q, & G,) (1 specimen).

The material is probably of late Pleistocene or carly Recent age.

There is in addition a test of Trochammniina sp. which may be of Creta-

ecous age.

F 152/58, At 28 feet. Channel sample over 5 tu 6 feet.

White kaolinized shale with fine angular quartz grains, sericitte and one

specimen each of Textularia sp, 2 and Gandryinella sp. 1.

F 153/58. At 30 fect. Toe dirt. Mottled reddish and grey-green clay

with abundant Haplophragmoides chapmani (58 specimens).

(7)

(5)

(9)

(10)

(11)

BIOSTRATIGHAPAY OF ANDAMOOKA OPALPFIELD 155

Garvie’s Shaft, Hallion Hill.

F 154/58. At 6 feet. Hard white kaolinized and silicilied sandy shale.

No foraminifera were detected. |

F 155/58. At 13 feet. White kaolinized sandy shale, with fine to medium

angular to subrounded quarts grains, limonite and abundant foramini-

fera dominated hy Gaudryina sp. 3 (44 specimens).

F 156/58. At 17 ft. 9 in. White kaolinized sandy shale with fine to

medium angular quartz grains and foraminifera dominaled by Textu-

laria anucooracasis (10 specimens).

Shaft, Horse Peelilock,

V’ 157/58, Above opal horizon. White kaolinized sandstone with fine

angular quartz grains and a foraminiferal assermblage with a few indi-

viduals of several species.

F 158/58. Yoe dit. Ferruginized clay with subrounded to angular quarts

grains and abundant foraminifera dominated by Haplophragmoides

chapnienit (66 specimens ).

Opal Na. 1, vorth-west of Hallion Hill.

F 171/38. O-S feet. Ulard kanlinized sandy clav. No. fossils observed.

F 172/58. 4ft. 7in.-5ft.6in. Mard kavlinitic sandstone and comelomerate

with occasional facetted pebbles-

F 159/58. 7 ft. 3 in.-10 ft. 2 in. White iron-stained sandy clay with

Haplophragmoides chapmani. One fragment of precious opal noted.

F 160/58. 10 ft. 3 inl ft. Mostly pinkish white kaolinized sandstone

with a few impoverished foraminifera.

Stevens. Gully.

F 161/58. Adit. Grey-white kaolinitice fine sandstone with fine angular

quartz, grains, abundant sericite and foraminifera dominated by Tro-

chanenina minula (67 specimens ).

White Dam Area.

F 162/58. East end, working | miles from White Dam. 3 fect. Partly

ferruginized kaolinitic sandy shale with fine angular quartz grains,

hematite and limonite staining.

F 163/58. 1% miles from White Dam; soil profile as at Andamooka,

2 feet, Iren-stained kaolinitie sandy shale with fine to medium angular

irou-stained quartz rains.

F 164/58, 1 miles north-west of White Dam.

3 feet. Kaolinized shale with some iron-slaining and abundant sericite,

F 163/88. Central workings. bearing 020° from White Dam 300 yds.

lron-stained kaolinized sandy shale.

F 166/58. White Dam. Brownish-white kuolinitic sandstone, Washings

consist of light brown fue to mediwn angular to snbrewided quartz

srains with much limenite slaining. A shell fragment and an aoyonium

of Chara are present, but it is uncertain whether these are of Pleistocene

age or of recent introduction,

Sehulian’s Shaft, Treloar Till.

F 167/58. Below toe rock. White kavlinized shale with some rounded

and subangular quartz grains, sericite, 2 piece of precious opal and a

test of Trochammina sp. 2 with opaline quartz grains.

F 168/58. At 40 feet. Grey kaolinitic sandstone with scricile.

F 169/58. Toe dirt, Purplish ferruginized shale with abundant ferru-

ginized arcnaceous furaminifera dominated by Haplophragmoides chap-

mani (83 specimens ).

{ai

(13)

(14)

(18)

N. H, LUDBROOK

Opal Creek.

F 170/58. Dirty white kaolinitic sandstone with fine even-grained angular

quartz grains, No foraminifera were observed.

F 175/58. Vard dark ferruginized sandstone (a) R.L. 943; (b) R.L. 941.

Lunatic Hill.

F 177/58, Locality 81 (1), Toe dirt, Mottled ferrnginized shale with

abundant foraminifera dominated by Haplophragmoides chapmani (37

specimens ).

F 178/58. 81 (2). 5 ft. above 81 (1). White kaolinized sandy clay.

Washings consist mainly of kaolinitic material with fine angular quurtz

grains and sericite. Cretaceous foraminifera are present, together with

Cibicides refulgens and bryozaal Gugments. The sample. therefore,

seems to he a mixture of Cretaceous and Pleistocene material.

F 179/58. 81 (3). 8 feet ubove $1 (2), Powdery white kaolinitic sand,

with iron-stained rannded to subrounded and polished quartz grains.

F 180/58. $2 (1). Toe dirt. Red brown ferrugmous shale with Heplo-

phragmoides chapmani.

F 181/58. 82 (2). 5 feet above 82 (1), White sandy kaalinized rock, with

Elphidium ct. macellum (F. & M.). ? Pleistocene.

F 182/58. 52 (3). 5 feet above $2 (2). White kaolinized shale with

Haplophragmoides chapmani and two fragments of PPleistocene shell,

F 183/58. $3 (1). Kaolinitic rock with fine angular quartz grains and

Haplephragmoides chapmani.

F 184/58. $3 (2). 5 feet above 83 (1). Kaolinized shale with medium

subrounded quartz and sericite.

F 185/58. 84 (1). Red and white mottled kaolinitic sandy shale with

subrounded quartz, grains and Haplophragmoides echapmuemi.

VF 186/58. $4 (2). 3feetubove St (1). Hard white kaolinized sandstone.

Gun Gully.

F 187/38. 83 (1). Toe dirt. Pink and white mottled ferroginized shale

with abundant Haplophragmoides chapmani. There is also one sprei-

men of Quinqueloculina vulgaris presumably contaminating from the

overlying Pleistocene:

F 188/58, 85 (2). 5 teet above 85 (1). Somewhat ferrnginized soft

vypseous sandy ¢lay with Clobigerina bulloides, Diseurbis sp. and

bryozoa, indicating a Pleistocene or early Recent age.

F 189/58. 86 (1). Toe dirt. Mottled ferrnginized shale with Maplo-

phragmoides. chapmani. Textularia anacooraensis.

F 176/58. 86 (2), 5 fect above 86 (1), Gypseous clay,

Boundary Riders. Hill,

F (90/58. 88 (1). Mottled red and grey ferruginized shale with Haplo-

phragmoides chapmani and Textularia anacooraensis.

F 191/58. 88 (2), 5 feet above 88 (1). Kaolinized sandstone with,

rarely, Haplophragmoides chapmeni wid Textularia angeoornensis.

V 192/58. 89 (1). Toc dirt. Pinkish sandy shale with Haplophragmoides

chapmani and other species in relutive abundance.

F 193/58. 89 (2). 5 fect ubove 89 (1). White kaolinitic sandstone with

abundant foraminifera, incliding Ammohaculites australis and Textu-

laria anacooraensis.

F 194/58. 89 (3). 5 fect above 89 (2). Soft powdery cluyey sund and

kunkar with mostly subrounded iron-stained quurtz grains. A sponge

spicule and one specimen of Textularia were the only organic remuins

recovered, The sample may be of Pleistocerie age.

BIOSTRATIGRAPHY OF ANDAMOOKA OPALFIELD 137

(17) Near Bickford Ridge.

Ir 195/58. Three samples from bore collected from spoil.

(1) Reddish and buff clayey sand with medium subangular to sub-

rounded quartz grains with both clear and iron-stained quartz grains.

Organic remains consist of ostracode fragments, Chara and mol-

luscan shell fragments, the age of which is probably Recent.

(2) Sandstone and chocolate shale, containing a small Trochammina

and two small shell fragments of diverse origin.

(3) Chocolate brown sandstone—presumably bedrock.

REFERENCES

Lupsroox, N. H., 1956, Microfossils from Pleistocene to Recent Deposits, Lake Eyre, South

Australia, Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust., 79, pp. 37-45, pl. 1.

Nixon, L. G,, 1960, Andamooka Opalfield. S.A. Dept. of Mines Mining Review, 109, pp.

13-23 (includes bibliography of previous reparts).

MESOZOIC NON-MARINE MOLLUSCA (PELECYPODA: UNIONIDAE)

FROM THE NORTH OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY N. H. LUDBROOK

Summary

Three species of Triassic freshwater mollusca of the family Unionidae occur in the Leigh Creek and

Springfield Coal Basins. One species, Unio eyrensis, is redescribed and two, Unio springfieldensis

and Protovirgus iaenschi, described as new. One Lower Cretaceous (Neocomian) species,

Protovirgus coatsi, is described from the upper part of the Blythesdale Group on the Gardiner

Military Sheet.

MESOZOIC NON-MARINE MOLLUSCA (PELECYPODA: UNIONIDAE)

FROM THE NORTH OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by N. H. Lupsrook*

[Read 13 October 1960]

SUMMARY

Three species of ‘l'tiussic freshwater mollusea of the family Unionidae secur

iu the Leigh Creek and Springfield Coul Basins. One species, Unin eyrensia, is

redescribed and two, Unio springfeldensis and Protovirgus jaenschi, cescribed

us new, One Lower Cretaceous (Neovomian) species, Profovirgus codtsi, is

deseribed from the upper part of the Blythesdale Greup on the Cardincr

Military Sheet,

INTRODUCTION

_ This report deals with Triassic and Lower Cretaceous freshwater mussels

collected by offivers of the Geological Survey of South Australia during mapping

of the Gardiner Militarv Sheet, bordering the north-castern Flinders Ranges,

about 3350 miles north of Adelaide, aud during investigation of the economic

prospects of the Springfield Coal Basin about 210 miles north of Adelaide in

the Flinders Ranges. The fauna ot the Leigh Creek Coalfield is also considered.

Tlolotype and hypotype material is lodged in the Adelaide University

Geology Department.

Abbreviations used for collections are:

A\U.G.D.: Adelaide University Geology Department.

A.M.: Australian Museum, Sydney,

N.MLY.: National Museum, Victoria,

S.A.Mu South Australian Museum,

G.S.S.A.: Geological Survey of South Australia.

THE SPRINGFIELD TRIASSIC FAUNA

During 1958 the South Australian Department of Mines investigated the

economic prospects of the Springfield Basin, a structural basin containing Triassic

sediments similar in many respects to those of the Leigh Creck Coal Basin,

Results of mapping and drilling the Basin (Jolmson, in press) and petrologival

studies of the pscudo-igneous rocks (Johnson and Bucknell, 1959) have been

published elsewhere.

The Springficld Basin, located in moderately hilly pastoral country 26

miles north-east of Quorn, 239 miles by road north of Adelaide, is accessible

from the roud running east from the deserted town of Gordon to Cradock.

from the pink and buff argillites at the top of the suecession on the remnant

mesa in the centre of the basin (Johnson and Bucknell, 1959, p. 247)... Further

material was collected by Dr. Mary Wade and the writer on April 24, 1960,

Two species are present in the pink and buff argillites, both previously

undeseribed, The brittle conchoidal fracture of the argillites does not assist

* Palaeontologist, Geologieal Survey of South Australia, published with the permission

of the Director of Mines.

Trans. Roy. Soc, 5, Aust, (1961), Vol. #4,

140 N. H. LUDBROOK

recovery of the specimens; preservation is poor and almost entirely as moulds,

with valves open. An occasional specimen occurs with black epidermis retained

on the mould. Associated with the mussels are numerous plant remains, prin-

cipally “Yhinnfeldia” feistmanteli, recently redescribed (Townrow, 1957) as

Dicroidium feistmanteli.

THE LEIGII CREEK TRIASSIC FAUNA

The geological setting in which the Triassic molluses occur on the Leigh

Creek Coalfield operated by the Llectricity Trust of South Australia has an

extensive literature reviewed in Bulletin 31 of the Geological Survey of South

i. BLANCHE

1 CALL ABONNA

L TORRENS

Peavy

ays

LGAIRONER : 2 eHAWKER

MSPRINGFIELD BASIN

@OUORN

Locality Map.

Australia (Parkin, 1953). Unio eyrensis described from the field in 1891 was

known only from limonitic casts until 1957 when Mr. A. E. Jaensch of Leigh

Creek showed the writer the specimen (pl. 1, fig. 1) from which the external

features of the shell can now be described. Unio eyrensis has not so far been

found in the Springfield Basin, but a specimen of the Protovirgus here described

as Protovirgus jaenschi which is a distinctive species of the Springfield fauna

was found among original material from Leigh Creek in the Tate Collection at

the University of Adelaide. The Leigh Creek specimens are much more sub-

stantial than those from Springfield,

MESOZOIG NON-MARINE MOLLUSCA dil

THE LOWER CRETACEOUS SPECIES

The two specimens which represent the entire knowledge of the new species

Protavirgus coatst were collected on the Gardiner Military Sheet on the margin

of the Great Artesian Basin off the north-castern slopes of the Flinders Ranges,

locality P/L 915 Sheet 115, 1 mile south-sonth-east of Western Spur, 3 miles

south of Village Well. The species occurs as ironstone casts weathered nut of

ferruginized gritty sandstone with plant impressions belonging to the upper

part of the Blythesdale Group. The age is considered to be Neocomian,

SYSTEMATIC POSITION OF THE MATERIAL

In restoring Unie eyrensis to the genus Unio and confirming Etheridge's

recognition of the presence of the Unionidae in the Australian Triassic, the

writer ditters from McMichael and Hiscock Sica whe have (pp. 493, 495)

on the assumption that Unio eyrensis was sculptureless and might be presumec

to be # primitive mutelid, postulated the arrival of the Australian mutelid stock

during the Triassic.

Certain morphological features of Unio eyrensis —the deep conical anterior

adductor impression bounded by 2 buttress and the internal subumbonal ventral

ridge are related to those of some early Mesozoic genera of the Cypricardiacea,

notably Kalentera Marwick, 1952, and less closcly to Palaeopharus Kittl, 1907.

The similarity between the hinge-characters of Palaeopharus and of Unio were

observed by Kobayashi and Ivhikawa (1951, p, 8), who siggested that Palaeo-

pharus might be a transitional form between the Pleurophoridae and the

Unionidae, and the Unionidae characterised hy pseudo-cardinals might be poly-

phyletic (p. 9). Cox (1960, p. 81) has recently discussed the possible origins

and phylogenctic relationships of the Unionacea.

SYSTEMATIC DESCRIPTIONS

Family UNIONIDAE

Subfamily Unioninak

Genus Unio Philipsson, 1788

Type species (1C.Z.N.) Mya pictorum Linnt

Unia eyrensis Etheridge jr,

(pl. 1, figs. 1-6; pl. 2, fig. 5)

Unio eyrensis Ttheridge jv, 1891, p. Ll, pl. 3, figs, 1-3; 1892, p, 389, pl. 28, fig. 1.

Prohyria eyrensts (Etheridge jr.) MeMichitel, 1957, p. 228, pl. 13, figs. 8, LL (non figs, U 10).

Diagnosis—A large solid fairly broad Unto, heavily sculptured with flattened

caneentric ridges, hinge with two triangular pseudocardinals and one long

pusterior lateral in the right valve, one triangular pscudo-cardinal and two lomg

posterior laterals in the Ieft valve. Anterior adductor impression deep, hounde

by a buttress, Broad low subumbonal-ventral ridge on the interior.

Redescription — External characters (known from hypotype A.U.C,D,

F 1472)—Shell inequiluteral, elongate-ovate, rounded anteriorly, bluntly pointed

posteriorly, inflated and solid, Periostracum thick, dark brown. Sculpture of

prominent narrow ilattencd concentric ridges a maximum of 5 mm. apart in the

dorsal half, fine concentric lirae between the ridges: owing to preservation ventral

half showing fine growth lines and rest marks only. Beaks somewhat flattened,

curved imward and forward, situated anteriorly. Smooth Far about 10 mm. then

ig N. H, IU DBROOK

wrinkled with irregular bifurcating plications for about 8 mm, before the first

eoneentric ridge develops.

Anterior muryin short, curved downwards under beaks, then roundly cury-

ing to ventral margin, posterior-dorsal margin nearly straight; ventral margin

gently arcuate.

Ligament large, prominent, long: lunule apparently long, narrow and In-

conspicnous.

Internal Characters. (holotype A.U.G.1. T 1347)—Shell deep, inflated, hinge

plate fairly wide and flat with two triangular psenducardinals and one long

posterior Jateral in the right valve, one triangular psendo-cardinal and two long

posterior laterals in the left valve.

Anterior adductor impressions deep and conical, hounded posteriorly by a

strong buttress, anterior retractor impressions small, posterior udductor inypres-

signs inconspicuous. Pallial line firm. A broad low subumbonal-ventral ridge

in frunt of which the shell was probably thicker than it was posteriorly, Ridye

represented by a conspicuous suleus on casts by which the specics is mostly

represented. The sturdiness of the shell is indicated by the fact that the casts

are fully inflated showing no signs of collapse during deposition.

Dimensions—Holotype (internal cast) T 1347; Length 87 mm, height 45

mim,, inflation (both valves) 40 iuin., ratio pasteriur;anterior 75; 12 mn.

ilypotype. F 15472: Length (est.) 90 mm., height 54.mm., inflation Choth

valves) 41 mm, posterior; anterior approx. 72:15 mm.

Location of Types— Holotype Tate Coll, AU.G.D, T 1347; Hypotype

AU,G.D, F 15472; Paratype Aust. Museum, Sydney, A.M. FP 9081,

Type Locality—Black Hills, Leigh Creek, latitude 30°30’, Jongitude 138°25",

on the southern end of the Leigh Creek Coalfield (Parkin, 1953, Parkin and

King, 1953b, Sheet Myrtle), 1% miles south of the present township of leigh

Greek and 3 miles north of the Copley Railway Station, formerly Leigh Creck

RS.. und shown as such on H- Y, 1. Brown's map 1891. Unio eyrensis woalhers

but as casts from ferruginous sandy shales occurring just above the Main or

Telford Seam, which is about 400 feet above the buse of the Triassic seqnence

(verbal information of R. K. Johns).

Material—The holotype T 1347, A note on the original label in Etheridge's

luindwriting reads “1 taken as duplicate” —this would be the paratype A.M.

F 4081, which carries a similar label,

The hypotype A.U.G.D. F 15472 collected by A. K, Jaensch about 1945

in Tellord Cut shortly after commencement of operations about 10 ft. from

tho surface on top af shale on the up-dip of the Cut and now presented te the

writer for lodging in dhe Adelaide University Geology Depattinent, and the

following Lopotypes:

(1) Adelaide University Geology Department, 19 specimens jo all, including

one from. Tate’s original material labelled “Burnt Plain 10-12 miles north

of Leigh Creek”. 12 internal casts, about half of which shaw the hinge

features; 3 showing traces of external sculpture, 1 external mould.

(2) South Australian Museum. 31 topotypes, including P 2414 2 ferruginous

casts labelled “Unio eyrensis Tate” from old collection o£ $.4, School of

Mines; P 2589 labelled “Unio eyrensis Tate” collected from shale and prob-

whly original Tate material, some shell preserved near the umbe, casts of

anterior adductor impressions very well shown; P 4435 cast in shule from

S.A. Selioal uf Mines old collection; P 9096 seven ferriginous casts: collected

hy Sir Thomas Playford 1945; P 13028 twenty limonitized custs collected

Dr. 8. Duily 7/11/59 from ridge outcropping 1 mile SSW of present town

wf Leigh Creck.

MESOZOIG NON-MARINE MOLLUSCA 143

(3) Geological Survey of South Australia. 16 topotypes with the following

dimensions:

Levigth Height Inflation Posterierwauterior

Ros 45 36 73:12

110 By 40) 85:25

Jou 50 4} obscured

a 38 38 60:15

3 -}- 40 32. oabseured

78 42 42, obscured

al 43 35 71:10

72+ 43 28 aT -+:15

11d fi2 at $4325

85 2 4h 39 Tarl2

64 a7 24 54:10

922 45 35 T9135

= estimated.

Geological Survey of Queensland.

Tlypotype F 2450 Bundamba S.E, Qld. “in brick clay overlying coal”.

Tpswicl, Coal Measures (Upper Triassic) mentioned Etheridge jr.

1892 G.S.Q. Pub, 92. p. 389, Coll, J. Malbon Thompson.

Hyputype F 227 Bondamba §.E, Qld. “in brick clay overlying coal”.

Ipswich Coal Measures (Upper Triassic) figd. Etheridge jr. 1892

G.S.Q, Pub. 92, pl. 28, fig. 1. Coll. J. Malbon Thompson,

Obsercations—MecMichacl (1957, p. 227) introduced the genus Prolwria

for Unio johnstoni Etheridge jr, of which he had 5 specimens, and Unio eyrensis

Kitheridge jr, of which he examined and figured the paratype (A.M. F 9081

pl. 13, fig. 8) and probable topotype (N.M.V. P 16767 pl. 13, figs, 11.12), The

specimen N.M.Y. P 16761 (pl. 13, figs. 9 and 10) referred to U. eyrensis from

Lake Eyre was kindly lent to the writer hy the National Museum of Victoria,

It is neither morphologically nor lithologically related to the Triassic species

and is a well-preserved example of the Aptian marine species Panopea maccoyi

which, by comparison with other specimens inchiding Panopea maccoyi collected

by Dr. B. G. Forbes from the Lower Cretaceous of Fred’s Springs two miles

east of Take Fyre railway siding, has almost certainly come from the same

loeality. The lveality “Lake Eyre” (attached also to the lialotype of Unio

eyrensis) is a hazard for students of musenm specimetis, as a fairly wide geo-

graphical and stratigraphical range was included in the name “Lake Eyre

Basin” in earhy records.

Unio johinstoni by original designation is the type spevies of Prohyria, but

the generic description given by McMichael includes that of the “hinge well

developed, with large cardinal teeth” of Unio eyrensis, The hinge of Unio

johnstoni has not been described.

The two species appear to be unrelated, The hinge of Unio eyrensis is

unionid (pl. 1, fig. 5) and can be reproduced in latex from many of the limonitic

easts in which the species is usually preserved. The casts show very charac-

teristic internal shell features —a broad well-marked umbo-ventral depression

which corresponds lo the internal ridge on the shell interior and the deep conical

anterior adductor muscles bounded posteriorly by a buttress are represented

negatively (pl 2, fig. 5). These are clearly visible in the paratype F 9081

(MeMichael, pl. 13, fig. 8) and were well illnstrated in the original figures of

[44 N_ HH. L.UDRROOK

the holotype (Etheridge, 1891, pl. 3, figs, 1-3) here refigured (pl. 1, figs. 2, 3, 4).

‘The internal characters have features in commen with the living Buropean

Unio tumidus, although the pseudo-cardinals are narrowly cuneiform like those

of the Bear River Cretaceous Ligumia retustus (Meck) and the Laramic Creta-

ceous Margaritifera endlichi (White), recently allucated (Modell, 1957) to

genera other than Unio. Etheridge (1c. p, 12) drew similar comparisons in

his wriginal description: “Little more can be said of these Mesozoic Unius,

except that they are quite unlike any of the Recent Australian species, being

evidently much more substantial shells. In the presence of the partilion behind

the anterior muscular sears our fossils correspond to a certain extent with some

of the more ponderous American species.” The specics was known only from

internal moulds wntil Mr. A. E. Jaensch collected the splendid specimen (pl. 1,

fiz. 1) from Telford Cut on the Leigh Creek Coalfield which has enabled the

external characters to be determined for the frst time. European Tertiary

Unios (Modell, 1959) appear to have somewhat similar sculpture.

The species from Bundamba, Queensland, Ipswich Coal Measures ( Upper

Triassic). referred to C/nio eyrensis “Tate” (Etheridge. 1892, p. 389. pl. 28, fig. 1)

is retained in the synonymy. The twa specimens C.S.Q. PF 237 (figd, Etheridge

Le. pl 28, fig. 1) and F 2450 (internal cast mentioned by Etheridge, p. 389)

have been kindly lent by the Geological Survey of Queensland. Both are close

to and congeneric with Unio eyrensis, although the strong concentric ribbing

is Hot preserved. The Queensland specimens are very thick shelled and solid,

with relative dimensions: F 2450 length 71, height 54 mm.; F 227 length (esti-

mated) 79, height 38 mm.

Like the Leigh Creek examples, they are preserved as Jimonitized casts

for the most part, with internal features similur to these of the type series. ‘heir

habitat was prebably similar also, In shape and such features as are preserved

the Bimdamba specimens may be compared with the living European U. tumidns

Philipsson and with Unio karrooensis Cox trom the Manda Beds (Lower Stayrn-

berg, or Upper Triassic) of the Rubuhu Coalfields, Tanganyika (Cox, 1932)-

Apart from the conspicuous concentric sculpture, the writer is unable ta

distinguish any generic characters which would appear to separate the Triassic

eyrensis from Unto. The species has sa few morphological characters in cum-

mon with Prohyria jolnstont Uhat its retention in Prohyria seers unwarranted.

The genus Unio is therefore regarded as the best available location for eyrensis

at mesent. Unio was formerly considered to be established in North Amurica

us elsewhere during the Triassic (White, 1907; Henderson, 1935), but must

of the American specics have now been placed in other genera (Modell, 1957).

The strong sculpture and substantial nature of the shell of eyrcnsis and

the restrieted area in which most of the spevimens are fntnd indicates that they

were probably of fuviatile habitat, deposited at the mouth of a river entering the

Leigh Creek Basin.

WWhile the present paper was im proof volume 87. part 2, of the Records of the Geple

sical Survew of India dated 1958 wus reccived. This contained a paper by M. R. Sahni

and A, P. Tewari entitled New Unionids fran the Triassic (Gondwana) Rocks of Vihki.

Vindliva Pradesh and Maleri, Hyderahod, Decvan. Ree. Geol, Sure, ludin vol. 87, pk 2

pp 406-417, pls. 1-2, in which the authors lave ueseribed four species of unionids tram the

Upper Triassic of India for which the genus Tihkia ty created. From the figures and cde-

scription, Tthkia eorrugeta agrees so Closely with Unio eyrensty that there ean be little doubt

that they are conueneric, TH, therefore, Unie is not the corer Iseation for eyrensis. and

suringfieldensis the eenuy Tikia should be considered for these species.

MESOZOIC NON-MARINE MOLLUSCA 145

Unio springfieldensis sp, nov,

(pl. 2, figs. 1-2)

Diagnosis—A medium sized thin Unio, smooth but for growth lines, posterior

marstin broadly rostrate.

Description—Shell of moderate size, apparently thin and easily squashed,

broadly wedge-shaped. Anterior margin somewhat obliquely arcuate; posterior

margin produced and broadly rostrate where preserved. Cardinal margin

arcuute, Anterior dorsal margin oblique and gently slightly arenate posteriay

dorsal margin nearly straight, Ventral margin curved; a slight umbo-pusterior

ridge, Ligament prominent. Shell apparently nearly smooth but for fine

growth lines and irregular concentric folds which are probably mostly duc tn

compression of the shell during deposition. Internal features unknown,

Dimensions—Nolotype external monld A.U.G.D. F 15473, Length 75 +

(estimated 85) mm.; beak height 30 mm.; posterior:anterior ratio 60:25 mm,

Ligament 19 mm. Paratype: A.U.C.D, F 15474, Length 90, beak height 36 mm,

Material—Ifolotype and paratype both external moulds and examined from

latex casts, both valves open and preserved wpside down on weathered surface

of argillite. Paratype G.S,S.A. F 44/60 figured pl, 2, fg. 2 showing posterior

margin. Paratype: External mould of a fairly large specimen preserved upside

with 2 valves open flat and partly obscured: valves crampled. Leneth 100

mm,, beak height 80. Topotypes 2 moulds. of single valves and 23 incomplete

impressions.

Location of Types— Holotype AU.G.D, F 15473, Paratype A.U.G.D,

PF UAT4. Paratype Geol. Surv. S.A. F 44/60.

Type Locality—Small central mesa, Sprinefield Basin. Section 48, Uhindred

of Cudla Muda, 13 miles west of Cradock, in pink and buff argillites at the

top of the Triassic succession.

Observations--In contrast with Unio eyrensis, this thin, smooth species was

prohably of lacustrine habitat and was deposited in the fine mud of the still

waters af the Springficld Basin.

Genus Protovircus MeMiehael, 1857

‘Type species (0.d.) Unio dunstani Kthevidge jr., 1838

Protovirgus jacnschi sp. nov.

(pl. 2, figs. 3, 4)

Diagnosis—A fairly large inflated and solid Prototirgus having close-set

fairly coarse rounded ridges with fine growth lines towards the ventral margin,

Peseriplion—Shell narrow, clongate-ovate, beaks very anterior, situated at

Jess than the anterior one-tenth, flattened and apparently smooth. Anterior

margin short and well curyed, posterior margin attenuated, obliquely rounded,

dorsal margin nearly straight, ventral margin gently curved, with an inflexion in

the posterior one-third, Sculpture of fairly coarse and close rounded ridges

with fine growth lines. strong ventral margins. T.igament fairly lone and

prominent,

Ilinge unknown. Shell anterior apparently with a broad swhumbunal-

ventral ridge represented hy a sulcus on the internal cast, Anterior adductor

impressions fairly deep, bounded behind by a buttress.

Dimensions—Length 80 mm.; maximum height 31 mm. ( posterior to beaks);

beak height 30 mm,

Type Locality—According ta Tate’s ald label “Burnt Plain 10 to 12 miles

north of Leigh Creek”, This is the present Jocation of Lobe C, northern basin,

146 N. Tf, LUDBROOK

3 miles north of Leigh Creek township, where shale outcrops continuously around

the margin of the Basin (Johns, 1956, p, 138),

Location of Holotype—Tate Coll. A.U.G.D. F 547A,

Location of Paratype—F¥ 15476.

Location af Idcotypes-G.S,S.A. F 80/38 B-C, F 43/60.

Material—The holotype b' 15475, the only specimen known from the Triassic

of the Leigh Creek Basin.

Paratype, external mould, from the pink argillites at the top of the Triassic

succession in the central mesa, Springfield Basin.

Sample F 80/85. Ideotypes. all external moulds from pink argillites top of

mest Springfield Basin.

Observations—The hinge of the species is unknown, but some of the internal

characters are preserved on the holotype. The anterior adductor and buttress

though less prominent, resemble those of Unio cyrensis. In erecting the genus,

MeMichael (1957, p. 231) noted its uncertain affinities. The visible characters

of the South Australian species appear to be similar to those of Unio and on

present evidence there is no apparent reison for placing P. jaenschi elsewhere

than in the Unionidae,

The species is named for Mr. A, E. Jaensch who collected the first speci-

men of Unio eyrensis showing the external features,

The external resemblance of Protovirgus juenschi to the marine form

Kalentera marwicki Crant-Mackic is, however, very striking. Kalentera marwicki

veenrs with an abundant associated marine fauna (Granl-Mackie, 1960, p. 77)

jiu the Otapivian (Rhaetic) and Warepan (Norian) of New Zealand,

Protoyirgus coatsi sp. nov,

(pl. 2. fig, 6)

Diaznosis—A medinm sized Profovirgus with gently curved posterior ridge,

convex posterior dorsal margin and concave ventral margin,

Description—Shell of medium size, compressed. elougate, narrow, length

about 24 times maximum height, beaks. anterior, situated at about one-fifth of

length of shell from anterior, Maximum height just posterior to beaks, Dorsal

and ventral slopes approximately parallel; dorsal margin gently convex aud

elevated posterivr to beaks then curving more sharply downwards to the pus-

terior margin which is produced narrowly rounded; dorsal margin slightly

excavate, anterior to beaks, then straight; ventral margin concuve. with a broad

sinuation in the middle of the shell. Posterior ridge fairly well marked and

gently arcuate. Beaks fattened, apparently unsculptured, not prominent; liga-

ment moderately prominent, no: lunule visible.

Sculpture of concentric ridges.

Intemal characters unknown.

Dimensions—Length 56 mm., maximum height 25 mm.. beak height 2+ mm.,,

posterior: anterior 45:11 mm.

Type Locality—Gardiner M.S., P/L 915, Sheet 115, 1 mile south-south-east

of Western Spur 3 miles south of Village Well in ferruginized gritty sandstoue

with plant impressions.

Stratigraphic Position—Neocomian sandstones of Blythesdale Group.

Location of Holatype—A,U.G.D, F 15477.

Material—The holotype, an internal cast in ferruginized sandstone, collected

R. P. Coats, One paratype, internal cast of two spread opened valves in férru-

sinized sandstone, collected N, H. Ludbrook, sample F 114/58.

N. U1. Lupsrook PiatE J

Kor

ute

Unio eyrensis Etheridge, jr. Hypotype A.U.G.D, F 15472.

Unio eyrensis Utheridge, jr. Holotype A.U.G.D. T 1347, dorsal view.

Unio eyrensis Etheridge, jr. Holotype A.U.G.D, 'T 1347, side view.

Unio eyrensis Etheridge, ir, Holotype A.U.G.D. 'T 1347, anterior view,

Latex mould of dorsal interior of holotype of Unio eyrensis showing hinge features,

Litex mould of anterior portion of left valve of lolotype of Unio eyrensis showing anterior

adductor impression and buttress.

All figures natural size, from unretonched photographs of B. Ruxton.

N. FH. Lupproox Plate 2

Unio springfieldensis sp. nov. Latex cast of holotype A.U.G,D. F 15473,

Unio springfieldensis sp. noy. Paratype FP 44/60 with Dieroidiwn feistmanteli on pink

argillite,

Protovirgus jacnschi sp. nay. Latex cast of paratype A.U,G.D, F 15476.

Protovirgus jaenschi sp. noy. Holotype A.U.G.D. F 15475.

Unio eyrensis Etheridge, jr. Topotype showing cast of deep anterior adchictor inypression

and cast of umbo-ventral ride.

Protovirgus coatsi sp. noy. Holotype A.U.G.D. F 15477,

All figures natural size from unretouched photographs of B, Ruston and wash drawines

(Figs. 1, 3) of the author,

MESOZOIC NON-MARING MOLLUSGA Lat

The specics is named for Mr. R. P. Coats of the Geological Survey of

South Australia, who collected the holotype during field mapping of the

Gardiner M.S.

Obsertations—The species resembles an unnamed specimen P 17670,

National Museum of Victoria from Korrumburra, the stratigraphic position of

which is probably comparable with that of Protavirgus coatsi.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

For the donation and loan of material the writer is indebted to Mr. A. F-

Jaenseh of Leigh Creek, Dr. Mary Wade. University of Adelaide, Dr. B. Daily,

South Australian Musenm, Mr. E. 19. Gill, National Museum of Victoria, and

Mr. A. Denmead, Chicf Government Geologist. Queensland. Dr. D. F.

MeMichael kindly criticized the manuseript. The phutugraphs were taken hy

Mr. B. Ruxton, Department of Lands,

REFERENCES

Cox, L. KR. 1932. Lamellibranchia fram the Karroo Beds of the Ruhuhu Coalfiel!s. Tan-

gunyika Verritory. Oniurt. Journ, Geol, Sec, Lond., 88 (4), pp. 623-633, pls. 89, 410,

Cox, L. RK. 1960. Thoughts on the Classification of the Bivalvia. Proc, Malac, Soc, ‘Luuth,

34 (2), PP. 60-85.

Erxenmce, 7... yn,, 1891. Description of some South Australian Sibirian and Mesozoic

Fossils, bemy 4 Portion of H, Y, Lo Brown Reports on Coal-beating Area jn the

Neighbourhood of Leigh Creek... . . S. Aust. Parl. Papers, 158, pp. 9-1 A, pls, 1-3,

Evirenmer, K., yu. 1892. In Jack, B. Land Etheridec, R.. Jr. The Geology and Palawou-

tolory af ‘Oucensland and New Guinea. Geol, Sury. Old. PabL, 92, pp. 1-XXX, 1-768,

pls. 1-68,

Guasi-Macxm, J. A. 1960. On a New Kalentera (Pelecypoda: Cypricardiacea) from the

Upper Trissic of New Zealand. NZ, Journ, Geol. Geoph,, 8 (1), pp. 74-80, figs. 1-6.

Hranrason, J., 1935. Tossil Non-marine Mollusca of North ‘Amorica, Geol. Soc. Amer.

Spec. Pap. 3. pp. 1-315.

Jouss. RB. K. 1956. Leigh Creck Coulfeld. Northern Basin—Lobe "GC". §.A. Dept. Mines

Min. Rev., 99. pp. 136-149.

JouNNon, W., hntd Rucker. W. J., 1959, Pscudlo-igneous Rocks in the ‘Trimsic Succession

of the Spring eld Basin, Gordon-Cradock District. Trans. Rov. Soo. 8. Aust, 82. pp.

945-957, pls. 1-3.

Kouavasns, T., and lemmawa, K., 195]. On Palacopharus, a Late Triassic Peleeypod Genus.

Trans, Proc, Palaeant, Soc, Japan N.S, 1, pp. 7-12, pl. lL.

MeMrenann, D, Fy, 1957, A Review of the Fossil Fresliweater Mussels (Malan, Pelecy-

yodi) of Australasia. Proc. Linn, Soa, N.SAW., 81 (3), pp. 222-243. pls. 13,

MeMienacn, De Wand Hiscock, 1. T., 1958, A monograph df the Freshwater “iuatts

(Mollasca: Pelecypoca) of the Australian Reyvisn. Aust, Jou, Mur. Freshy. Res, 9

(3), pp. 372-508. pls. 1-19.

Marwies, |, 1953, Divisions and Faunas of the Hokonui Syste (Triassic and Jurassic).

N.Z. Geol. Sury. Pal, Bull., 21. pp. 1-141, pis, 1-17.

Monrrt.. H., 1957. Die fossilen Najaden Nordiineatias: Emm Kiussifizienmeversuch. Arch,

Moll., 86, 1/6, pp, 183-200.

Moura. ., 1959. Die terliarea Najaden des aogurisehen Beckeny, Geol, Jb.. 75, pp.

197-250, 3 pls., 2 tables.

Paws, L, W., 1953. The Leigh Creck ‘Coalfield. Geol, Surv. S.A. Bull, 31, pp. 1-74,

pis. 1-8. :

Pankin, L. W., and King, 1, 1958. Geological Atlas of South Australia, sheet Copley.

L inch*1 mile (1:63,360).

Parkin, L. Wand Kine, 1., 1952, Geological Atlas of South Australia, sheet Myrtle.

Linch/! mile (1:63,360),

Townrow, FA, 1957. On Dicrokdtiit, Prohably a Pteridospermous Leaf and other Leaves

now Removed from this Genus, Trans, Geol, Soe S. Afsicu, 60, pps. 21-60, pls. 2-3.

Wuiter, G. A,, 1907, The Ancestral Origin of the North American Unionidac, or Freshwater

Mussels. Smithsonian Mise, Coll, 48, No. 1702, pp. 75-88, pls. 26-31.

A RE-EXAMINATION OF MESEMBRIOMYS HIRSUTUS1 GOULD

1842 (MURIDAE)

BY H. H. FINLAYSON

Summary

The characters of Mesembriomys hirsutus Gould are re-examined with fresh material. Detailed

evidence of its arboreal specialization is presented. The validity of the insular form M. hirsutus

melvillensis Hayman is confirmed. Some aspects of the living animal, of skull and dentition, manus

and pes, are illustrated.

A RE-EXAMINATION OF MESEMBRIOMYS HIRSUTUS' GOULD

1842 (MURIDAE)

by H, WW. Frxvayson

[Read 13 Oct. 1960]

SUMMARY

The characters of Mesembrionys Airsutus Gould are: re-examined with

fresh material, Detailed evidence of ity arhoreal spectalizatiym is presented,

The validity of fhe insular form M. Airsutns melnillensig Hayman is con-

firmed. Some aspects of the living animal, of skull and dentition, manus. and

pes, are illustrated.

. owe to the kindness of my friend and former student, Wilfred Bateman,

Esq., now of the Commonwealth Administration in Port Darwin, a magnificent

living specimen of this great tree rat of Northern Australia, which though

formerly much collected and written upon taxonomically, is still very imper-

fectly known.

The specimen was caught by blacks near Garden Point, Melville Island,

where it is still plentiful and it ocenrs also on the adjoining Bathurst Island

across the mile-wide Apsley Strait. Formerly it was a common animal in suit-

ably forested country over much of the Northern Territory as far south as Daly

Waters, but in recent years its numbers have declined and in many of the

localities of the Daly River sector, where Knut Dah! found it plentiful in 1894-

95, it seems nuw to be a rarity. Tt ocenrs also on Cape York Peninsula, Quecns-

land. Dahl recorded the aboriginal names Nunjala. Dombot and Kalamba for

the species and the last of these is still in use hy mixed Tchingilli and Mudburra

blacks at Daly Waters, though it is 20 years since the unimal was seen by them

there. Mr, Bateman also supplies the names Intamunga and Puturamucka as

being used on Melville Island. About 60 specimens have been listed in over-

seas collections, but il is much less well represented in Australian museums.

The animal was down to me from Port Darwin and the air lift of 2.000

miles, spanning «a considerable climatic yap, terminated in nnusually cold

weather in an Adelaide sprme (August) which continoed for much of the

pertod of captivity. Although it was provided with artificial warmth and much

thenght taken for its comfort in roomy quarters, it remained extremely secretive

and could only be momentarily glimpsed by torch lizht. When denied its

1The specific name Airsutus was consistently used for the species thraugh sll the

changes in its poneric desivnation from Mus hiravtus of Gould 1842, through Hapalotis,

Conilurus, Anmmomys ta Mesembriomys, ani in the definition of its tree subspecies. In

recent years it bag been superseded ty guuldii of Gray 1843 on the groimds af its pre-

oecupation by Mus hirsutus of Elliot 1830. The animal so named by Elbot is naw known

as Colunda ellieti Gray 1837 (fide Ellerman) and belongs to an Oriental genus whose species

cannot possibly he confused with those of the Australian Mexembriomys. Tn view of these

facts and of its unambicuons ise for 9A years in all the fomuative contributions to the

knowledge of the animal, there would scem to be a strong case for the conservation of

hirsuetus in Mesemibriomys. “This would make possible the coulinued use af gouldii in Notomiys,

ws is done as late as LYBL by Tate.

Trans, Roy, Soc, S. Aust, (1961), Vol, 84.

15st 4. OM, FINLAYSON

nesting hoy occasionally for observation it repulsed all advances with implucahle

ferocity and was a difficult subject for photography. so that the attempt to yuin

some insight into its habits and peculiarities was largely nugatory, Dahl (1597)

writes of its irritability and savage temper in the wild and the severity of Its

biting, and the blacks 1 mterrogated at Daly Waters in 1953, who formerly

took it by hand from hollow trees, also spoke feelingly of what they called its

“checkiness. In its frequent rages, the captive displayed considerable vocal

powers of a kind qnite different from the squealing and piping of more normal

forms, such as Rattus, Pseudomys, Gyomys and Mus, raising its voice progres-

sively into it sort of whirring machine-like crescendo, nol unlike some ot the

Phalangeridae, such as Pefaurus breviceps. There was uo difficulty in keeping

it nourished as it ate very freely of sugared biscuits of several sorts (a laste

evidently inculeated by the air hostess, as his box was strewn with them on

arrival), of bananas and other soft fruits and of mixed yrain, but showed no

interest in green vegetation nor Hesh foods. Dahl records that the chief fond

af the species in the Daly River districts is the fruit of the local Pandinns

udoratissimus, but the stomach of one of those examined below, which was taken

on the Stewart River in North Queensland, was crammed with a gritty anass

in which the shell of a fresh water mussel appeared to be the chief constifuent.

When cxamined after three months’ detention, the Garden Point animal was

found to be in excellent condition, weighing 670 ¢. and showing a smooth, well-

groomed cout; no external parasites were noted. Ellerman (1941) records a

life span of more than four years in captivity in London,

In checking over the characters of the species, [ have used for comparison

eight other specimens in the South Australian Museum representing all three

of the areas from which the deseribed geographic forms have come, Six of

these were collected for the Museum in 1913-14 by Mr. W. P, Dodd, whase

ithverary in the field was planned during the directorate of Sir Edward Stirling

and two are donations from Mr, P. Foelsche, formerly stationed at Port Darwin.

The account which fallows is based primarily on my freshly chloroformed cap-

tive, which is a young adult male, and four additional examples fram Melville

Island, and thus represents the form M. hirsutos melvillensis Ilayman 1936:

whore subspecific uniformity is departed from. it is noted in the Lext, and an

appraisal of the validily of the described forms, as far as the material permits, is

appended later.

EXTERNAL GHARACTERS

Worm stout, with sturdy arms and shoulders and thick neck; the fine

quarters wre considerably larger than the fore, but not greatly exaggerated.

The ficad (Plate 2 and Plate 3, Fig, A) large and deep, with a strongly

protuberant rhinariuiw and labia well developed but not pouted as in Leporilins,

At a puint one-third of the distance from the rhinaritim to anterior canthus of

the eve, there is a dent in the profile, the remaining curvature to the crown being

moderately convex. The eye is large, black and very brilliant and is sur-

rounded by an urea of almost nude epidermis, which in tum is: conspicuously

ringed by a narrow band of jet black hair; the upper eye lashes are fairly well

developed reaching 41mm. in length. The ear is large, thick in substance, rather

narrow and with its maximum breadth below the midpoint; it is carried well

sway from the head and conspicuously pricked. The epidermis of its inner

surface is dusky beown with bluish pink areas showing through on the conch

and the margins almost black; processes of the conch ure well marked and the

RE-EXAMINATION OF MESEMBRBIOMYS HIRSULUS GOULD 15L

tragal notch deep and undivided. The cephalic cibrissae are strongly developed

and entirely black except for the interramals which are paler at the tip, The

mysticial set reach LO) mm, as a maximnm, the swpraorhitals 38 mm., and the

vomuls, two of which spring from a very strongly developed papilla, 35 mm.

The pustoral gronp was not traced in adults of the Melville Island lot, but in

a snixidult all-black bristles on this site reached 14 inm. and m an adult Lemale

Wf Mh. rattoides. 20 mm.; the submentals reach 12 mm, and the interramals

23 mim.

The general physiognomy is distinctive and in some features sciyroid

rather than ciurine.

The mats is variably developed, but is usually lange in respect to the

general size of the animal, and sometimes much stouter than in the example

figured (Pl 3, Wig C). The length fram base of metacarpal pads to apieul

pac excluding claw, reaches 30 mm. in adults, the breadth from base of dist

5. 14 mm., yielding a breadth/length ratio of 0-47, the 3rd digit, 13 mm.. and

its mul 8 mm; iu two exumples of the typical race in which the manus is very

hey the breadth rises to 16 mim. and the value of B/L to 0°53 as maxima.

The digital formula is the normal 3>4>2>5> 1, but the pulley is unusually

large und apparently functional und proyided with a broad, blunt, projecting

sheath-like nail; the claws of the other digits varying much in length from

individual to individuul, hut always stout and strongly curved and umuisually

deep dorso-ventrally at the base: pale vellowish in colour, but slightly dark

ened along the dorsal curve.

‘The general palmar surface is lightly creased, not notiecably punctate

and in Ife its colour is a pale slightly bluish pink with the pads and digital

ridges strongly contrasted in blackish brawn. The palmar aspect of the digils

is quite hairless, and the ridges prominent, entire and uousually numerous; 8 ur

9 on 13 and D4, but reaching 11 in one swbadult of the typical race —the

highest connt noted on an Australian murid, The metacarpal pads are broad

ind obtusely oval und greatly execed the interdigitals in area; the outer (hy po-

their) much larger than the inner, which has its long axis inclined laterad

towards the pollex and its distal margins well raised above the base. The

luteral interdigitals are subtriangular or inyerted heart-shaped, with a strongly

developed satellite pad at the base of the outer. and the median pad a broad

inverted pyritorm, the size sequence for area is outer metacarpal > inner meta-

wirpul > 3rd interdigital > Ist > 2nd, The palmar pads are strongly striated,

the upical pads of the digits, Seebly so,

The pes (Plate 3, Fig, B) bas numerous well-anarked peculiaritics, Ls

dimensions vary, but yield several maxima which exceed all other Australian

muvids, except possibly the species of Uromys, ta plantar aspeet it tapers

steonvly Srom a broad interdigital area to a nude strungly constricted heel, its

relative size is large, attaining in the largest examples 25 pc. of the head and

body length and a maximum breadth/length ratio of 0-30; the 8rd digit reaches

{6 mm. and its nail 9-5 mm, (11 mm, in one example of Mh. rattoides). The

digital turmula is 4>3>2>5>1, but the disproportion between the lateral

und median digits is much less than that which prevails in the majority uf

Australiin species, both the ballux and D.5 being longer in their phalanges and

at the same thne their bases are brought into a more anterior position on the

pes, by longer metatarsals supporting them. ‘Thus the apical pad of the hallox,

which in must Australian species lies far below the level of the base of D.2,

here revehes to its posterior third, and similarly that of 19.5 to the anterior third

152, H. H. FINLAYSON

of DA. The digital ridges are strongly developed and clear cut and are eutire

exeept posteriorly, where some obscure bifurcation may be seen; all show mure

or less distinctly the novel feature of antero-posterior striation, hut there is na

sealation; they are numerous, ranging from 9-11 on the median digits in the

Melville Island material and to 14 ia a subadult of the typical race, which (like

that of the manus) is the highest count 1 have obtaincd in an Australian rat.

The claws are still stronger than in the manus and almost equally curved, and

slightly darker in colour.

‘The plantar surface generally {s soft and plump, markedly punctate, hut

with the creasing reduced to a minjinum; the colour in life as in the manus, but

with the differential darkening of the pads and digital ridges carried still

further, ‘The disposition of (the interdigital pads is unusually symmetrical

owing to the above peculiarity of the lateral digits; they are of but moderate

size, but very sharply defined and well raised above cingulum-like structures,

which also have margins almost as well defined as the pads which surmount

them, in contrast to the rather umorphous folds of integurnent usually found in

that site. The lateral pair are somewhat kidney shaped; the inner (1.D.1) with

two rather ill-defined accessory pads ut its postero-external corner and the outer

(L.Del) with a single well-defined satellite at the middle of its postero-lateral

margin, and a vestige of another anterior to it; the 2nd inter-digital is obtusely

oval and the 3rd inverted pyriform, and the size sequence (area) is approx.

1=452=3,

The metatarsal pads are remarkibly elaborated. The inner pad takes the

form of a shallow crescent- or boomerang-shaped structure, concave oulwards

and with an overall length of 19 mm, and ayerage width of about 2 mm. ex-

panding to 3-5 mm. at the club-shaped upper extremity. In the example

figured (Pl. 3, Vig. B) there is a wellamarked untero-internal process reaching

gut inte the centre of the sole towards a corresponding prouess of the opposite

pad — this feature, however, is absent or only very weakly indicated in the

other eight examples exurmined. The outer metatarsal pad is of enormous

lenwél) and when undivided may spun two-thirds of the interval between the

heel and the 4th interdigital; it runs an almost straight line course parallel to

the margin of the foot and has a maxirnum length of 25 mm. and average width

if 2-3 mm. expanding tu 4°35 mm. at the anterior extremity, It is constricted

at several points in ity length and in mast examples splits up at these necks inty

a chain of from two to four separate elements with low giups between, but

eutire and divided pads may vecar on oppusite feet of the same animal. All

pads ure strongly striated we right angles to their long axes, except the apicals,

whiolt are concentrically engraved.

The tail is very lone and Hexile, but gives no external evidence of pre-

hensile functions; its length ranges in the Melville sland material from 108-128

pe, bit reacties 150 p.c. of the head and body length ia one example from

Arnhem Land; it tapers gently and uniformly to the small horny spur whieh

fovins its apex. ‘The scrodum in the cuptive male is conspicuous and well dis-

tended to uceommodate enlarged testes in November, but the condition was not

checked satisfactorily in wild canght exaunples, The mammae are abdomino-

inguinal only; 0-3 = 4; in a subadult female of the typical race, they were large;

the pusterior about 5 mm. from the base of the genital tubercle and the anterior

1) sum. from the: posterior.

RE-EXAMINATION OF MESEMBRIOMYS IHARSUTUS GOULD 153

EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

Some external dimensions vf nine examples arc summarized in the table

helow. Number 4 was measured in the Hesh shortly after death; number 5

is a filled skin, and the rest are alcohol preserved,

NORTH

ARNHEM LAND MELVILLE. ISLAND QUHENS-

LAND

a | = - — a a

Young) Sub- | Sub- |] Young Sub- | Sub- |

Adult| ad, acd. || Adult| Adult} ad. ad. Adult Adult

$j 3 | 2s} tl] se] a. es =

| 4 2 a 4 5 iT} 7 & 9

Heal and Body 300 210 | 200 2g 268 205 228 297 315

Oa. on. | on. oa.

Tail: longth 277 28h a4) Bis Slo 264 245 =| 330 ah0

Tus, ta, CH, | CB, Oa,

Tail: 94 H aid B -- 136 150 128 115 129 ios | 111 11k

White of Tail = G3 85 BO 82 — —_ 8O 107

Pes: length 67 z 62 val 64, 5Y 58 2 64

on.

Eav a6 a6 36 BBs 18} — 31 33 35 35

: , a oa. 8s

Rhinarium to cya aA 30 25 3h — | 28 28 36 a8

ea. f

Eye to evr 23 20 13 24 — 19 18 22 22

} | Ca.

PELAGE

‘Lhe type on which Hayman (1936) based his description of the pelage of

M. hirsufus melvillensis was an animal kept in captivity in London, Although

in good agreement with the material now examined, it has been thought well

to supplement it in some particulars by the following observations made wpon

field ems of animals killed in the wild as well as on the Garden Point specimen

kept in. captivity here.

Coat comparatively harsh and thin; mid-dorsally there are three series.

(1) An underfur of 14 mm. not slaty nor plumbeous as is usual, but very dark

grey or blackish (about Ridgway’s fuscous black) and not, or very obscurely,

annulated. (2) Stouter hairs of 23 mm. concolorous with the underfur in the

basal Lalf, which is followed by a 5 mm. band of warm buff, and the extreme

tip, black. (3) AD black guard hairs to 42 mm. The general colour of the

dorsum is a coarse grizzle of black and buff, paler on the nape and forequarters,

but rapidly darkening to almost black on the mid-dorsum and rump, through a

great increase in the number and length of the guards. A small area on the

nape and prescapular area is mure richly coloured than the rest, the subtermmal

band here beimg an orange buff, near Ridgwavy’s ochraceous tawny.

The yentrum is shorter furred, and with the basal colour paler than on

the dorsum, but still drab rather than plumbeous (about hair brown). The

underfur of 10 mm, is overlain by a second serics reaching 16 mm. with a

terminal band of pule buff, and lightly sprinkled with all black hairs. ‘The

basal drab shows through strongly and the general effect is of a dull buffy

grizzled grey which occupies all the ventruwm and extends on to the anterior

154 H. He FINLAYSON

lateral surface as well. Except for the darker serotum, the whole yentrum jis

very. uniform. There is x narrow nude area in advance of the genital tuhercle

and the narrow posterior extremities of the scrotum are also nude and with the

epidermis nearly black.

Crown of head, cheeks and neck grizzled like the lower foreback, Lips,

thinal and mysticial area and a ring round the eyes jet black and the muzzle

also much darkened though finely grizzled. Ears densely furred jet black on

the whole external surface and on the interior margins, and strongly contrasted

with the crown. Outcr aspect of forelimb darker than the adjacent lateral

surface and becoming increasingly so distally until carpus, metacarpus and

digits of raanus are jet black, with uo lighter markings. Hind limb also darker

externally than the adjacent body surface and becoming glossy jet black on

tarsus, metatarsus and digits with a similar absence of variegation, “The tail

strongly haired on all surfaces, largely obscuring the scales which are 8 per em.

proximally and 6 per em, mid-dorsally, where the hairs are 5 scales Jong. Tt is

jet black on all surfaces except for a variable apical portion which becomes

abruptly grevish white and lengthens’ progressively on all surfaces to a terminal

pencil of 40 min, ca.

The Garden Point specimen, after three months captivity in Adelaide, was

foinid te be in a differest moult phase from the above, the three components

af the much shorter coat averaging mid-dorsally 9, 16 and 27 mm. respectively,

The coal was glossy and even but on the posterior back showed a hegvily

erizaled replacement ¢oat mingling with the fuseus underfur. The second

serivs in the Lendon type, with a length of 35-40. 1nm., is much Jonger than in

any of the local material.

THE SKULL AND DENTITION

The cranial and dental characters of the species were briefly diaynosed

by Thomas (1906, 1909) and dealt with in more detail by Ellerman (1941)

and Tate (1951), sometimes with conflicting resalts. The following notes at

species level covering some additional points, ure based on the skull of the

Garden Point specimen, together with that of a young adult 4 from Ambhem

Jund ut the same stage, and a much younger mele skull vith unworn molars

Fram the same area,

The skull is stout and densely ossified. The general form in dorsal aspect

is narrow, with the maxiraum zv¢omatie breadth less than half the greatest

length (0:44-0:48), zygomatic arch with the maximum width cither median or

posterior in adults and the combined outline a narrow oval somewhat Hatlencd

at the sides aud in the young skull slightly concave; the anterior root of the

yvgomu, though massive, has little lateral development. dropping rapidly below

the dersal level. Rostrum heavy and broad, tlie nasals with little posterior

taper und the Jeast width at the nasofrontal suture about 28 p.c, of dhe length,

Preorbital fossa medium in size, rather narrow trom above and with the outer

wall slanting inwards rather markedly. Anterior frontal region unusually broad

and inflated and infringing on the orbits so that the lacrymals, which are small

anc rugose. are deeply imbedded between the frontuls and the zygoma root

and scarcely project into the orbit at all, Interarbital region strongly contuve

as noted by Milerman, a distinct depression extending to or beyond the coronal

suture. Brain case much longer than wide and with feebly developed tempura]

crest} following the rather sharply angulated parieto-squamosal suture to the

supracrbital ridges, which in the Melville Is. example especially, are sharp and

RE-EXAMINATION OF MESEMBRIOMYS MIASUYUS GOULD 155

slightly overhanging. Interparictal as given by Collett (1897); # large, bread

sharply angulated element.

in lateral aspect the most conspicudus teutuve is the sharp division of the

dorsal profile into two distinct planes meeting in an angle of ca. 155°, the

juuctim being slightly in advance of M' and marking the maximum depth of

the skull. The anterior margin of the evgomatic plate has a convex but same-

what sloping shoulder without spine and its lower course is variably yitched

and may be the seat of racial difference (infra), The tympanic annulus is

Jarge, and has prominent thickened margins and the linmilate process of the

squainosal overlying the petrous temporal and mastoid is developed to remark

able strenyth and is a conspicuous wibject above and behind the meatus.

The anterior palatal toraminw are variable as to breadth, overall shapo, posi-

lion of septal suture and posterior extension—in the latter particular they fall short

ef the molar rows by half the length of M* in the Melville Island’ skull and

almost reach them in the immature Arnhem Land specimen, Two minute

(? nasopalutine) foraumiue are constantly developed in the premaxillae, anterior

to the incisive canals and within 2mm, of the alveolar border; they are evidently

homplogus with those which in Leporiilus voalesee to form a single median

aperture at the same site. The palate has been described in contradictory terms

hy Ellerman and Tate: in the present matezial, at its narrowest point between

the first molars, | find that its breadth compared with that of M! yaries from

|-7 im the heavy toothed Arnhem Land skulls to 2-1 in that of Melville Island:

so measured, the palate is cortainly not nartow therefore. and might be de-

seribed as byoad in relation to the majority of Australian species; the median

spur on its posterior margin may be strongly developed or almost suppressed.

The pterygoid plates are also very strongly developed and terminate bhintly

without hamular processes. The bullae fall short of the molar rows in length,

and in so large a skull, are relatively smudl. A very conspicuous feature in

the pilatal aspect of the skull is the great width of the mesopterygoid frssa —

half as wreat again as that of the ectoptervgold,

The mandible is massive. has a straight inferior border and camparatively

slight cmargination of the posterior border above the angle: the coroneil is

ilistincy developed though muel) reduced, its relative size about ax in Muvsher-

comys fuscus and Leporillus joresi, Within the Zyzomyid group of genera, the

relative deyclopment uf the coroncid appears to follow the sequence Zyzamys >

Leamys > Mesemiriomys > Couilurus,

The upper incisors ure very large teeth with a variable angle: the Melville

Island cxample being less opisthodent than those from Arahem Land; in the

Former also the incisors are notched almost as in Mus musculus. in the molurs

the emenhim of M! is herge and prominent anteriorly, but the accessory cuspniles,

lwe or more Of which are usually claimed for the dentition, are either absent

we very small and impertect and could not justly be compared with the Lexsu-

dine condition, The buceal cusps vary front skull to skull and sumetimes en the

ayo sides of the same skull; T.3 of M' although small is generally quite distinet

and separate, but ‘146 and T.9 are almost whsorbed by the median cusp, In

M* au interesting feature in one of the mainland skulls is a yery distinct Uioah

minute V3 as in Apodemus and Acomys of the Palieavetie; it is also feebly

indicated in the Melville Island individual. In the latter alyo (on one side

daly) a supplementary cusplet is crowded in between ‘T.L und T4 giving the

appearance oF a duplication of the former, In M* the postero-internal cnsp

T.7 is well developed in the two Arnhem Land skulls (which therefore have

the full antero-posterior complement of nine lingual cusps), but is absent in

156 Ww HH. TINLAYSON

the Melville Island example. The cusp formula of the upper molars, using

the Miller notation iss—

TI+T.2:T.3 Ti: Xs Xar (T,3) (7 -X:X

Ms 4:75: T6 M?4 Tt: T.5: T.6 M's T.4:75:T6

TT V6: (TO) T7T:T6: (TS) XurT.7;T.6-X

1 ( ) =zreatly reduewd.

In the lower molars the posterior median supplementary cusp is strongly

developed in M, and M, and feebly indicated also on Ma, In the Melville

Island specimen an anterior supplementary cusp alsa appears on the first lamina

af M, in a median site between the bwo main elements — again as in Apedemus,

lolinson (1952) has recorded the occurrence of supernumary upper cheek

teeth in this species.

The following figures give in turn some skull dimensions of the young

adult male from Garden Point, Melville Island} a young adult male at the same

urowth stage from the Northern Territory mainland, and a much younger mule

from the same area. Greatest length, 62-8, 63-0, 58-0; basal length, 56-7, 57-4,

51-7; zygomatic breadth. 30-2, 28-8, 26-0; interorbital breadth, 10:2, 10-5, +3;

nasalx length, 26+3, 25:1, 22:2; nasals greatest breadth, 7:3, 7:0, G-7: palatal

length, 37-0, 37-0, 33:4; anterior palatal foramina, length. LL-G, 11-9, 11:8;

dittu, breadth, 4-2, 3-4, 4-0; bulla length, 9-1, 8-8, 8-9, Ms?~4, 11-1, 11°3, 11:6,

SKELETAL CHARACTERS

The disarticulated skeleton of the Garden Point specimen gives the fol-

lowing data. Vertebrae; cervical 7; thoracic 13; lumbar 7; sacral 2: caudal 35,

Possibly the element here reckoned as the first caudal would be fused to the

true sacrals in later life, but there would not be four sacrals as is frequent in

rvattus. The mesosteruum has 5 segments. Scapula, inax, length, 36°5; ditto,

max, breadth, 17-5; clavicle, Jongth, 16-3; humerns, length, 43-0; ditto, distal

breadth, 10-5; radius, length, 38-7; ditto, max. distal breadth, 4-9; ulna, length,

47-8; ulna, max. breadth ( coronoid ), 5-5; femur, length, 56-5; ditto, distal (inter

condylar), breadth, 11-6; tibia, lenth, 65-4; ditto, proximal breadth (medial

aspect), 11-0; meximum, combined tibio-fibular breadth, 12-5; fibula, greatest

proximal breadth, 7:2; ilio-ischial length of 1 pelvic ramus, 59-4; ilium breadth

ditto, 11-0; ischial breadth, ditto, 18+5,

SUBSPEGIFIC DIFFERENTIATION

Two subspecies have heen distinguished from the primary form of Arnhem

Land, by reference to differences in such characters as general pelage colour,

markings of the manus and pes, pes length, extent of white on the tail, and

the relative development vf the zygomatic plate in the skull, ete. Although

the species is represented by considerable series in more than one Enropean

Musewn. no detailed analysis of characters has so far been attempted, and until

this is done and the normal range of variation in a homopatric group is deter-

ined, the real status of the described forms must remain to some extent un-

certain, The material here reviewed is not sufficient ta explore this field

iklequately, but the following camments may contribute ta a partial clarification.

1, Mesembriomys hirsntus hirsutus Gould, 1842.

Three specimens only have been ayailable and none is accurately localized:

there is contributory evidence, however, that all three are almost certainly from

Arnhem Land or the Daly River drainage of the Northern Territory.

RE-EXAMINATION OF MESEMBRICMYS HIRSUTUS GOULD LST

Published dimensions might he taken to indicate that this form is larger

than MLA, meleilensis and with a relatively longer tail, but this may be due in

pert at least to the lack of aged males of the lutter fur comparisun. ‘he duta

available, however, is too heterogeneous and scanty to permit of reliable deduc-

tions on this head at present.

The body form and limbs in the three examined here ave sormewhat stuuter

thes in the Melville Island examples, the manus in particular being thick and

heavy and with shorter claws and jnterdigital pads and there is a teudeney for

higher counts in the digital ridges, one subadult carrying 11 on D3 of the

manus and 14 on D4 of the pes. The two complete tails ure relatively longer

than in the other examples — 136 te 150 pie, of the head and body Icnuth as

compared with a range of 108-125 pic. in similarly immature melvillensis, ut

previously published figures do nut indicate any siguificant difference in the tuil

leneth of adults.

The pelage in all three is less harsh and more profuse than in the island

farm ane the general colour much paler especially on the outor aspect of the

limbs, The ventral tur is creamy white to base without trace of darker ticking

The dorsum of the pes (Pl. 3, Fig. D) is strikingly variegated with blotches

of cream and black in all three specimens and this is appacesitly almost invari-

ably the case as there seeins to be na specific record to the contrary in the Jitura-

fire of the 50-odd examples which have been noted. Gould’s plate, however

(1837), which is presurmably drawn frum the sccond specimen ron Port

Essington (since the type skin lacked feet) appears to have the dorsum of the

feet all black, The dorsum of the manus also carries markings though Jess

conspicuous and generally coufined to eream or buff area along the outer

marvin of the metacarpus and some white fringing bristles at the apical pads

af the digits.

2, Mesembriomys hirsttus meletilensis Tlayman, 1936.

This appears ta me to be a well-Found atid even strongly differenthited

insular vace. Its distinetiins [ie chicfly in pelage characters, and Mayman

bused his excellent description on four examples, three of which were living

at the time in the Zoological Gardens, London; the five additional specimens

rom Melville fsland here examined are in good accord with his findings and

well contrasted with both the above primary form from the Northern Territory

mainland and that of Cape York Peninsula. [t is a sommewhat slimmer animal

than AGA, Rirsutus and with a rather harsher coat and a distinctly atrale colour

scheme, which affects the head and external aspect of the limbs differentially

so that they are thrown Jato contrast with the lighter sides and foreback, The

curs ure more densely [rred externally und are nniformly jet black. as are also

the dorsal surfaces of muti ancl pes, the characteristic markings of the animal

from the adjacent maimand being quite suppressed. The ventral surface is

quite different in appearance from that of the latter, being dark grey al the

base and bully grey externally and with a distinct admixture of all Vslick hairs

so that the general colour is a rather dark grizzled drab like the sides and

totally different Irony the all-cveam ventrum of the primary race,

Dimensions given hy Hayman for the type, which is a male at about the

same developmental stage as Na, 4 of the table (supra), agrees as te head and

bady and tail. but his pes length is lower (63 cf, 71); Tate's remeasuremani of

the type, however, corrects this to 68. ‘lhe local material gives widely different

values fer pes length in the adult ¢ and 9 (71 ef. 62). which is not fore-

shadowed in the other two groups, aud is probably an individual rather than a

sexnal peculiarity. The car measurement of 44 for the type is higher than in

1S il, H. FINLAYSON

any wt the four taken here from the tragal notch (44 tf. 38 max.), but the

method of measurement may be different,

Comparison of the dimensions of the three skulls here examined with those

already published, suggests that there ure lew, if any, valid differences between

the Melville Island and Arnhem Land forms, Considerably higher values have

heen recorded for the latter. but this is very hkely duc to age differences as no

aged melvillensis skull lus yet been examined, It is possible that the molar

rows may be shorter in the latter (11-1-11- 1 ef. 1-3-4 a) and individual molars

a litte narrower, ‘Tate's claim of a difference in the bulla does not stand. In

non-metrical points, Hayman's opinion that there is a difference in the slope

of the free margin of the zygomatic plate, seems to be confirmed and it should

also be mentioned that the arching of the profile is much steeper in the Garden

Point skull than in the two Arnhem Land examples. In both these latter also,

the parieto-squamosal sutnre shows an abrupt angle of re-entrance into the

squamosal, near the posterior root of the zygoma, which is much less developed

in the island exainple. Several other minor differences are noted (supra), Lut

it is unlikely that these have a geogruphical basis.

| am at a loss to understund Tate's statement that “the type differs little

tvary other races” — the general level of distinction of melvillensis from hirsulus

is distinctly higher than that generally accepted as justifying a trinomial in

Muridae and appears to be maintained with satisfactory constancy in the nine

specimens now examined. Moreover, the factor of complete geographical

isolation and the considerable differential gradient attained across so small a

water gap us Clarence Strait, are. as Mayinan suggested, additional reasems for

accepting it as a valid fori,

The status of the Bathurst Island representative, separated by the still

narrower Apsley Strail, remains ty be determined.

3. Mesembriamys hirsutes rafteides Thomas, 1924.

Thomas founded this name on three specimens trom Cape York Peninsula

of Qneensland, which were more or Jess intermediate between Mh, hivsutus

aml M.h. meloillensis in ventral pelage, being grey al base and greyish white

rather than cream externally. Ile also considered that the Foot was longer in

Queensland than in Arnhem Land. ‘Tate (1951) on. ve-examining the tvpe.

described the ventral fur as light grey basally and yellowish. externally, which

considerably reduces the distinction in this feature. [He also Found marked

differences in pelage due to moult phase in additional specimens taken at the

Pagene River and Port Stewart in 1945, but confirmed the longer pes. Tf ts

a be noted in the latter connection, however, that the range in M.R, melvitensis

reveles the maximum for refteides (71 mm.). Hayman (1936) states that heth

all black and variegated fect occur in the three rattoides in the British Museum,

hut Tate does not discuss this feature in his four additional examples, Tis

skull measurements suggest that the antertor palatal foramina average longer

in retéoides than in hirsutus.

A single specimen, an adult ° in alcohol, collected by W. P. Dodd in 1914

ou the Stewart River of the Pacific Cuast of Cape York Peninsula, Queensland,

has been examined for external and pelage characters only. The general colora-

lion is nearer Mh. hirsutus than M.k. melvillensis, thonwh the ventral pelage

is intermediate and possibly somewhat nearer the latter. he cars in_ this

specimen are nearly nude, the dorsum of manns and pes quite black, and the

fant Jength low (64 mm,), No skull of raftoides has been examined here aud

there igs no comment by Tate on his new material apart from dimensions; these

miudit indicate that it has the largest skull of the three forms.

RE-EXAMINATION OF MESEMBRIOMYS HIASUTUS GOULD 154

With this degree of overlapping it is nmpossible at present to assess the

stinding of rattoides, though clearly it is much less distinct from typical hirsntus

than from melvillensis, There is a probability that in recent times at least the

An uan Lard and Queensland populations have been isolated; the characteristic

northern Evealyptus savannah woodland, which seems to be the chief habitat of

the mainland forms is interrupted by a zone of treeless Mitchell grass downs

towards the southern shore of the Gulf of Carpentaciis,

ADAPTIVE MODIFICATIONS

It is remarkable that the arboreal adaptations of Mesembriomys, particularly

in the pes, have found scant mention in the definition of the genus, but Juve

been ousted and overlain by traditional and quite erroneous views of its ter-

restrial saltatory or Jevboa-like modifications.

On emergence Irom the early omnibus “genus” Mus, the twa species of

Mesembriomys were lumped with many others which are now considered very

diverse, in the almost equally omnibus but pnrely Anstralian venus, Aaprflotis

vf Lichtenstein, in which enlarzed hind limbs, modified feet, lengthened vars

and Jong and tufted tail were considered to indicate adaptive aywlogy tv the

Jerboas of the Old World. Analysis of this complex of species, chiefly by Old-

feld Thomas, had by 1909 split Lichtenstein's Mapalotis mto the Lwo groups of

currently aceepted genera, Zgzemys, Taamys, Conilurus sensu stricta, aod

Mesembriamys on the one hand and Leporillus and Netanys on the other, Tha

saltutory element in the original complex is now seen to be isolated in Netomys

alune, but recognition of this fact was long delayed and as late as I9l4 the

species of Meseanbriomys are still described in Brehm’s Tierleben as “Austra-

lischen springratten” with “namentlich aber verlangerten hinter bienen”

The first references of Gould and Gray contained no mention of the lahrits

af the animal and Gilbert, who forwarded the type tu London, if he had interma-

tion pn this head, evidently did not transmit it. In 1871 Gerrard Krefft in

Sydney, who appears to have had very sound views on the field relatiims vl

many Australian mammals, published a list of Atstralian rats with a hroad

classification into Four cuteyories, bused on whut was known Jocully of theie

habits. In this seherne he divided Hapalotis into two sections. “The ‘Tree Rats

representing Uie Sqnizrels in Australia” and the “Jerbou Rats". His allocation of

some of the species to the first group would not meet with acceptance now, but

Mesembriomys firsutus was correctly placed there as “The Great Hapalutis ur

Tree Rat of Novth Australia’, Krefft, 1 believe, never worked personally in the

hubitats of the species, but evidently had wecess to information on it, derived

from Stange or Macgillivray or other early collectors in the North. In 1897,

Knut Dahl published an excellent first-hand account of both species uf Mesem-

briouiys ti which the tree haunting habits of Airsutus and its ability as a climber

wert well documented tor the frst time, These two contribttions on the natural

history of the animal, as noted above, made no impact on the classifleations

which were worked out in London, which followed severely thearetical lines,

and it was not till 1951 that the arboreal character of the genus was. plainly

stated by Tate.

The significance of the moderately enlarged lind limb (in coutradistinction

to elongation and narrowing of the pes) which is found more or Jess developed

in most of the six genera named abave, is evidenUy nol adaptive in the narrow

and immediate sense, since it occurs alike in arboreal, cursorial, truly saltatory

dnd rock-haunting forms of Australian murids anc fn monodelphia, in growps

as different in habits as Leporidae and Sciuridlae. Gray early recognised this

peculiarity of the lareer members of “Hapalotis” and coined the not altogether

16U) H. H. FINLAYSON

inappropriate name of “Rabbit Rats” for them, though it has been suggested

that the ear form also had its influence in this. In the evolution af the generic

euucept of Mesembriomys it plays a diminishing part and the above statement

to Brehm’s Tierleben may be contrasted with that of Thomas in 1909, “fourm

nurmal”—or of Longman, 1916~—“le¢s not markedly unequal”. Justification

For the latter may be obtained by expressing ihe Jength of the humerus plus

ulna-radius as a percentage of that of femur plus tibia, thus obtaining an approyi-

mate intermembral index which gives..an estimate of the relative development

of the fore anc hind limb, sans manus and pes. In Mesembriomys hirsutus this

is 73, Leporillus jonesi. 73, Rattus lutreola 78, R. rattus alexandrinus TS,

Oryctolagus cuniculus T7, and Lepus evrapacus 85.

The pes was thought by Thomas (1909) to be Jong and narrow: a mistake

corrected by Ellerman in 1941 and again hy Tate i 1951. Its length in rela-

tion to that of lead and body (max. 25 pic.) is certainly high when compared

with most Australian Ruttus species, but is closely. approached in this by several

non-saltatory forms such as Gyomys apodemoides 25 p.c., Leporilles ‘conditor

and apicalis 24 pc. and Laomys peduneulalts and Rattus greyi 22 p.c., and

falis much befuw its value in saltatory Nolomys, whieh in the five species

measured ranges from 32-35 p.c. The hallmark of the saltatory pes, moreover,

is in the low breadth/length ratio, which in the ubove Netomys spp. has the

range 4-12 (11) pe. as against the remarkably bigh value of 24-30 (26) p.c in

Mesenibriomys hirsutus vars. Metrical support uf terrestrial saltatory speciall-

zation is therefore lacking, ‘Tate claimed as “seansorial” modifications, chicfly

the width of the metatarsal segment of the foot and the large size and strong

cucvature of the claws. In view of what is now well established as to the habits

aud habitats of the animal, this wide term may give place to ane of narrower

connotation, and most of the features of the pes listed below may be regarded as

evidence of arboreal adaptation, analogous lo those found in other groups of tree-

climbers, and including verv likely, the modified type of arhoreal “saltation™

from branch to braveh, frequent in such forms.

1. The relatively great length of the hallux and of D5 and thetr more anterior

position on the pes. The former of these two conditions was recognised hy Eller-

man and the latter is also valid, Whether these features are to he regarded us

specializations de rove, or rather as a retention of primitive conditions may he

debated, but they certainly run counter to the trend in most Australian terrestrial

genera. which (especially in suldesert areas) show a progressive reduction in the

size vf the lateral digits with a markedly posterior position on the pes, culminat-

ing in the extreme condition of Notemys, which is inescapably specialized.

The dispesition of Ds, 1 and 5 on the pes of M. hirsufus is yimilur te that

mn some arboreal specics of the Austro-Pacific genera Cyramys and Unicamis,

but whether it is accompanied in life by an increase in the range of lateral

miverments of these digits, there is no évidence to show.

2 High value of the breadth/length ratio of the foat. This trend in a

general way is parallel to the above, the nearest analogues amongst Australian

forms being species of Melomys and Uramys, with Notomys again providing

the opposite extreme. Laomys pedunculatus and some Raftlus spp. (es.

Inéveola), which ure not usually suspected of arboreal hahits, offer partial excep-

tions and have very high B/L values; Loomys, however, may be seansorial in

the sense of ruck climbing.

3. Tnereased. stae, strength and curvature of the nails of the digits. This is

a strongly marked feature shown alsa in the manus, and equalled by few, if

any, Australian species,

KE-BSAMINATION OF MESEMBRIOMYS HIKSUTUS GOULD 16h

4, Increase in the number, area, and effectiveness of the plantar structures

intolved in frictional coniact. This is the most obvious, if not the most signi-

ficant, modification of the member, It is shown in the rubber-like consistence

and punetation of the general plantar surface; in the prominence and multi-

plication of the digital ridges and their striation; in the height and sharp sculp-

turing of the interdigital pads; and particularly in the enormous development

of the metatarsal pads, which (especially in the outer of the two) is probably

unique in Australian muridae and recalls the condition of some of the arborcal

Dasyuridae.

The tail, as mentioned (supra), gives no evidence of prehensile powers,

but it may be recalled that the long terminally tufted tail mm general is by no

means exclusive to terrestrial saltators like the Jerboas, but is strongly developed

in such typical arboreal animals as the Tree Shrews (Tupaia) and Tarsius:

In some particulars the modifications listed above may fall short of what

is found in some Austro-Pacifie moridue and are certainly much inferior to

those of the perfected arboreal forms of the Oriental region, such as Haeromys

and Chiromyscus. Nevertheless, they probably entitle Mesembriomys hirsutus

(in spite of the Jerboa myth) to rank at least equally with the tree-living species

of Uromys and Melomys, as an Australian arboreal product.

REFERENCES

Cotzetr, R., 1897. Prac. Zool. Soc, London (1897). p. 322,

Dawn, K., 1897. The Zoologist, No. #71, pp. 15-106.

Euieraian, J, BR. 194). “Wamilies and Genera of Liviag Rodents”, London, 2, pp, 23-64,

Gray, J. E.. 1841 (in Grey, G.). “Journal of Two Expeditions of Diseovery in North-west

aod Western Australia’, London, pp. 404-413.

Gray, J. E., 1843. “List of Specimens of Mammals in the British Museonr’, London, p, 116,

Gounn, J., 1842. Proc. Zool. Soo. London, X, p. 12.

Goutp, J., 1851. Thia., XUX, p. 137.

Goutp, J., 1857, “Mammals of Australia”, IT, Pl. 4 and Text.

fayman, AR. W.. 1936. Ann. May. Nat. Hist. 10, NVI, p. 363.

Heex. L., 19t4. In Brehm's Tierlehen, 2, p. 380.

[xepaLe, T., and) Trovenrox, E, ve G., 1934. “Checklist of Maramals Recorded fram Aus-

italia”, Sydney, p. SL.

Jounson, D. H., 1952. Jour. Mamm., 33, 1, p, 70.

Kaerer, G.. 1871. “Mammals of Australia’, text and plate on rats (wmmtbered).

Lonenmtan, FT. A. £916. “Notes on the Classification of Common Rodents”, Melbourne,

pp, lO. (6, figs. 3 and 6,

Ocrsr, J.. 1592. “Catalogue of Australian Mannnale”, Sydney. p. 117.

Tate, G. H. H,, 1951. Bull. Am. Mns, Nat. Mist, 97, 4, p. 268.

Tare, G. H. H., 1952.) Phid., 98, T, pp, 572-573.

Tuomas, O., 1906. Ann. May. Nat, Hist. 7, XVII, p. 84,

Tuonas, O., 1909. Tbid., 8, ITL, p. 372.

Tuomas, O., 1924, Ibied., 9. XVII, p. 296.

Trovensvon, Bue G,, 1935, Ree. Anst. Musenm, XTX, 4, py, 259-262, plate XIX,

EXPLANATION OF PLATES

PLATE 1

Fig. A. Dorsal aspeet of the: skull of a young adult 2 of Mesembriamys hirsutus melvillensis

from Garden Point, Melville Island, Northern Territory of Australia (x 1-1).

Fig, B. Lateral aspect! of the same: (x 1-1),

'The lower profile of the bulla figured is modified by a. malformation; normally it is

less fattened than as shown.

Fig

Cc,

. D.

. B,

. FF,

.G,

» A.

H. H. FINLAYSON

Palatal aspect of the same (x 1-1),

Buceal aspect of the mandible of a young adult g of Mesembriomys hirsutus

hirsutus from the mainland of the Northern Territory of Australia (x 1-3).

Ditto, in an adult ¢ of Rattus norvegicus Erxl. for comparison with Fig. D (x 1-6).

Occlusal aspect of slightly worn right upper molars of the above example of Mesem-

briomys hirsutus melvillensis (x 5-0).

Ditto. in the above example of Mesembriomys hirsutus hirsutus showing the full

complement of 9 lingual cusps and T3 on M2 (x 5-0).

Ditto, in an adult g of Apodemus sylvaticus Linn. for comparison with Fig. G

(x 14:0).

PLATE 2

The above example of Mesembriomys hirsutus melvillensis in captivity in Adelaide (x 0-30 ca.).

Fig.

DaAn>

PLATE 3

Ditto (x 0:27 ca.).

Plantar aspect of right pes of the same (x 1-0 ca.).

Palmar aspect of right manus of same (x 1-9 ca.).

Dorsal aspect of right pes of the above example of Mesembriomys hirsutus hirsutus

(x1-5 ca.).

PLATE |

Hi. HW, Fintayson

PLATE

H.. H. Finuaysonx

PLATE 3

H. H. Finutayson

NOTES ON THE GENUS CAECULISOMA (ACARINA: ERYTHRAEIDAE)

WITH COMMENTS ON THE BIOLOGY OF THE ERYTHRAEOIDEA

BY R. V. SOUTHCOTT

Summary

The larva of the genus Caeculisoma Berlese, 1888, is defined from the rearing of a larval species

C. darwiniense n. sp. to the nymphal stage. Larvae were captured parasitic upon the locust Goniaea

sp. aff. hyalina Sjostedt at Coomalie Creek, Northern Territory. The larva, pupa I and nymph are

described, and figures given. The nymph is compared with previously known adults or nymphs.

Mites answering to Caeculisoma clavigerum Canestrini, /S97, are recorded from the

Aitape-Wewak region of New Guinea; this is the first occasion on which this species has been

possibly identified since the original record. Caeculisoma argus ssp. io n. ssp. is recorded from

South Australia. The biology and distribution of Caeculisoma is discussed. It is pointed out that the

wide geographical distribution of the genus is at least partly explicable on the grounds of dispersion

of larvae parasitic upon locusts and grasshoppers. A comparison is made between the annual cycles

of life histories of various Australian Erythraeoidea. It is shown that two broad classes are

distinguishable in temperate Australia, these being the long-duration-egg class ( 1 ) and the short-

duration-egg class (11). In class I the animal passes about 2/3 of the annual cycle as the egg

(including deutovum), and the other instars are fairly short. The larva hatches from spring to early

summer, the animal passing through successive instars to the adult stage by the summer, with

oviposition in general from mid- to late summer. In class 11 the animal passes about 1/3 of the

annual cycle in the egg, and the successive instars are comparatively long. Oviposition is in early

summer, and the larvae occur over the autumn (March-May). Some variation occurs to the above

general patterns, which are tabulated and commented upon.

NOTES ON THE GENUS CAECULISOMA (ACARINA; ERYTHRAEIDAE)

WITH COMMENTS ON TITLE BIOLOGY OF THE ERYTHRAEOIDEA

by R. V, Souracorr

[Read 13 October 1960]

SUMMARY

The larva of the genus Caeculisoma Rerlese, 1888, is defined from the

rearing of a larval species C. darwiniénse u, sp. to the ayinphal stage. Larvae

were captured parasitic upon the locust Geniaeu sp. aff. hyalina Sjostedt at

Coomahe Creek, Northern Territory. ‘The larva, pupa T and nymph are de-

seribed, and figures given. The nymph is compare with previously knows

adults or nymphs,

Mites answering to Caeculisoma clacigerum Canestemi, 1897, are recorded

from the Aitape-Wewuk region cf New Guinea: this is the first occasion on

which this species has been possibly identified since the vrivinal record, Caecu-

lisomu. argus ssp. dan. ssp. is reoorcded fram South Australia.

The biology and distribution of Caecvlisoma js discussed. It is pointed

out that the wide veogruphicul distribution of the genus is at least partly ox-

licable on the grownds of dispersion of larvae parasitic npon locusts and grass-

hoppers.

A comparison is made between the annual cycles of life histories of various

Australian Erythraenidea. It is shown that two broad classes are distinguishable

in tempetate Australia, these being Uhe long-duration-egg class (1) and the

short-duration-cger class (IE), In class I the animal passes. about 2/3 of the

annual eycle as the exe (including deutovum), and the other instars are fairly

short. The Sarva hatches from spring to early summer. the auimal passing

through sndcessive instars to the adult stave hy the sunuuer, with oviposition. in

general from aiid~ io late summer. In class Uf the aninial passes about 1/3 of

the annual cyele in the egg, and the successive instars are comparatively long,

Oviposition is in early summer, and the larvae occur over the untumm { March-

May). Some variation oceurs to the above general patterns, Which are tabulated

and commented upon,

INTRODUCTION

The writer has recently defined the characters of the larva of the genus

Caeculisoma. Berlese, 1888, in his monograph on the genera of the Erythraecoidea

(1961). That definition was hased upon the rearing of an undescribed larval

Erythracuid mite to the nymphal stage in 1943, specimens of the mite having

been taken parasitic upon a species of locust at Coomalie Creek, Northern

Territory. From that definilion it was apparent that no previons larvae of

Caeculisoma lad been ceseribed.

In the present paper the species concerned is described as CO. darwiniense

n. sp. from the larva, pupa I and nymph. The species is compared, in the

nymplhial stave, with previously described adults (or possibly nymphs) of

Caeculisoma. Some reference will be made to other species of the genus, both

from the systematic and distribution aspects.

A comparison will be made between the annual life cycles of various

Erythraévidea, and the present knuwledyge of the durations of the various stages,

and same gencral conclusions drawn.

Trans. Roy. Soc. §. Aust. (1961), Vol. 84.

164 R, ¥. SOUTHCOTT

DESCRIPTION® OF A NEW AUSTRALIAN SPECIES

Caeculisoma darwiniense n, sp,

Figs, 1-4

Description of Larva (Figs. 1, 2) (from the holotype ACA1062B; also

supplemented where indicated from the paratype specimen ACAL062A ): Colour

in life, red, Length of idiosoma (unengorged ), 290», width, 220y; animal, 415)

long to tip of cheliceral blades. Idiosoma the usual ventrally flattened clongate

spheroid,

Dorsal scutum as figured, oval with anterior margin flattened, slightly con-

caye; anterolateral angles rounded; posteriorly produced into two flattened

projections in relation to the posterior sensillae, with a shallow notch between

them, Shield laterally convex; slightly concave posterolaterally at the level

of the PSens.

The Standard data in micra of the type and paratype are as follow:

ACA1062B ACAIL(0G2:

Specimon (halotype) (paratwpe)

AW 83-5 85

MW 87 90

PW 7 78

SBa 8 : tt

SBp | 15 15

ASB a4 30

ISD 47 48

L 87 $8

Ww 97 103

A - M* 9 18

A—?P 44 43

AL Al 43

ML 13 46

PL 34 33

ASens 4] 40

PSens | 75 65

ASB/ISD 772 67

Ds 26—61 } 31—5h

* Distance between centres of AL and MT. scutalae; equivalent to A— TP, but using the second

row of scutalae instead of the posterior pair.

Scutalae of medium size, lightly curved, with fine adpressed barb-like cilia-

lions, the setac terminally blunted; AL and MI, setae of about the same thick-

ness, PL a little thinner. AL setae arise near the anterolateral angles of the

shield; MI. posterior and slightly lateral to AL; PL scutalae arise near the edges

of the shield, and as the shield narrows posteriorad the PL scutalae are slightly

medial to ML.

Scutal sensillae are fine, tapering, pointed, very lightly ciliated (under oil

immersion). ASens arise a little (about 81) behind the ML scutalae. PSens

arise about 5, anterior to posterior end of shield.

Eyes one on each side, circular, lenses 14, across, and situated in the

unengorged specimen between the Ievels of the PL scutalae and the PSens.

* For the technical descriptive terms used and the definitions of the “Standard data”

the writer’s account (1961) should be referred to.

NOTES ON THE GENUS CAECULISOMA 165

Fig. 1.—Cueculisoma darwiniense nu. sp. Larva, dorsal view of holotype. The

tracheae ure ulso shown, and some of the internal structure of the gnathosoma. _Let-

tering shows the sensalac of the legs: come. eoruaatala: sin, sinuala, solgen. soleno-

tt.

genuala, solturs, solenotarsala, soltib. solenotibiala, spin. spinala.

}

y ea recs

Fig. 2.-Caeculisoma darwiniense n. sp. Larva, ventral view of holotype. Some of

the internal structure of the gnathosoma is shown. Sensalae of the legs lettered as

in Fig. 1. (In general, as in previous illustrations, an effort has been made to dis-

tinguish in Figs. 1 and 2 between the dorsal and ventral sctae, in the limbs as well

as elsewhere, but where a seta, particularly a sensala, is so placed that its seta base

is visible from both sides, it may be shown in both the dorsal and the ventral views. )

NOTES ON THE GENUS CAECULISOMA 167

Dorsal idiosomalae similar to scutal scobalae, Hghtly curved, parallel-sided

or slightly tapering (blunted terminally), with fine adpressed barbed ciliations

along the convex side, a few more outstanding barbs heing present distally along

the concave side; arranged 2 (ocular row), 8, 6, 6, 4, 2; total 28, The veular

selae are the largest of the dorsal idiosomalae; the selae next in size are only

4p long (type) or 44 (paratype); the smallest dorsal setac are the 5 lateral

setue down each side (see Fig, 1).

Venter: between coxae Ta pair of scobalae (sternalac), fairly short, pointed,

ciliated, 30, long; between coxae Il a similar pair, but stronger and longer, 36%

long; between coxae IIL a similar pair, 314 long; behind coxae ITT, on the ventral

opisthosoma, are similar setae, which gradually change in character posteriorad.,

to approximate those of the posterior pole of the idiosama dorsally, arranged

4.24542, 142+ 1; 22-30. long.

Coxal formula 1, 2, 2, Coxala I strong, pointed, ciliated, 40, long. Medial

coxala IT pointed, shghtly ciliated, 32, long; lateral coxala If curved, bhuinted,

ciliated, 20u long. Medial coxala TI similar to 1, 28 long; lateral coxala IIT

curved, somewhat pointed, ciliated, 204 long. Supracoxala present to coxa I,

normal, peg-like, 4a. lone,

Legs normal for family: 1 520» long, I 4553p, LW 533, (all lengths including

coxae and claws). Lach trochanter with one seta (trochanterala, a scolvala),

Tarsi tapering, with irregularities, as figured, The femurtibia segments more

or fess cylindrical. ‘Tarsus L 104, long (excluding claws and pedicle) by 18

high, Tibia I 102 long, Tarsus III L04. long (without claws and pedicle)

by 15 high. Tibia JIL 143, Jong.

On the legs the following is the arrangement of the specialized setae:

trichobothrialae solenoidaluo spinalae

| (sensillae) (solemn jdie) (eupathidies)

genuul 0 1 ()

genu IL 0 () 0

genn TIT 0 0 0

tibia I 0 a 1 (comyp.*)

tibia IL av 2 0

tibia TIT 0 1 wD

tarsus L 0 1 | 4( 1 dorsal

1 subterminal

1 comp,

; 1 ped. t+)

tarsus IT 0 1 1 (pod.**)

tarsus TIL 0 i 1 (ped.)

* companala, accompanying the posterior solencidala.

++ the spindle nlongside the pociclo. This has been named the pretarsala in the trombicnlid

system of nomerclature. Newell (1957 p. 407) finds this terra tinacreptable, “a misnomer’.

Possibly “sinnala”’. here proposed, is an accoptable term; (hese setae are charauteristically siuous,

The scobalae of the legs do not in general show a high degree of differen-

tiation. Trochanteral formula 1, 1, 1; basifemoral 4, 4, 2; telofemoral 5, 5, 5.

Tarsal claws; anterior strong, nearly straight with strong terminal ventrally

directed hook, unciliated; middle claw faleiform, more slender; posterior claw

strong, faleiform, with long ventral ciliations,

Gnathosoma as figured. Chelac bases (“mandibles”) form a compact

cordate mass, with finely punctate chitin, Cheliccral blades rounded, simple,

168 R. ¥. SOUTHCOTT

hook-like, without barbs but with a concave cutting edge. Galeala (galeal seta)

curved, pointed, lightly ciliated, 20, long. Hypostomal lip present, delicate,

fimbriated. Anterior hypostomala simple, pointed, curved, 17) long. Posterior

hypustomala pointed, ciliated, 46, long,

Palpal setal formula 0, 0, 1, 1, 3, 7, ie. no palpal coxala ov trochanterala.

Palpal supracoxala present, 34 long. The claw of the palpal tibia bifid, curving

ventromedially, the yeutromedial tooth the stronger,

Description of Pupa | (from ACAIO080B, supplemented from ACALOG0A).

Colour red. General shape typical for the erythracoid pupa I, ovoid, fattened

ventrally, notched anteriorly, and with various protuberances, as normal. Length

12002, width 1000, (estimated from the preserved cast skin). "The pupa, par-

ticularly over the dorsal surface, is provided with a bristly coating of typical

pupal setae, mostly projecting posteriorad, Setae 56-1304 Jong, slender, stiff,

nude, swordlike, gradually tapering except ta ferminal part, which then tapers

abruptly to a slightly blunted point; setae provided with the normal papillate

basal socket.

Description of Nymph (Figs. 3, 4) (from ACALOGOQA, freshly emerged,

unfed, then dried, finally mounted in polyvinyl alcohol, and possibly slightly

cumpressed from above; also supplemented from ACALO60B). Colour in life

red. Length of body to tip of mouthparts (ypostomal lip) 1360p, width 930,.

External appearance normal for Genus, with the usual squarish and lumpy

outline.

The standard data are (in micra):

| |

-Asens Peas SBa | SsEp IsD | DS

* Prom ACA IOGNB

His

ea 160* iz | ot 460 | ki —160

Cristal sensillae long, thin, pomted, nude. Anterior end of crista with ovoid

boss, about 125y long by 95 across; anterior point of boss 86. ahead of centres

of ASens. Buss provided with about [8 scobalae, long, tapering, puinted, with

slentler projecting barbed ciliations, these being longest basally; setae 160-200.

long. Anterior sensillary area enclosed by the forking anterior arms of the

crista, which scpurate ut an angle of about 60°. Posterior sensillary area en-

closes u transverse ovoid roughened boss.

Eyes 1+ 1, 57 across, placed well behind mid-cristal point (MCP. or

midpoint between centres of bases of ASens and PSens; distance from eve level

to MCP 170,),

Dorsal idiosomalae long, tapering, curved, slender, often sinuous in the

slide mount, quite ciliated (more marked basally), 80-160, long, Setae dense,

forming a hairy covering over the body. Venter of idiosoma with similar svtac.

Leys as figured, with the normal somewhat beaded and irregulir appear-

ance of the genus. Teg T 1345, long, 1 790p, TH 965.2, TV 1470). (all measured

From the distal point of the coxa to the tips of the tarsal claws). Tarsus I 245

long by 89. high, tibia 1 3192 long. Tarsus [V 153, long by 72» high, tibia

1V 352, long. Tarsi with scopulae. Tibial tuberositics present, normal, situ-

ated a little heyond middle of segment in tibia I. 1, UL, but in LV about 3/5

along length of segment. Clear areas with a punctate appearance to the chitin

are placed distally and dorsally on some leg segments (such as Vitzthum (1926)

NOTES ON THE GENUS CAECULISOMA

Fig. 3—Cueculisoma danviniense n. sp. Nymph, entire, dorsal view.

169

i7u R. V. SOUTHCOTT

Fiz, 4.—Cacculisoma darwiniense n. sp. Nymph Part of praporlosoma,

including crista and left eye, and adjacent structures,

NOTES ON THE GENUS CAERCULISOMA 71

describes und Agures for C. argys Vitzthum, 1926, and CU, infernale Vitzthum,

1926, and Cooreman (1958) figures for C, afrium Cooreman, 1958; they are

present also in other species of Caeculisoma and Callidosoma examined hy the

writer). One such of these is figured dorsodistally upon the trochanter I of

the nymph in Fig. 4.° Tarsal claws 2, normal, strong, falciform, simple. Legs

thickly covered with setac, the seobalac similar ta those on the idiosoma.

Gnathosoma normal, as figured. Palpi as figured, characteristic of the

genus (see redefinition by the writer (1961) ).

Locality. (1) The type (ACAi062B) aud paratype (ACA1062A) were two

larvae, captured ectoparasitic upon the external snrface of the right hindwing of

a locust, in hilly country about 3-4 miles south of Coomalic Creek, Northern

Territory, 13 June, 1943 (li, V. Southcott). The host has heen identified as

Gonigea sp. wt, hydlina Sjstedt, 4, by Dr. K. H. L. Key, Division of Ento-

mology, C.$.1.R.0., Canberra (pers. comm. 11 Noy., 1937).

(2) Another batch of 6 larval mites PAGAN) was obtained from the

same locality, 7 May, 1943, attached to hindwings of a ? specimen of Goniaed

sp. af fryalina (identified by K. H, L. Key, as above) (R. V. Southestt). All

specimens of mites were atlached by their mouthparts. to veins of the wings,

except one specimen which was recorded as “sitting astride a cell” of the wing,

This latter specimen could, of course, have been dislodged from some other

situation by the trauma of capture and handling.

Biology. The mites were detached from their host in each case, aud the

hast preserved. The mites were trausterred individually to clean, dry tubes. Of

the eight specimens two subsequently underwent ecdysis to pupa I and nymph.

The details of these two successful rearings ure as tollow:

Spevimen ACATOB0A | ACAIN60R

Taphined and ranioved 7 Moy, L483 7 May, 1443

Became immobile 1Q May ; 7 May

Shin spht off l? May , 11 May

Nyinph emerged 27 May 22-25 May

Survived anti 7-11 June 2-10 ana

No attempt to feed the nymphs thus obtained was made. During the ex-

periment the tubes were kept as cool as possible, ie. by being kept in the

shade, but without any special facilities or procedures.

REMARKS ON SYSTEMATICS

(1) Lanyas

The definition of the larva of Caeculisoma Berlese. 1485, has been given

by the writer clsewhere (Sonthceott, 1961). That definition wus bused on the

species described above, C. darwiniense n. sp., and its experimental rearing from

larva to nymph. From a study of those larval Callidosomatinae that have pre-

viously heen described it is apparent that no laryac of Caeculisoma have heen

deseribed hitherto. The species C. darwiniense n. sp. is based upon the Jarva

as type, but as there are no other published acconnts of Jarval Cugculisonit its

syslemutic position within the genus must depend upon the characters of the

nymphal stuze reared (see below). The writer has seen a number of unde-

* The tibial tuberosities haye the same punctate chitin and it is apparent that the iibial

tuberasities are hemologous structures. Probably they serve as chemical sense organs, and

nat as organs of ovulaw function, as Vitzthuin suygested.

172 . V. SOUTHCOTT

scribed species af larvae of Caeculisaoma and other genera of the Callidoso-

matipae eetoparasitic upon Australian locusts, grasshoppers and other insects,

which it fs hoped to deseribe Formally later, and to make appropriate com-

parisons.

(2) Avunts Any Nyasceats

Cooreman (1958) has reviewed the species of Cerecelisanie of the worle,

listing the important systematic characters of cach species. Inchiding his C.

afrum Cooreman, 1958, the total of described adults (or possibly oympls )

anminted to LO species. Among these 10 species the dorsal idiosomal setae are

of diverse character, e.g. having been recorded as expanded, clavate, cyludri-

cal, aspuragus-tip-like, ete.. hut in none does the dorsal setation resemble that

of C. darwiniense n. sp., where such setae are of a single kind. uniform in

character over the dorsum, being long, flexible, pointed, tapering and ciliated.

There is, however, one species of the genus which has been recorded frum

Indunesia and New Guinea, Coeculisoma suleatum (Canestrini, 1898),° where

sume further comment is required. OF C. sulcatum Cooreman (1938, p. 45)

states: “Les puils de Vidiosorma semt de deux types: les uns portent quelques

ramifications latérales, les autres sont simples, lisses et rigides, quoique pre-

gressivement effilés distalement; ces derniers sont d’ailleurs aussi plus longs que

les autres”. Originally Canestrinit hud described a species Rhyncholophus sulcatus

in 1898 and 1899.° His description of the setae (1898, p, 48L) was: “Corpa

vestito di setole cigliate: arti pure coperti di setole cigliatc, fra le quali se ne

osservano aleune rare assai sottili & semplici che sono piantate sull’arto ad

angolo quasi retto”, The specimen came from Eriina, Astrolabe Bay, New

Guinea. Unfortunately the remainder of the description is alsa brief, and

Canestrini provided no figures. Vitathum (1924. pp. 357-9) redescribed this

species from Krakatan Island, Sunda Eslands, Indonesia, placing it in Belaustiim

(sic). In 1926 (pp. 165-9) he referred again ta this species, placing ft in

Caeculisoma, and again stated (p. 169) his belief that his specimen from Kra-

katau was identical with Canestrin’s species: “Auch heute noch glaube ich

an der [dentitét der Art mit Canestrinis Rhyncholophus sulcatus. Denn Canes-

trinis Beschreibung passt Wort ftir Wort auf sie... .” (apart from one point

* Some dowbt sitaches to the dates 1888 and 1899 of Canestrini’s two articles. These

dates will be used here as given by the writer in hig monograph on the genera of the

Eryvthiacotlea (1961), followieg Vitethum (1924, 1926). ‘She welter has not ¢cen the

vecont! of these two papers hy Canestrini ("1899"), Vitzthum (1824, 1926) had. hew-

uver, seen both papers, referring to the pagination of the secand paper fram 2 reprint. As

Vitethnm provides (1924, p. 357) a translation of Cunestrini’s description in Lalian into

German, comesponding ta Cunestrini, (1495) us used here, the present writer assumes that

his “1896" paper contains al least ng further deseriptive material relating to his Rhyncholophus

wulegtus, (INB.. In 1924 Vitathem dated both of these papers as “1898".) A minor further

point is that it is possibly surprising that Canestrinai aud not place Hhyncholophus suleatius

nomedliately in Caceulivuma, smee he hud earlier (1897) described a species of mite. from

New Chines as Caenulisoma claniger Canestrini, 1897. Cooreman (1958) has amended the

specific aume to elasiverum, presumably correctly, since Canestrini was probably using claviger

ag an ajovlive and not a5 a substantive, ond has yemarked that CO. clavigerum, which was

unturtunately originally very briefly described without fizures, has not been recorded snb-

sequently. Ifowever, the present weiter hus in his own collection five specimens af Cavcu-

fisomu from the Aitupe-Wewak arew of New Guinea which answer ta Canesteini’s deseription.

Locality records of these are; 3 specimens, Babiany, 22 December, 1444 (ACAIBLY, 1620,

1621); 2 specimens, Sunm, 15 Webruary, $945 (ACAI622, 1625), All specimens were onl-

lector in leaf-litter and humus on the forest Hoor, neny the evast (RK. Vo Southeott). Pessibly

We species are present Qrmong these five speetmens, Il is hoped to refer to this nueterial

further in a later paper.

NOTES ON ‘THIE GENUS CARCILISOMA 173

in the description of the palp where he believed Canestrini was in error). The

present writer believes that this viewpoint of Vitzthum on the identity of the

specics may be accepted.

Vitzthum (1924, p. 359) stated of the setation of his Krakatau specimen:

“Die Belisurung des Rumpfes die in der Abbildung [of Vitzthum] weggelassen

ist, ist sehe dicht and besteht in feinen, weichen, massig kurzen, beiderscits

spirlich gefiederten Haaren, dic den gefiederten Haaren der Beine durchaus

gleichen. Einen besonderen Radiationspunkt, wie in der Gattung Leptus

Latreille, 1795? zeigen diese Mumpfhaare nicht”. As he stated, he did not

figure the dorsal idiosomal sctac, but he did figure (his Vig. 4 on p. 359) the

lex setae. whieh were mostly similar to the dorsal idiosomal sctac, but includect

alsa some more outstanding simple spiniform setae. Tt is apparent that Cuore-

min has taken these latter as being present also upan the idiosoma, which is

in faet not stated by Canestrini or by Vitzthum. Womersley (1934, p. 241) in

his key to the genus Caeculisome has made a similar error,

Neither Canestini or Vilzthum gave any measurements of the lengths af

the dorsal idiosomal setae in C. suleatum, although Vitzthim (1924) described

them as short, On a comparative basis the present writer would consider the

dorsal idiosomalac of C. darwiniense as long, which is a fair description of

svlae 80-160. long wnong the Erythrueoidea and Trombidioidea. The ciliated

ley setae of C, sufcatum, as described and figured by Vitzthum (1924), and

which he states are the same as the dorsal body hairs of the same species, ure

obviously different in character from those of the C. durwiniense nytaph.. Those

of C. sulecatum are from Vitzthum’s Fig. 4 fairly short, and carry only 4-6 vilia-

tions throughout their length. In C. darwintense nymph the dorsal idiosomalae

are long, tapering gradually, heavily ciliated, particularly basally, and the usual

leg scobalac have the same character,

There are ulso other differences which may be noted between C, dar

winiense and C, sulcatym (Canestrini) Vitzthum. In the two nymphs of C.

darwiniense available the posterior projection of the crista behind the posterior

sensillary area appears to be comparatively short, but unfortunatel pigmeut

within the specimens prevents much study of that feature. In C. sulcaticm the

posterior provess is of great length, being almost as long in Vitzthum’s specimen

as the remainder of the crista (sec: 1924, p. 358, including bis Fig, 3), ILowevet,

this point is not stressed here, since this feature is not necessarily comparable

between a nymph and an adult (Vitzthum stated his specimen was an adult).

Another difference between these two species. undoubtedly of specific signifi-

ance, lics in the leg structure, going on Vitzthum's Fig. 3 (1924, p. 358), ‘I’hus

legs comparatively shorter, at least in Jeg IL.

REMARKS ON THE BIOLOGY AND GEOGRAPHICAL

DISTRIBUTION OF CAECULISOMA

Adults or nymphs of this genus are terrestrial predaters, being found in

hums, leaf-litter, under bark and other similar sitnations. The larva recorded

in this paper was taken parasitic upon u locust, and the writer has seen otlicr

Austealian larval species of Caceylisoma, at present undescribed, taken ecty-

parasitic from other Australian locusts and grasshoppers.

* Acceplel now ws 1796, See Southeott (1961).

17h th V. SOUTIICITT

At the present time, recorded specimens of the genus are distributed yeo-

graphically us tollows:

South America - - - — G. tuberculatum (Berlese, 1588),

Marquesas Islaiids - - | cordipes Vitzthum, 1935..

Africa - - ~ _ = >. Gfriunt Cooreman, 1958,

New Guinea, Sunda Tsiands - C. sulcatum (Canestini, 1898),

New Guinew = =:.%. C. elavigerwm Canestrini, 1897.

Sumatra . - - - CL arzus. Yitzthum, 1926.

GC. infernale: Vitztluin, 1926,

Australia - - - C. mentaimuan (Rainbow, 1906).

C. nasutum First, 1928,

C. johnstont Womersley, 1934,

C.. dartwiniense n. sp.

/, argus ssp, io mn. ssp.*

This. wide gevgraphical distribution of the genns has heen commented om

by previous writers; most recently by Cooreman (1958), who hus pointed out

that il specimens recorded so far haye come from the southern hemisphere,

between 0° and 40° S. latitude. Such a wide geographical dispersion could at

least i part be explained on the hypothesis that they are spreud, or have been,

hy larvae parasitic upon hosts which themselves have considerable powers of

dispersion, et, by Aight or other meaus, It would appear that locusts and

grasshoppers could fulfil such a requirement. The extent to which these larval

mites ure host-specific requires further study. Some Erythraeoid larvae have

so far been found only upou a restricted host range, while others have a wider

tinge. Thus Smeris (Smarididae) larvae have so far been found only upon

Psocoptera, while within one genus, c.g, Erythvites (Erythraeidae ). one species

may be restricted, thus Erythrites osmondensis (Southcott, 1946) has been

fond only upon Thysanoptera, while other species, such as Erythriles reginae

(Hirst, 1928) and Erythrites urrbrae (Womerslcy, 1934) will parasitize a wide

range of insects (Womersley and Southcott (1941); Southeott (1946, 1960) ).

REMARKS ON THE LIFE HISTORY OF THE ERYTHRAEOIDEA

It is proposed to. make some comparisons of the durations ot the stages in

the life histories of varigus Evythracoidea. Such data are now available for a

number of Australian species af both the families Ervthraeidae and Smaricdidae.

Details of the durations are given in Table 1.

"Based up:m a specimen from Glen Osmond, ‘South Austrulia, Jamuary, 1934 (hh V,

Senitheott) and recorded by Wamersley (L934, p. 235) as C. crus Vitzdn, A restuely of

that specimen shows that it hus considerably shorter sctue than C. areus £, p. from Suunatea

ond the following oew subspecific name is proposed for it: Cy argus ssp. je om. ssp. tn

@, arguy io the dorsal idiosumal setae are 20-136 longs and the scobalae of the anterior

sensillary arca are 76-[3lu Jong, as against the Agures given by Vitethum of 35-190p dor

the idiosomalue and 190u for the scobulac of the anterior sensillary area in C. argues f. po.

My. field notes for the type specimen (ACALG41) of C. argus: ia record it as hehig

collected “very early in January, probably Ist January, 1934 “on surface of water in a

horse fand cattle} Hough (Trough A)” at Glen Osmond. That trough was one af the three

upon which specinitns of Speleagnathus australis Womersley, 1936, were collected by

mysell over J9341041, as noted elsewhere (Southeott, 1957). The map reference for the

sile uf ‘rough A is 656808 Map Adelaide 1:63360 No, 810 Zone 6 Sheet South 154M/ TV

BE & SW. The trough bas now been remoyed for several years, Over the years it was

under stady it was. pluced in contact with the ground, under the shade of a sngar yriem,

Ruculyius cladeealyx, one af some cows that had been planted in about 1895, aveording

to Gill (1905, p. 5). Tt was found that frequently insects, sneh us fies, hymenoptera, sind

collombola, were Down ente the water surface or otherwise meeurred there, also mites, ete.

Presmmably most of these came from the surrounding vegetation. Jb would appear probable

that the Cueculisome was blown in jrom the foliage of the Fnealyptny cladocalyx above,

NOTES ON THE GENUS CAECULISOMA 173

An inspection of Table 1 indicates that over the instars pupa I to pupa JI,

as well as the immobile stage immediately before pupa I, the durations of the

stages or instars are broadly comparable over the speciés studied in the two

families. These data have all been obtained with Australian Erythraeoidea in

experiments conducted by the writer, all being in the Adelaide region of South

Australia with the exception of Caeculisoma darwiniense, which was conducted

in the Darwin region of the Northern Territory. No comparable data exist for

other Erythraeoidea elsewhere in the world, and in fact for the fauna of other

parts of the world only fragmentary data on life-history are available (see

Southcott, 1961),

TABLE 1.

Durations of the stages of Erythracoidon, in days.

Prepupal

immobile stage Pupa I Nymph Pups IT

Erythrites reginae* 2, 3,2 12, 13,12 21 15

Brytirites

osmondensia* 2 9

Erythrites pilosus* 3-4 11-12

DBrythrites urrbrae* 2,2,4,2,1-2,1-2,1-2, | 18, 15, 14, 12, 15-16,) 39, 11+, | 16, 15

12,1 14-15, 15-16, 16 21+-, 138+,

Erythroitea

cluvatus* 7,3 I2

Rainbowin

imperator** 6, 4,6, 4, 4,4, 6,5, | 28, 27+, 58, 45, 25-

26, 23-24, 22, 26, 27,

Callidosama

womersleyi*™ 4,2 9, 12

Onerulisnir

darwiniense a4 , 18, 11-14

Pollua sp.* 6 \4

(ACAS82B)

Smaris prominens*** | 3-7, 7-9, 4-5 27-30, 21-24, 35, 3l- | ROS

| .514-

* Date from Southcott (1946)

** Data Irom Santheatt (1961)

*** Data from Womersley and Southeath (1941),

A closer inspection of Table 1 shows, however, that two main groups can

be separated, thus;

Class 1, the “fast group”. These have a prepupal immobile stage of in general

1-3 days, a pupa I stage of the order of 9-16 days. The group includes

species listed belonging to the genera Erythrites, Erythroides, Callidosoma,

Caecilisoma and Pollux.

Class Il, the “slow group”, have a prepupal stage of the order of 4-6 days (the

range extending occasionally over 3-9 days) and a Jong pupa I stage Jast-

176 R. V. SOUTHCOTT

ing on an average about 30 days, and ranging over 18-58 days. This group

so far includes only Rainbowia imperator (I¥irst, 1928) (family Ery-

thracidae) and Smaris prominens (Banks, 1916) (family Smarididae).

We may then ask whether these two classes correspond to other biological

features in the Erythracoid mites, Table 2 shows a table of the seasonal inci-

dences of the various instars of mites of the Erythraeoidea where there is suffi-

cient knowledge available to list the seasonal incidences of these instars, This

last condition restricts the table to species occurring in temperate Australia, in

fact, most of it is derived from observations made by the writer on the fauna

in the Adelaide region of South Australia (using the same sources as given in

the footnote to Table 1, and in addition Southcott (1960) ).

pee

pec,

Tent

TUNE

CLASS L CLASS IL

Fig. 5.—Diagram to illustrate the two broad classes of life history in the Erythracoidea.

The numbers represent the months of the yeur, by their ordinal number. For class IL

the diagram is interpretative for pupa IT, as precise data are not available for that instar.

As will be observed from the data in Table 2, the larvae have in each case

a limited seasonal distribution. Inspection of the seasonal distributions of the

larvae shows that they are classifiable into two groups: those occurring vver

September to February (exceptionally into Mareél), ie. spring-summar larvae

(genera Erythroides, Erythrites, Callidosoma, Pollux), on the one hand, and

an the other those with larvae occurring in March to June (Smuaris, Sphaero-

tarsus, Rainbowia).

Thus it is found that again we have segrepated the same genera as by our

previous classification of the durations of the instars and stages, The follow-

ing two classes may therefore be proposed:

Class I: the long-duration-egg group, with spring larvae and summer adults, the

non-ege developmental stages being passed through quickly. About 2/3

of the annual evele is passed in the eggs. Examples Erythrites, Evythroides,

Callidosoma, Caeculisoma, Pollux, Microsmaris (all family Erythraeidae).

Class II: the short-duration-egg group, with autumn larvae and spring adults,

the non-cyy developmental stages being passed through more slowly. About

1/3 of the annual cycle is passed in the egg. Examples Rainbowia (family

Frythracidae), Smaris, Sphaeratarsus (family Smarididae),

177

NOTES ON THE GENUS CAECULISOMA

"(19BT ‘OPEL

qyoay MY os) vnj70.F JO sz[Npe oYy oue sioweoIo pT vB poprssep) Sjsnorserd syduidu pur synpe yy qeyy ‘opquqord srvodde sv ‘SuUMSSH ese

“(OPEL FO04RNIOY 998} EOSVOV Jueumodxe uo paseg vase

*oywosdsuod ATGRGOTg yay

‘apquqoad st Yorpa *Shyndso8 “oY AO snyDsdasoaUE “GF LYZO JO BAIL] Of} SI sNADAUPI Sepronyrhag yayy SUTUMSSY yx

‘ORAIL] OY} JO eOUGSIEWO Jo GMI} ATT] UO paseg ,

Se en eee areas

“D3 AON

“D0CT-"AON | ‘90q-*AON kegae GOT AON ‘dds ao +ds avigjog

“UB P-NeCT “LB Poe | 494-901 “2e(] iisjsaauomn WULOSOPIIID)

Arp ady uuInjne ApURUL

#ee% 0OC “PeG-AON BAL ACN “oe(T ABT “any Be savapd sapyghegy

‘ue p UBL" AON hk snpogind sapeygheg

“aq-" AON

“AON

‘aonr-adeg H

xegSISUapUouso sazieyghag

‘AON 'adag

| |

Ayeucrdeaxs

‘URE "DOg ‘oq AON ‘on "AON ‘Ao ‘adag | “WBA UECT ‘RIT AOK | anurhas sapygheg

: ee UB PTAON |

Ayperedse

"DaqU—"AOHT "anaq-"AON “Naq-' AONT “ure day snipanp saprosypiag

“BEC

-ydac-ABpT Aspoudy ABW Ley - ARTA Appa og Atm opnsaduee DINOQUIDAT

omm p-addy ly" qQayy “By 20 snpdojda) snsunjosapyd gy

Anyy-sdw on p-aidy

jeuurseur jeurxeu

“qag-ady sung" Avy Tey (Lepr) e PL ‘awed TTF | suauLiMotd SUD

Tr vdngz ydura yr {T edngz BAICT B3q qanpy OUI

‘areajsny ayeseduiey a0y soroeds puv sivjsul ByplooelyJAIG JO SAUAPOUl pRUOStOS Jo ayy,

3 ATIVL

178 HK, ¥. SOUTHCOTT

Although there are variations from the basic classification proposed, e.g. in

the fact that adults of Smaris prominens may be found throughout the year, or

that Erythrites pilosus adults appear over January to August and the eggs over

May-December, it is apparent that there is a broad separation into the two

classes proposed. An attempt to show these two broad groups in a generalized

way is made in Fig. 5, where the months of the year are represented by their

ordinal numbers as in a conventional 12-hour clockface, thus January by 1,

Febmiary by 2, and so on. For the suuthern hemisphere, therefore, summer will

be represented at the top of the circle and winter at the bottom. Autumn will

be at about 3 o'clock and spring at about 9 oclock. In the northern hemisphere

the reverse would be the case by the same clockface convention.

In Table 2 the details of Caeculisoma darwiniense were not shown, since

the species has so far been recorded only from northern Australia, and only

limited collecting could he done there over May-June, and no information is

available as to the possible seasonal occurrence of the species in other months;

furthermore, the seasonal temperature differences over the year are different

from those of southern Australia, there being no cold season,

REFERENCES*

Canrsrains, G., 1897. Nuovi Acarvidei della N. Guinea, Termés, Fiizetck, 20, pp. 461-474.

Canestrint, G. (21898), Nuovi Acaroidei della N. Guinea (Terza serie), Termés Fiizetek,

21, pp. 480-487.

Canestrim, G. (21899). Acari della Nuova Guinea. Atii Soo. Veneto-Trent, Sei, nat. (2), 3

(2), ca p. 397 (not seen).

Coonraran, J. 1958. Acariens du Congo Belye (2% série), Note sur le genre Caeculisoma

Berlese, 1885 (Acari, Erythraeidae) et description d'une cspéce nouvelle du Coneo

Belge, Rey. Zool. But. Afr,, 58 (1-2), pp. 43-53.

Grev, T., 1903, History and Topography of Glen Qsmond, Pp, vi and 1-161, Adelaide,

Vardon and Pritchard, Printers, Gresham ‘Street.

Newer, 1. M., 1957, ‘Studies on the Johnstenianidue (Acari. Parasitengona). Tacifie

Science, HL (4), pp. 396-466,

Souticorr, R, V., 1946. Studies on Anstralian Erythraeidue (Acarina), Proc. Linn. Soe.

N.S. Wales, 71 (1-2), pp. 6-48.

SoumncoTt, RK. V., 1857. Description of a New Australian Raphignathoid Mite, with Re-

marks on the Classification of the Trombidiformes, Proc. Linn. ‘Soc, N.S. Wales, 81

(3), pp. 306-312,

Sourucort, R, V., 1960. Notes on the Genus Sphuerotarsus (Acarino; Smarididae). Trans,

Roy, Soc. S. Aust., 83, pp, 149-161.

SourHcoTt, R. V., 1961, Studies on the Systematics and Biology of the Erythraedidea

(Acarina), with a Critical Revision of the Genera and Subfainilies. Aust. J. Zool.

(in press).

Virzrvuum, A, G., 1924. Die heutige Acarofauna der Krakatau-lnseln. Treubia, 5, pp. 353-370.

Virztuum, H. G,. 1926. Malayische Acari. Treubia, 8, pp. 1-198.

Womenscey, H., 1934. A Revision of the Trombid (sic) and Erythracid Mites of Australia

with Descriptions of New Genera and Species: Ree. §, Aust. Mus. 5 (2), pp. 179-254.

\Womerstey, H., and Sourncorr, R. V., 1941. Notes on the Smarididae (Acanna) ol

Australia and New Zealand, Trans, Rey, Soc, §. Aust, 65 (1), pp. 41-78,

? Principal references only are given here. A fill bibliography of the genus Caeculixama

ix given by Cooreman (1958) and Southcott (1961), the latter containing « full bibliography

of the Erythraeoicdea,

LIST OF LECTURES GIVEN AT MEETINGS DURING THE

YEAR 1959-60

Summary

LIST

Oct., 1959,

Nov., 1959.

Apr., 1960.

May, 1960.

June, 1960

July, 1960,

Aug., 1960.

Sept., 1960.

OF LECTURES GIVEN AT MEETINGS DURING

THE YEAR 1959-60

Mr. V, J. Bosctizr: “Missile Testing at Woomera”.

Mr. T. R. N. Lorian: “Plant Collecting in Central Australia”.

This was delivered as a Presidential Address.

Pror, J. H. Bennett: “The Role of Heredity in Human Disease”.

Mr. R. C. Sprice: “Oil Search in Australia”.

Dr. T. D. Campsety, Dr. P. Mines, Dr. R. Specur anp Mr. I. M.

Tuomas: “A Symposium on the University of Adelaide’s Expedition

to Pearson Island”.

Mr. B. C. Newnanp: “From Game Laws to Fauna Protection in

South Australia. Evolution of an Attitude”,

Mr. E. J. Symons: “Production of Uranium Oxide at Port Pirie”.

Mr. G. B. SitranMan: “Reproduction in Marsupials”.

BALANCE SHEET

Summary

ROYAL, SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA (INCORPORATED)

REVENUE ACCOUNT

Receipts and Payments for Year ended 3Uth September, 1960.

£ os. d.

To Balance, 1/10/59 mn . . 65413 1

4 Subscriptions .. d & . 333 18 10

»» Government Grant =. me . 1,750 0 0

»» Sale of Publications, etc. . ~ ols 911

» Rent of Rooms .. ’ “ - 3.0 «0

» Interest—

Endowment Fund £259 19 10

Savings Bank 65 9 4

——-—-—— 325 9 2

£3,282 11 0

Audited and found correct,

Tf. M. ANGEL | Hon.

N. 8, ANGEL, A,U,A. Com. f Auditors.

Adelaide, 6th October, 1960.

By Printing and Bubkehing: Volume 83,

Reprints, etc, : 1,622 1

» Library Assistants . i . 116

» Printing and Stationery * ” 65 1

» Postages and ity Stamps .. . 7

» Cleaning and Polishing = . 191

. Insurance i ¥ : . 122

» Lighting .. 3 J - 7 AS

» Shelving, : - . : 118

» Binding , b. a = 808

» Publications Purchased | - i" 26

» Hire of Keys .. : > bie 21

» Sundries ., fe _ " es 8 I

» Balance—

Savings Bank of

$.A., Rundle St. £634 10 5

Less Outstanding

Cheques 43 19 4

——————— 590 I

£3,282 1

F. MITCHELL,

Hon. Treasurer.

ENDOWMENT FUND

Receipts and Payments for Year ended 30th September, 1960.

a eee a eee

£ os, d. hs.

To Balance, 1/10/59 . 6110 0 0 By Revenue A/c Transfer : w =259 IT

> Walter Howchin Bequest— Balanee—

Received from Commonwealth

Public Trustee— Inscribed

Commonwealth Stock . 9,220 0 0

Inseribed S.A. Inscribed

Stock _ £810 0 0 Stock... . 150 0 0

Gas Co. Bonds 200 0 0 §.A. Gas Co,

$.A. Inseribed Bonds _ wo. 3800 0 0

Stock 150 0 0 =+=———— 9,670 {

Cash—Since In-

vested in In-

scribed Stock 2,400 0 0

Balance Interest 1149

—-_-—--—— 3,561 14 9

x Investment Interest—

Inscribed Stock .. 251 17 7

Gas Co. . x 6 7 6

—----— 258 5 1

£9,929 19 10 £9,929 I

Audited and found correct.

been inspected in the hands of “ pag

F. M. ANGEL

N. 8. ANGEL, A.U.A. Com. ene

Adelaide, 6th October, 1960,

The Stock has been verified by certificates and the Gas Co. Bonds ]

¥,. MITCHELL,

Hon. ‘Treasurer,

AWARDS OF THE SIR JOSEPH VERCO MEDAL

Summary

AWARDS OF THE SIR JOSEPH VERCO MEDAL

1929 Pror. WALTER Howcrmn, F.G.S.

1930 Jomn McC. Brack, ALS.

1931 Pror. Sm Douc tas Mawson, 0.B.E., D.Sc. B.E., I.B.S,

1933. Pror, J. Burton Cieranp, M.D,

1935 Pror. T. Harvey Jounsron, M,A., D.Sc.

1938 Pror. J. A. Presnorr, D.Sc., P.A.CI.

1943 Hennewt Womerstey, A.LS,, F.R.E.S,

1944 Pror, J. G. Woop, D,Sc., Ph.D.

1945 Crcm T, Manican, M.A., B.E., D.Sc, F.G.S.

1946 Hersenr M. Hate, O,B.E.

1955 LL, Kerra Waup, 1.S.0., B.A., B.E., D.Sc.

N, B, Trypace, B.Sc.

1957 C, &. Preen, D.Sc.

C. G. Svernens, D.Se.

H. UH, Fintayson.

LIST OF FELLOWS

AS AT 30th SEPTEMBER, 1960.

Those marked with an asterisk (*) have contributed papers published in the Society's

Transactions. Those marked with a dagger (+) are Life Members.

Any change in address or any other changes should be notified to the Secretary.

Note—Thv publications of the Society are not sent to those members whose subscriptions

are in arrears.

Date of

Date of Ionorary ‘ q LOW

pee teste Honorary FELLows

1895 1949 °Crevann, Prog, J, B., M,D., Dashwood Road, Beaumont, 5.A--Verca Medal,

1933; Council, 1921-26, 1932-37; President, 1927-28, 1940-41; Vice-

President, 1926-27, 1941-42.

1913 1955 *Osnorn, Paor. T. C. B., D.Sc, St. Mark’s College, Pennington Terrace,

North Adelaide—Coynoil, 1915-20, 192224; Vice-President, 1924-25,

1926-27; President, 1925-26,

1912 1955 *Wanp, L. K., 158.0., BA. B.E., D.Se,, 22 Northumberland Street, Heath-

pool, Marryatville, S.A.—Council, 1924-27, 1933-35; Vice-President,

1927-28; President, 1928-30,

Date of *ELLOWS

Flection F o

1946. ‘Apne, Prov. A, A., M.D., D.Se., Ph. Department of Aualomy, University of

Adelaide, North Terrace, Adalaide. S.A.

1958. *Aneue, K,, Dr. Phil, (Marburg), Dr,Phil.Nat. ('Tarti-Dorpat), M.Sc. (Riga), 42

Kildouan Road, Warradale Park, S.A.

1959, Arrken, P., B.Sc., South Australian Museum, North Terrace., Adelaide. S.A.

1927. *AcpeRman, Pror, A. R., Pb.D., D.Sc, F-G.S., Department of Geology, University of

Adelaide, North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A—Council, 1937-42, 1934-37.

1951. *Annunson, Mrs, §. HL, B.Se., 31 Lakeman Street, North Adelaide, 5.A.

1935, *AworewantHa. H, G,, M.Ag.Se,, DSc, “Zoology Dept. University of Adelaide,

North ‘Terrace, Adelaide, S.A.—Council, 1949-50; Vice-President, 1950-51, 1952-53;

President, 1951-52.

1935, ®AnnarwantHa, Mus. H. G., B.Agr.Se.. M.Sc. (nee H. V, Steele), 29 Claremont

Avenue, Netherby, S.A.

1929. *Ancet, F. M., 34 Pullacton Road, Parkside, S.A.

1939, *Anoun, Miss L. M., M-Se., 2 Moore Street. Toorak, Adelaide, S.A.

1960. Anecnsoiw, K, V., South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A.

1945. °Bantiert, H. K., L.Th., 2 Abbotshall Road, Lower Mitcham, S.A.

1954. HKauek, F, H.. Department of Geography, Universily of California, Riverside, Cali-

fornia, U.S.A,

1950, Brox, R. G., BAg.Sc., B.D.A., Lynewood Park, Mil-Lel, via Mount. Gambier, S.A.

1932. Bercc, P, R., D.D.Se., L.D.S., Shell House, 170 North Terrace, Adelaide.

1928. Bus, R. J., D.Sc, F.A.C.1., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag, No, 1), Adelaide.

142

Deie of

Election

1856.

1954,

1950,

LIST OF TELLOWS

Buack, A. B., A.S.A.S.M., M.LM.M., 36 Woodcroft Avenue, St, Georges, S.A.

Buack, F, C,, MK. BS. Maedll Road, Wvanmere, $A.

Borie, N. J. M.B, BS, FRCS. (Bng.), FRACS. 19 Marlborough St., College

SA.

Pav ty

1945, F*Bonrraon, C. W., B.Sc, AA.C.1., Romalo House, Romalo Avenue, Mayill, S.A.

1902.

}H56,

1959,

1937,

1OaT,

1958.

1158,

1959,

1954,

1953,

1935,

159,

1448.

1944,

Bonytnon, Sin J. Lavincron, 263 fast Terrace, Adulaide, S.A,

“Boomsma, C. D., M.Su, 8.$e-For., 6 Celtic Avenue, South Road Park, 8.A.

*Bowes, D. R., PhP, (Lond.), DLC. F.G.S., Department of Geology. University,

Glasgow, Seothed,

“Brookes, Miss H. M.. Dept. of Entomology, Waite Institute (Private Mail Bay, No,

1), Adelaide, S.A,

Burex, W. G,, B.A. cfo Country Lending Service, Public Library, South Australia,

_ SeERCe Miss N. T.. MiSe, C.S.1.R.0., Div. Plant Industry, P.O. Box 109, Cun-

bert, ALCL).

Burine, L., 51 Richmond Road, Westbourne Park, S.A.

*Campuesnt, Pror, T, D. D.D.Se,, D.se., 24 Lynington Street, ‘Pismure, S.A.—

Couneil, 1928-32, 1935, 1942-45; Vice-President, 1932-34; President, 1934625,

Canvurr, C., 2 Harris St, Glenely, S.A,

Cannopus, BB. R.D.Oen., 26 Degiettville Terrace, Kent ‘Town, S.A.

Cantir, A. N., BSc.. 8 Seott St. Maroubra Bay, N.S.W,

Carrey, D. EL, & Cudmore Terrace, Whyalla, S.A,

°Gwiprennace, CG, M., B.Sc, Lindsay Avenue, Alive Springs, N.T,.

Ciurtstm, W., M.B., BS, 7 Walter Street, Hyde Park, Adelaide, 3.:A—Treasurer,

1935-35.

Crornren, E, A., Hydroelectric Commission, Hobart, ‘Tas,

a nes Na 5. Gcolagy Departuient, University of Queensland, St. Lucia, Bris-

ane, Q. :

*Covron, B. C., EVR.ZS., J.P, South Australian Mnseuni, North Terrace, Adelaide—

Council, 1943-46, 1948-49: Vice-President, 1949-50, 1951-52; President, 1950-41;

Programme Secretary, 1959-,

Cnawrorn, A. BR, B.Sc. Miney Department, 169 Rundle St, Adelaide, S.A.

Dany, B,, Ph.D, South Australan Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A —Pro-

gramme Seeretaty, 1957-59, .

Davinsen, A, L. C., Ph.D., B.Se., c/a Messrs, Simpson & Brookman, 34 Grenfell St,

Adelaide, S.A.

Detanp, C. M., M.B., B.S. DiP.H., D.T.M., 29 Gilbert Strect, Gaodwnod, S.A—

Couneil, 1952-.

Dix, E. V., Box 12, Aldgate, S.A.

Dourt, K. M., M.Ag.Se., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag, No. 1), Adelaide.

Dunuor, P. RB. G., B.Sc, 13 Walton Ave,, Clearview, S.A.

Duxstonr, 5. M, L,, M.B., B.S., 170 Payneham Road, St. Peters, S.A,

Dwver, J. M., M.B.. B.S., 105 Port Road, Hindmarsh, $.A,

*Eanpury, Miss C. M., M.Sc, .L.S., Department of Botany, University of Adelaide,

North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A.—Council. 1943-46.

*Epxronps, S. J. BA. M.Se., Ph.D., Zoology Department, University of Adelaide,

North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A.—Couneil, 1954-55; Programme Secretary. 1955-56;

Secretary, 1956-57.

*Enouist, A, G., 19 Farrell Street, Glenely, S.A Council, 1949-533.

a aes H., Dr.rer.nat., State Herbariun, Botanic Garden, North Terrace, Adelaide,

S.A,

Piewoen, D. R., B.Se,, Dept, of Zoology, University, North ‘Terrace, Adelaide, S.A.

*Finuaxyson, H, H,, 305 Ward St., North Adelaide—Verea Medal, 1960; Council,

1937-40),

Fisnesg, R. H., 21 Seaview Koad, Lyriton, S.A,

°Foxses, B. G., PLD. F.GS., 9 Flinders Road, Hillerest, S.A,

Fonp, A. W,. 1.5, ACCS, 380 South Terrace, Bankstown, N.S.W.

Forvr, N., Dip.For., C.8.1.0,0,, Canberra, A.C,T. ;

Gipson, A. A., A.WLAS.M.. Minos Department, 169 Rundle St., Adelaide, S.A.

“Grarssnen, M. I, D.Se., Geology Department, University of Adelaide, North Ter-

tree, Adelaide, S:A—Canneil, 1953-54; Vice-Preyident, 1958-59.

fGo.osack, If, Coromandel Valley, S.A.

Green, Miss L, M.A. B.A., M.Sc, Dept. of Anatomy and Histology, University of

Adwluide, North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A,

Gross, C. F., M.8e., South Australian Museum, Adelaide—Secretary, 1950-53.

Curey, D. J., BSc. c/o W.A, Petroleum Co., 251 Adelaide ‘Terrace, Parth, WA,

Date of

lection

Ly22.

1949.

1930,

1953.

1416.

4944,

LG).

1958.

1960,

144.

O51,

1959.

Lo2d.

1944.

S47.

1928,

L960,

1948,

LOBD,

1057.

1958.

1954,

1939,

431.

1953,

1939,

1959,

150,

1920,

1948,

1945,

1952,

1939.

1958,

IP5!.

1933.

1925,

1936,

1957,

1944.

j944,

1945,

LIST OF FELLOWS 183

*Hate, H. M., O.B.E., 25 Ruehester St, Leabrook, $.A.—Vercn Medal, $946; Cavacil.

1931-34, 1950-59, 1956-; Vicew-Fresident, 1934-36, 1937-38; Presidint, 1936-37;

Treusuren, 1938-50, 1953-56,

act, D, R., Tea Tree Gully, S.A, ; ;

tHanxcock, N. L., 3 Bewdley, GU Beresford Road, Rose Bay, N.S.W-

*Tansen, IL. V., BA., Queen Elizabcth School, Crediton, Devon, Bowland.

°Harpy, Mus. J. E, (nee A, C. Beckwith), M.Se., Stewart Ave., Salisbury, S.A,

Hanns, J. R., B.Sc, c/a Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag, No. 1), Adelaide, S.A-

Hawnison,, J., 7 MetQuillan Ave., Resowsi Park, $.A.

Haynar, J. 1. B.Se,, 68 Pleasant Avenue, Glandore, $.A,

Hayman, D. 4, Ph.D, Cenetics Department, University of Adelaide, North ‘Turace,

Adelaide, S.A.

Heriot, KR. 1, B.Agr.Se., 49 Halsbury Avenue, Kingswood, S.A.

Hockine, L. J., 46 Kauri Facade, Seactifl, S.A.

Horwrrz, B.C, H., D.Sc, 6 Vardon Street, Seaconnbe Gardens, S.A,

*Hosseuty, P, §&., Pi.D., 132 Fisher Street, Fullarton, S.A,

Hunme, DS. W. MPLS, J.P, 238 Paynchany Road, Payneham, 5.A.

*Hurron. J. T., Bebe, AS.ASM,, LO Bellovne Place, Unley rark Coun, 157

Iroutn, P,, 14 Wyatt Road, Burnside, S.A,

Inciam, L, J., 31 Florence: St, Fullarton, ‘S.A. .

Trisuy, RN. W., M.Se., Division of Taint Industry, C.S.LB.0,, 2.0. Box 100, City,

Cunberra, ACT,

"lors, R, K., B.Sc. Department of Mines, 169 Rundle St, Adelaide, S.A.

Jounson, B., B.Sc.Agr., Ph.D., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag, No, 1), Adelaide.

*Tornson, W,, B.Se. (Hons.), 83 Ryan Avenue, Woodville West, 5.4,

Kearse, A. L., BK. 44 Lefevre Terrace, North Adelaide, 8.4,

(Erpsian Ti. M., Ph.D,, M.B., F.R.G.S., Khakhar Baildings, C.2. Tank Road, Boin-

ay, India

°King, D., M.Se., c/o Commercial Bank of Australia, King Williany St., Adclaide, S.A,

*Kireman, A. W., Ph.D., Dept. of Geolugy, University of Adelaide -Secretary, 1945-

48; Viee-Prosident, 1948-49, 1950-51; Presiclent, 1949-50.

Kiicnen, BR. H., Boseworthy Agricultural College, Rloseworthy, S.A.

*Lancyam-Saarry, 'l., B.A, M.Se., PhD., Dept. of Geography, University pf Sydney,

Sydney, NSW,

Lenvon, G. A. M.D, B.S., FRCP. c/o, Elder's Trustee and Exectitor Gu, Ltd.

37 Currie Street, Adelaide, S.A.

Lryosay, H, A., 110 Cross Road, Highgate. ‘S.A.

Lorian, T. BR. N. NDF (N.Z.), Director, Botanic Garden, Adelaide, 8.A—

aegianter, 1952-53; Council, 1953-57; Vice-President, 1957-58, 1960-61; President,

958-60),

*Luiprook, Mas. N. H., M.A., PD. D.C... F.GS., Department of Mines, 169

Rundle St, Adelaide, S.A.—Council, 1958-59; Vice-President, 1960-61,

Mauzen, D. A., B.Sc, (Hons.), Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag, No, 1), Adelaide.

Mausuara., T. J, MAgrSe, Ph.D, GS.CR.O., Division of Soils (Private Mail Baz,

No. 1), Adelaide —Council, 1948-52.

Mantin, Miss H. A. 43 Dimrobm Toad, Brighton, $.A,

Mayo, G. M. E., B.Ag.Se., PlD., 29 Angas Rel., Lower Mitcham, S.A.

Mavo, $m Hunnenr, LL.B, O.C., 19 Marthorongh Street, College Park, S.A.

Metin Gast, ‘a N,, M.B.E., B.Se., B.-Avr.Se.. Ruseworthy Agricultural College, Rase-

worthy, B.A,

+? Niwas, KL OR. D.Sc. FG.S., 11 Church Road, Mitcham, 5.A.

Muunr, K. L., .C.A., 14 Burlington Street, Walkerville, S.A.

Mincaiuant, Vo TL, 80 Watnhouse Street, Torrensville, S.A.

Minams, R..G., B.Sc, 3 Myrtle Ke., Seacliff, S.A.

a F, J., South Australian Museum. North Terrace, Adelaide, 5.A.—Treusurer,

DSi-.

Mrraxe.t., Puor. Sra M. L., MSe,, efo Elder's Trustee amd Executor Co, Til, 47

Corrie Steoet, Adelaide,

tMrreneLy, Pror, Sin W,, K.C.M.G,, M.A... DSe., Fiterny Terrace, Prospect, 3,4.

*Movuntronp. C. P., 25. First Avenue, St. Peters, Adelaide,

°Muamim, Ivan A, B.Sc. (Hons.), Department of Mines, 169 Rundle St, Adelaide,

Munnicey, J. W., Engineering and Waiter Supply Dept., Vietoria Squire, Adelaide.

Ninwes, A, R., B.A. R.DA., 62 Sheffield Streel, Malvern, S.A,

*Nortucor, K. H., BAgrSe, ALAS, C.S.TR.0.. Division of Sails (Private Mail

Bag, No, 1), Advlaide, S.A.

184 LIST OF FELLOWS

Date of

Election

1930, Ockrnpen, G. P., B.A., 68 Holbrooks Rad., blinders Park, S.A.

1956. O'Dniseoiy, KE. S., B.Se., 9 Vinall Streel, Dover Gardens, S.A,

1937. *Pankiw, L. W., M.Se., A.S.T.C,, Department of Mines, 169 Rundle St, Adelaide,

$.A—Séeretary, 1953-56; Vice-President, 1956-57, 1958-39; President, 1957-58.

1949, Pancrxson, K. J., B.So., 91 Stuart St, Hillerest, S.A.

1929. Pavir, A. G., M.A. BSc. LO Milton Avenue, Fullerton Estate, S.A, __

1926, °Pirrn, C.S., D.Se., CSIRO. Division of Soils (Private Mail Bag, No. 1), Adeluide—

Verco Medal, 1957; Counetl, 1941-43; Vice-President, 1943-45, 1546-47; Pre-

sident, 1945-1946,

tei8. Bown, J. K., BSe., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag, Na. 1), Adelaide, 5.A.

1925, °Pnescort, Pror, J. A. C..E., D.Sc, FRACS, PRS, 82 Cross Roewd, Myrtle

Bank, .S.A—Verew Medal, 1935; Cotwnell, 1927-30, 1935-39; Viee-President,

1930-33; President, 1932-33; Dditer, 1955-,

1957. °Pmacie, Miss L. A. #,, Box $7Ge, GO. Adelaide,

1945. °Payox, L. D., M.Sc, Dip.For., 33 La Perouse Street, Griffith, Canberra, A.C,T,

1950, *Ravncan, J. WH. M-Sc., Neweastle University College, Tigh’s Hill, 2N, N.S.W.

1944, Riersran, D, $., M.Sc,, AgrSo., C.S,LR.0., Division of Biochemistry, Adelaide,

1947. Rirper, W.R., B.Su., u/o Seripps Institution of Oceanography, Dept. of Palucon-

tology, University of California, La Jolla, Cilitarnia, U.S.A,

1947, Rix, C. Ey 42 Wasinouth Avenne, Glandore, S.A.

1953. Rocers, Paor. W. P., PhD. FAA, M.LBioL, ‘Zovlogy Dept,, University of Adulaide,

North Terrace. Adelaide, S.A. :

1951, Rowe, S. A,, 22 Shelley Street, Firle, S.A.

1950, Reno, Pror. E, A., B.Sc, AML, University of Adelaide, North Terrace, Adelaide,

SA.

USL, Russexn, L, D,, c/o Adelaide Boys’ High School, West Terrace, Adelaide, 5.4.

1045. Ryan, J. B., Old Penola Estate, Penola. 3.A.

1933, Scxwemer, M., M.B., BS., 175 North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A.

1958. ape ering fy Division of Land Research and Divisional Survey, C.S.[R.0., Gan-

pera, AGU,

151) *Seorr, T, D., MiSe., S.A, Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, $,.A4.— Progranune

Seeretary, 1955-54, 1956-57; Secretary, 1957-58.

1957, SHanmas, G, B., B.Sc., Departinent of Zoology, University, North Terrace, Adelaide,

S.A,

185, PSararv, H., Port Ellivt, §.A,

1936, "Sreann, K., D.Sc, C.8.0.1.0., Division of Nisheries and Oceanography, University

of W.A.. Nedlands, W.A.

1954. SHepHeun, BR. G., B.Sc, e/o Department of Mines, 160 Rundle St, Adelaide, S.A.

1959, Surrnay, Miss BE. A. MuSu. 97 North Terrace, Kensington Gdns, S.A.

1934. Simexriecp, R. C., 57 Canterbury Avenue, Trinity Gardens, 5A.

1925, *Smuing, Sin Toxr Bann, Kt, B.A,, 25 Currie Street, Adeluide.

1941. *Sourucott, R. V., M.D. BS. D.1.M. & H., 13 Jasper Steet, Hyde Park, 5.A—

Council, 1949-51, 1952-33, 1957-60; Treasurer, 1951-52, Vice-President, 1953-54,

1953-56: President, 154-55, 1960-61.

1936, Soutitwoop, A. R., M.D... M.S. (Adel), M.R-C.P_, 170 North Terrace, Adeliide, S.A

1947, °Specer, NR. L.. PLD... Botany Department, University of Adelatile—Council, 1951-52,

1958-60: Proeramine Secretary, 1952-53,

1936. #*Sprica, R. C., M.Se., 5 Baker Street, Somerton Park.

1949, “Spay, A. TL, M.Se., Geulugy Deparhnent, University of Pasmania, Hobart, ‘Tas,

1947. Spontimc, M. B., B.Ag.Se., Torticultural Branch, Department of Agriculture, Nox

901 B, G.P.O., Adelaide, S.A.

1951. Sreapmay, Rev. W. R., 8 Blairgowrie Road, St, Georges, S.A- |

1938. *Sreeiuens, C, G., D.Se., G.S.1.G.O., Division of Soils (Private Mail Bae, No. 1), Ade-

laide—Verco Medal, 1959; Council, 1992-54; Vice-President, 1954-53, 156-57;

President, 1953-56. ;

1955, Swarr, C, D,, M.B,, B.S., 220 Esplanade, Largs North, 8.A.

1932, Swany. D. C.. M.Se., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag, No. 1), Adelaide—Sacretary.

1940-42: Vice-President, 1946-47, 1948-49: President, 1947-48; Counetl, 1953-54.

1951. ‘Syorser, P.. M.AgiSe.. 13 Derwent Ave. Rostrevnr, S.A,

1960. ‘Syatons, EB. F., Uraniun Treatment Plant, Patt Porte, 8.4.

1954. SYM L G,, 35 Murray Street, Lower Mitcham, §A—Fditor, 1947-55; Council,

1958. Taynon, D. J,, Dept. of Entomology, Waite Tnstitute (Private Mail Bag, No, 1),

Adelaide, S.A.

1959. Tayior, DB, J.; 23 Westbourne St.. Prahran Fast, Vic.

Date ot

Election

1929.

1955.

1948,

1938.

1957.

1940.

1959.

1933,

1955.

1959,

1960.

1950,

1053.

1954,

1950.

1946,

1950,

1946.

1938,

1933,

LIST OF FELLOWS 185

*Tayror, J, K,, BA. MSc, C.S.LR.0., Division of Soils (Private Mail Bag, No. 1),

Adelaide—Council, 1940-43, 1947-50; Librarian, 1951-52; Vice-Prestilent, 1952-

53, 1954-55; President, 1953-54; Council, 1955.

Tnatcnen, D.. B.Sc., Department of Mines, 169 Rundle St., Adelaide, §.A,

*THomas, I. M., M,Se, (Wales), M.1.Biol., Department of Zoology, University of

Adelaide—-Seeretary, 1948-50; Council, 1950-53; Vice-President, 1955-56, 1957-58;

President, 1956-57; Axsistunt Fditer, 1958-,

*THomaAs, Mus. L. M, (nee P. M. Mawson), M.Se., Department of Zoology, University

of Adelaide, North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A,

Tuomas, J,, B.Sc,, Woodieigh Road, Blackwood, S.A.

*THompson, Cart. J. M., 135 Military Road, Semaphore South, S.A.

Tuomson, B, B,, M.Se,, 33 Oaklands Road; Parkholme, S.A.

*Tinpatn, N. B., B.Se., South Australian Musewn, North Terraee, Adelaide, S.A—

Veren Medal, 1956; Secretary, 1935-36; Council, 1946-47; Vice-President, 194T-

48, 1949-50; President, 1948-49; Librarian, 1953-.

*Tucken, B. M., B.Se., €,S$.1.R.0., Division of Soils (Private Mail Bag, No. 1),

Adelaide, S.A.

Twmarr, C. R., PhiD., M.Sc, Dept. of Geography, University of Adelaide, North

‘Verrace, Adelaide, S.A.

“Tycen, M.. J., Dept. of Physiology, University of Adelaide, Adelaide, S.A.

Tynan, A, E., c/o Australian Mineral Development Laboratories, Flemington St.,

Parkside, S.A.

Vewrcn, J. T., Box 92, Port Lincoln, S.A.

Wieraiany R. A. BAL, M.A. PhD, Wayne State University, Detroit, Michigan,

Wes, B. P., M.Se., Department of Mines, 169 Rundle St, Adelaide, §.A.

Weuus, C. B, B.Ag.Sc., Broadlees, Waverley Ridge, Crafers, S.A.

WuHeLan, Prov, R. F., Department of Physiology, University of Adelaide, North

Terrace, Adeluide, S.A,

Wes r A. W. G., M-Se., ¢/o Australian Mineral Development Laloratorics, Park-

side, S.A,

Wiruams, L. E., “Durnosu,” Meningie, S.A. ;

*Witson, Pror. A. F,, D.Se., Dept, of Geology, University of Queensland, St. Lucia,

Brisbane, Old.

FWirson, J. O., 42 Wilson Terrace, DaCosta Park, Glenelg, S.A.

“Wostensuey, HL, P.RELS., A-L.S. (Hon. causa), South Australian Mtsenm, North

Terrace, Adelaide — Vereo Medal, 1943; Secretury, 1936-37; Editor, 1937-43,

1945-47; President, 1943-44; Vice-President, 1944-45; Rep. Flora ane Fauna Pra-

teclion Commritiee, 1945; Treasurer, 1950-51, 1956-59.

*WomensLey, H. B. $., D.Sc., Botany Department, University of Adelaide, North Ter-

Adelaide, S.A,

Womensiey, J. $., B.Sc., Dept. of Forests, Lae, New Guinea.

Woons, R. V., B.Se,, Mt. Crawford, $.A,

Yearns, J. N.. A.MALE., AM.LM.E., Highways and Local Government Dept.

Adelaide, SuA-

Zrmme_er, W. J., Dip.For., FS. (Lond,), 7 Rupert St., Footscray West, W.12, Vict.

AWARDS OF THE SIR JOSEPH VERCO MEDAL

Summary

GENERAL INDEX

Names printed. in italics as separete entries indicate that the forms are new to science.

Acarina, Description of the Female

af trichenyssus wmomersleyt

Domrow = (Acarina, = Mesustig-

mati): H. Womersley se a,

Acarina, Labidostommidae from Aus-

tealia with the Description of a

New Species: Warren T. Atyeo

and D, A, Crossley - 2 e-

Acarina, Notes on the genus Caeculi-

soma; R, V. Seutheatt . al

Acitting, on the Family Diarthro-

phallidac, with Particular Refer-

ence to the Genus Passwlobie lom-

bardini. 1926: H. Womersley

Acarina, (Some) from Australia and

New Guinea Paraphagic upon Mil-

lipedes and Cockroaches and

Beetles of the Family Passalidae.

Part 4, The Tamily Dtarthro-

phallidae; H, Womersley mn

Adelaide, Determination of the

Crustal Thickness of the Earth in

the General Region of: I. A.

Mumme_ .. 1 a :

Andamooka Opalfield, Outline of

Biostrutigraphy of: N. H, Lnd-

broak .. 2 ¥ h 7

Angel, L. M.: Larvul Trematodes

from Australian Fresh-water Mol-

Inses, Fart XV. Cercaria teles-

unionis nD. sp. ow as: 7 1a

Archaeological Stone Tiiplements

along the Lower River Wakefield,

South Australia: H, M, Cooper _.

Atveo, Warren T., and D. A. Cross-

ey: Labidostommidae (Acarina,

Prostigmata) from Australia with

the Description ot 2 New Species

Bassia burbidgeae

Rassia constricta ,

Bassia cichleri

Bassia gardneri sy a v.

Bassia uniflora (FvM.) (Chenopo-

dineeae) and Allies in Australia:

E. H. Ising A + . .

Brachytremella bornemisszai

Brachytremella trigardht

Brachytremelloides striata

Cueculisoma argus io

Cacoulisoma daruwinense 7

Caeculisoma (Acarina, TErythraei-

dae): Notes on the Genus: R, V,

Southeott ‘\e - ok ile

Central Australia, Contributions to

the Flora of, No, 2: G. M. Chip-

pendale __.. i” ” Fe -

165

Cercaria telusunionis — _ 2 _

Chippendale, G, M,: Contributions

to to. Flora of Central Australia,

No, 2... Mi 4 f he

Contributions to the Flora of Central

Australia, No. 2: G. M, Chippen-

dale 4 é _ be

Cooper, H, M.: Archaeological Stone

Implements along the Lower River

Wakefield, South Australia

Crocidolites, the Occurrence and

Comparative Mineralogy of South

Australian Magnusiun: D. King ..

Crassley, D. A., sce Atyeo, Warren T.

Crustal ‘Uhickness of the Earth in

the General Region of Adelaide,

South Australia: I. A. Mumme. ...

Diarthrophallidae (Acurina, Mesv-

stimmata, Monogynaspida ) .

Tinlaysan, H. H.; Re-examrination of

Mesembryomys hiirsutus Gould,

1842 (Mnridae) = ts

Freshwater Molluscs, Larval Tre-

matodes from, Part XV, Cercaria

velesunionis, no sp. L., M. Angel

Hemidactylus dgenanes (Domeérsil and

Bibron ) Reptilia—Geckonidae ),

Diet and Feeding Wabits at Ran-

goon, Burma: M. J. Tyler ..,

Ising, E. Hi; Bassia unflora (FvM.)

(Chenopodiacen) and Allies in

Australia . F

King, D.; The Occurrence and Com-

parative Mincralogy of South Aus-

tralian Crocidolites (Rhoducites)

Lahidostomma wamersleyi :

Labidosturmnidae from Australia

(Acarina, Mesostigmata), with

Description of a New Species:

Weston T. Atyeo and D, A. Cross-

ey : My ; a .

Laryal ‘lrematodes from Australian

Fresh-water Molluses, Part XV,

Cercaria velesunionis, n.sp.: L. M.

Anyel AY c. “ bn

Lombaredimella lomberilinii ad

Ludbrook, N. H.: Mesozoic Non-

marine Mollusca ( Pelecypoda-

Unionidae) from the North of

South Australia _ ‘ =

Ludbrook, N, H.; Outline of the Bio-

stratigraphy of Andamooka Opal-

Liste = ' <i tet pe!

149

45.

119

188 GENERAL INDEX

Ludbrook, N. Subsurface Strati-

graphy of the Maralinga Area,

South Australia

Maralinga, Subsurface “Stratigraphy

of: N. H. Ludbrook .

Mesembryomys hirsutus Gould, 1842

(Muridae), Re-examination _ of:

H. H. Finlayson _ os a

Mesozoic Non-marine Mollusea

(Pelecypoda-Unionidae) from the

North of South Australia: N. 1.

Ludbrook .

Mumme, I. A.: Determination of the

Crustal Thickness of the Earth in

the General Region of Adelatde:

South Australia Ss .

Oceurrence and Comparative Miner-

alogy of South Australian Magne-

sian Crocidolites (Rhoducites): D.

King , t i :

Oxalis, the Species of, Established

in South Australia: D. E. Symon

Passalana f

Protovirgus coatsi.

Protovirgus jaenschi

Reptilia, on the Diet and Feeding

Habits of Hemidactylus frenatus

(Duméril and Bibron) at Ran-

guon, Burma: M. J. Tyler

Re-examination _ of Mesembryomys

hirsutus Gould, 1842 (Muridae) ..

South Australia, the Species of

Oxalis Established in: D. E.

Symon ' of

139

119

146

145

149

Symon, D. E.: The Species of

Oxalis Established in South Aus-

tralia: D, E. Symon ...

Southcott, R. V.; Notes on the ‘Genus

Cacculisoma (Atarina-Er y-

thraeidae) a ' vi

Trichonyssus womersleyi Domrow,

Description of the Female of: H.

Womersley .

Tyler, M. J.: On the Diet and Feed-

ing Habits of Hemidactylus frena-

tus {Duméril and Bibron) (Rep-

tilia-Geckonidae} at Rangoon,

Burma ste . we oe

Univ springfieldensis

Woamcersley, IL: Deeseription of the

Female of Trichonyssus tvomers-

leyi (Domrow (Acarina-Macro-

nyssidae )

Wamersley, H.: On the Family Diar-

throphallidae (Acarina, | Meso-

stigmata, Monogynaspida) with

Particular Reference to the Genus

Passalobia lombardini

Womersley, H.: Some Acarina from

Australia and New Guinea Para-

phagie upon Millipedes and Cock-

roaches and Beetles of the Family

Passalidae, Part 4. The Family

Diarthrophallidae e

Wakefield River (Lower, South Aus-

tralia), Archaeological Stone Im-

plements along : :

163

145

CONTENTS

Memoir and Bibliography: Joseph Garnett Wood, 1900-1959

H. Womerstey: Some Acarina from Australia and New Guinea Paraphagic

upon Millipedes and Cockroaches and on Beetles of the Family

Passalidae. Part 4. The Family Diarthrophallidae .

H. Womersrey: On the Family Diarthrophallidae (Acarina-Mesostigmata-

Monogynaspida) with Particular Reference to the genus Passalobia

Lombardini_.... ., Me ee ie Sa

M. J. Tyzer: On the Diet and Feeding Habits of Hen chon tas frenatus

(Duméril and Bibron) (Reptilia-Geckonidae) at Rangoon, Burma

N. H. Lupsroox: Subsurface Str: secarenny of the Meus tinge Area, South

Australia bat Fn Ba ih = Aon oe ed, Ee

Munmme, I. A.: Determination of the Crustal Thickness of the Earth in the

General Region of Adelaide, South Australia

L. M. Ancex: Larval Trematodes from Australian Fresh-water Molise,

Part XV. Cercaria velesunionis n. sp.

D. E. Syston: The Species of Oxalis Established in South on

H. Womenrstey: Description of the Female of Trichonyssus pga

Domrow (Acarina-Macronyssidae ) ee lc at cate

Warren T. AtyEo ann D. A. Crosstry: Labidostommidae from Australia

(Acarina-Prostigmata) with the Description of a New Species

E. H. Istne: Bassia yiilinee eee) hope ae Sc and Allies in

South Australia ere ION he a me ee ae ad

G. M. Cumrrnpare: Contributions to the Flora of Central Australia, No. 2

H. M. Cooprr: Archaeological Stone bebe along the Lower River

Wakefield, South Australia _..... i ae ae oe ee

D. Kine: The Occurrence and Comparative serail of South Aus-

tralian Magnesian Crocidolites (Rhoducites) 0.0 0 osu.

N. H. Lupproox: Outline of the Biostratigraphy of Andamooka Opalfield

N. H. Lupsroox: Mesozoic Non-marine Mollusca (Pelecypoda- eiceee?

from the North of South Australia. 0,

H. H. Fmmayson: Re-examination of Mese sembryomys hirsutus Gould, 1843

(Muridae) ie Fie nan ee ag Se eRe bam Ih:

R. V. Sovrscorr: Notes on the Genus Caeculisoma eee Erythraeidae )

List of Lectures, 1959-1960 __... ae =r ar rahe a,

Balance Sheet __..... ee es oe ee a, gS mate

Awards of the Sir Tonto S Verco Medal and List of Fellows, 1960 ....

Index __e...... = Pt i, Se Spare rd = ree

PAGE